Ebi Install PDF

Enterprise Buildings Integrator

Installation Guide

Release 410

Document

Release

Issue

Date

EBI-ZZDOC410-01

410

2

April 2010

Notice This document contains Honeywell proprietary information. Information contained herein is to be used solely for the purpose submitted, and no part of this document or its contents shall be reproduced, published, or disclosed to a third party without the express permission of Honeywell International Sàrl. While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer. In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any direct, special, or consequential damages. The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice. Copyright 2010 – Honeywell International Sàrl Honeywell trademarks Honeywell Enterprise Buildings Integrator™ is a trademark of Honeywell International Inc, and SafeBrowse® is a U.S. registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. Other trademarks Microsoft and SQL Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Trademarks that appear in this document are used only to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention of trademark infringement. Support and other contacts For technical assistance, call your nearest Honeywell office. Training classes Honeywell holds technical training classes on Enterprise Buildings Integrator. These classes are taught by experts in the field of building control systems. For more information about these classes, contact your Honeywell representative.

2

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Related documentation For a complete list of publications and documents for Enterprise Buildings Integrator, see the Enterprise Buildings Integrator Overview.

3

4

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Contents 1 Starting a successful EBI installation

13

Using the checklists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 System Design form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Filling in the System Design form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Description of Windows Server properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Description of TCP/IP properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Description of EBI Server properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Description of Modem connection properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 About computer names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 About Windows accounts, operator IDs and EBI security levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 About User Account Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Recommendations for Cardholder Management and Global Schedules in a DSA system. 30 Related EBI installation documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

2 New installation checklists Installation checklist: Non-redundant EBI server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation checklist: Redundant EBI servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation checklist: Station on a client computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation checklist: Client applications (other than Station) on a client computer . . . . . . . . . Installation checklist: Remote point server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation checklist: Networked XLNET node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation checklist: Mobile Station server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 Upgrade checklists

33 34 36 40 42 44 45 46

49

Upgrade checklist: From EBI R400 SP1 on existing non-redundant server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Upgrade checklist: From EBI R400 SP1 on existing redundant servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Upgrade checklist: From EBI R400 SP1 on new non-redundant server and/or operating system . 61 Upgrade checklist: From EBI R400 SP1 on new redundant servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Upgrade checklist: From EBI R400 SP1 on an existing DSA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Upgrade checklist: From EBI R310 SP3 or later on existing non-redundant server . . . . . . . . . 75 Upgrade checklist: From EBI R310 SP3 or later on existing redundant servers . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Upgrade checklist: From EBI R310 SP3 or later on new non-redundant server . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Upgrade checklist: From EBI R310 SP3 or later on existing non-redundant server with new operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Upgrade checklist: From EBI R310 SP3 or later on new redundant servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 5

CONTENTS

Upgrade checklist: From EBI R310 SP3 or later on existing redundant servers with new operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Upgrade checklist: From EBI R310 SP3 or later on an existing DSA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Upgrade checklist: Station and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Upgrade checklist: EBI client applications other than Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Upgrade checklist: Remote point server on existing computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Upgrade checklist: Remote point server on new computer and/or operating system . . . . . . . . 123

4 Preparing the server Defining the basic server properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the basic server properties in Windows Server 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the basic server properties in Windows 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the basic server properties in Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the basic server properties in Windows XP Professional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the Licensing Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the display (monitor). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the server’s hosts file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the Microsoft Office Service Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Microsoft Excel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protecting your EBI system against viruses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Windows Firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 Installing specialized hardware on the server Installing a Network Interface card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Network Adapter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the Microsoft Loopback adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a serial adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a Stallion EasyConnection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a Digiboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a LonWorks Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 Installing EBI on the server Installing the EBI components on the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended disk partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical installation of the EBI components on the server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom installation of the EBI components on the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering EBI servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering a non-redundant EBI server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering redundant EBI servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-registering EBI server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing and configuring RSLinx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the RSLinx components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering Electronic Data Sheets (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

125 126 127 129 131 134 136 137 139 142 143 144 145 146 147

149 150 150 151 153 154 156 157

159 160 160 161 163 166 167 169 171 173 173 173

CONTENTS

Configuring RSLinx drivers for an Ethernet network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

7 Installing and setting up associated applications Setting up Microsoft Excel reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Microsoft Excel Data Exchange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the EBI ODBC client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an account for third-party OPC clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring DCOM security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up a file server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up a shared folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a drive letter on a client computer to a shared folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 Connecting printers and modems to the server Installing a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a printer driver for a local printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a printer driver for a local shared printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a printer driver for a shared network printer (with a suitable share name) . . Installing a printer driver for a shared network printer (whose existing share name is unsuitable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the Print Job Spool folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Guest account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modem connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the modem connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring RAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Remote User on Windows Server 2008. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Remote User on Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Remote User on Windows Server 2003. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Remote User on Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 Supplementary tasks Starting and stopping the EBI server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping EBI services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Computer Management Services Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping RSLinx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making changes after installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the EBI license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the default History Archive folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding new or reinstalling EBI components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the database setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting history retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting sizing of non-licensed items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

175 176 177 178 180 181 182 184 185 186

187 188 189 189 190 190 192 194 195 196 198 198 199 200 202 202 203 203

205 206 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 218

7

CONTENTS

Determining how many points you can configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Synchronizing the date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Moving the RSLinx activation file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

10 Preparing a client computer

225

Updating the computer’s hosts file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

11 Installing applications on a client computer Installing EBI client applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical installation of the EBI client applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom installation of the EBI client applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Windows accounts to the Honeywell Station Users group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Station for server redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up a multi-monitor Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Display Builder for multiple monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Networked XLNET Node software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up a third-party OPC client or server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Windows mngr account for a third-party OPC client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Read/Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Windows mngr account for a third-party OPC server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the server name in Data Access applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12 Setting up Integrated PhotoID hardware Setting up a FlashPoint card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the FlashPoint card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the FlashPoint MCI driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring station.ini. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Integrated PhotoID to use the card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up a TWAIN image capture device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up signature capture pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229 230 230 232 234 235 237 238 239 241 242 243 244 246

247 248 249 250 252 254 255 256

13 Installing point server components on a remote server

257

14 Installing Mobile Station Server

259

Installing Terminal Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating Terminal Services Licensing server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the Client Access Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Mobile Station server to access an existing Terminal Services Licensing server. Limiting the number of connections to the Mobile Station server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Windows accounts for Mobile Station server users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Mobile Access for Station users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15 Installing a terminal server

260 262 265 267 268 269 270

271

Configuring an EasyServer II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Resetting the EasyServer II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 8

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONTENTS

Connecting the configuration computer to EasyServer II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the IP address of the EasyServer II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up a Telnet session to configure EasyServer II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a router/gateway address (EasyServer II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Ethernet interface (EasyServer II). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring TCP port numbers (EasyServer II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the EasyServer II’s inactivity timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the EasyServer II’s TCP keepalive timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a serial port (EasyServer II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EasyServer II port parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the EasyServer II IP address to the server’s hosts file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting controllers to an EasyServer II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the EasyServer II’s TCP/IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Lantronix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting the Lantronix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Lantronix’s IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up a Telnet session to configure a Lantronix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a gateway address (Lantronix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring TCP port numbers (Lantronix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Lantronix’s inactivity timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Lantronix’s TCP keepalive timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a serial port (Lantronix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Lantronix IP address to the server’s hosts file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting controllers to a Lantronix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Lantronix’s TCP/IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Cisco 2610 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Cisco 2610 Router setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Cisco 2610 router’s Ethernet properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Cisco 2610 router’s gateway address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Cisco 2610 router’s IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Cisco 2610 router’s TCP keepalive timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring serial ports (Cisco 2610 router). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up a serial port (Cisco 2610 router). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting a serial port’s TCP keepalive timer (Cisco 2610 router). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the communications characteristics (Cisco 2610 router) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting a serial port’s inactivity timer (Cisco 2610 router) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup example for typical controller’s serial port 3 (Cisco 2610 router) . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Cisco 2610 router IP address to the server’s hosts file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting controllers to a Cisco 2610 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Cisco 2610 router commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Systech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Systech’s IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging into the Systech terminal server using Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Systech’s TCP/IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the router/gateway address (Systech) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Systech’s TCP keepalive timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

275 276 278 280 281 282 283 284 285 285 288 289 291 292 293 294 296 297 298 299 300 301 303 304 306 307 308 309 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 319 320 321 322 324 325 327 328 329 330 331 9

CONTENTS

Configuring serial ports (Systech). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Systech’s IP address to the server’s hosts file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading the Systech terminal server to current release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Systech terminal server for use with fast failover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting controllers to a Systech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

332 333 334 335 336

16 Installing controllers

339

17 Planning for an upgrade

341

Planning for an upgrade to EBI on an existing server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning for an upgrade to EBI on a new server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning for an upgrade to EBI on a DSA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning for an upgrade to components installed from the auxiliary DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uninstalling and reinstalling Honeywell DVM components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18 Upgrade tasks Upgrading EBI on an existing server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical upgrade of the EBI components on an existing server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom upgrade of the EBI components on an existing server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading EBI on a new server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical upgrade of the EBI components on a new server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom upgrade of the EBI components on a new server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading remote point servers on a new computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading remote point servers on an existing computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading EBI components on a client computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical upgrade of the EBI components on a client computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom upgrade of the EBI components on a client computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the EBI services to manual startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PreUpgrade.vbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the EBI services to automatic startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying the existing EBI databases to the new computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabling SQL Server replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating HMIWeb displays and shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating Station-level scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching scripts to the new Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating Quick Builder projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating from an area-based system to a location-based system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uploading locations after the upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming points with illegal names (point IDs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fixpointname.exe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About downloading fire points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changes to CMS user fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating CMS user field labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

342 347 352 359 360

361 362 362 364 367 367 369 373 375 377 377 378 380 381 382 383 385 386 387 387 388 389 389 390 391 394 395 396 397

CONTENTS

Checking the visibility of user fields on CMS displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating card layouts to replace DSP card layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating HTM card layouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrade tasks for a LonWorks Point Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the name of the LNS database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backing up the LonWorks point server data on the existing point server computer. . . Restoring LonWorks point server data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reapplying customizations to the XML templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrade tasks for EXCEL 5000 Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backing up EXCEL 5000 Direct data before upgrading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring EXCEL 5000 Direct data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Global Schedules migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrating Global Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the server alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19 Removing EBI Uninstalling EBI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the EBI server components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Microsoft SQL Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing EBI client applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20 Troubleshooting EBI server installation problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EBI server startup problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows-related problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DNS performance in a redundant server system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network interface cards (network adapters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal server problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21 Tuning server performance Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tuning the Windows Kernel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disk management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixing File System errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defragmenting the file system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory and swapfile/pagefile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting swapfile/pagefile size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Management of traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting bindings and disabling protocols on standard networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Benefits from other Network Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

398 399 400 401 402 403 404 406 407 408 409 410 412 414

415 416 417 418 419

421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428

431 432 433 434 435 437 439 441 442 443 444 445 447 448

11

CONTENTS

Other settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Topology-related settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring the system and assessing the need for hardware upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Performance Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interpreting the Performance Counter values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

449 449 449 450 451 452 453

1

Starting a successful EBI installation

This guide describes how to install a new EBI system or upgrade your existing EBI system. Caution This guide uses checklists and a System Design Form to guide you through installation/ upgrade tasks. You must use them to avoid installation problems.

Preliminary tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Learn how to use the checklists.

page 14

Fill in the System Design form.

page 15

Read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin for any last-minute instructions.

EBI DVD

Done?

If you are: • Installing a new EBI system, select the top-level checklists that meet your installation requirements.

page 33

page 49 • Upgrading an existing EBI system, select the toplevel checklists that meet your upgrade requirements.

13

1 – STARTING A SUCCESSFUL EBI INSTALLATION

Using the checklists This guide makes extensive use of checklists to guide you through installation/ upgrade tasks. You must use the checklists (and the System Design form) to avoid installation problems. Tips •

Make a photocopy of each checklist that is applicable to your system.

•

Check that you have satisfied the Prerequisites before you start the first task.

•

Complete the tasks in order shown, unless specified otherwise.

•

When you complete each task, return to the checklist and mark the task as complete in the Done column. It is also a good idea to include the name of the person who completed the task and the date and time the task was completed to assist in diagnosing any problems that may occur.

Related topics “System Design form” on page 15

14

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

SYSTEM DESIGN FORM

System Design form You use this form to record details that will be needed many times during installation/upgrade tasks. You must therefore fill in this form before starting the first task. For instructions on how to fill in this form, see “Filling in the System Design form” on page 19. Attention Make a photocopy of this form for each server (or redundant server pair).

Windows Server properties For a description of each property, see “Description of Windows Server properties” on page 20. Primary Server

Backup Server (if applicable)

Computer Name Administrator Password Number of Concurrent Connections (Only applicable to Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2003.)

TCP/IP properties For a description of each property, see “Description of TCP/IP properties” on page 21. (If you have a redundant system, you must also fill in the next section for the backup server.) Value General Tab IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Preferred DNS Server Alternate DNS Server IP Settings Tab Interface Metric

15

1 – STARTING A SUCCESSFUL EBI INSTALLATION

Value DNS Tab DNS server addresses, in order of use Append primary and connection specific DNS suffixes Append parent suffixes of the primary DNS suffix Append these DNS suffixes (in order)

DNS suffix for this connection Register this connection’s addresses in DNS Use this connection’s DNS suffix in DNS registration WINS Tab Defaults. If not specify:

Options Tab Defaults. If not specify:

Domain/Workgroup

Domain. Specify Administrator password: Workgroup. Specify name:

Network Adapter Settings

16

Address:

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

SYSTEM DESIGN FORM

TCP/IP properties for Backup server Only applicable if you have redundant servers. For a description of each property, see “Description of TCP/IP properties” on page 21. Value General Tab IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Preferred DNS Server Alternate DNS Server IP Settings Tab Interface Metric DNS Tab DNS server addresses, in order of use Append primary and connection specific DNS suffixes Append parent suffixes of the primary DNS suffix Append these DNS suffixes (in order) DNS suffix for this connection Register this connection’s addresses in DNS Use this connection’s DNS suffix in DNS registration WINS Tab Defaults. If not specify:

Options Tab Defaults. If not specify:

17

1 – STARTING A SUCCESSFUL EBI INSTALLATION

Value Domain/Workgroup

Domain. Specify Administrator password: Workgroup. Specify name:

Network Adapter Settings

Address:

EBI server properties For a description of each property, see “Description of EBI Server properties” on page 24. Value Windows Account Passwords

Mngr: Engr: (Note that this account is not longer installed but may exist from an upgraded R310 server). Oper: (Note that this account is no longer installed but may exist from an upgraded R310 server).

OPC Account

Username: Password:

Fast History collection interval

Modem connection properties Only applicable if one or more client computers are connected to the server via a modem. For a description of each property, see “Description of Modem connection properties” on page 25. Username Password

18

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

FILLING IN THE SYSTEM DESIGN FORM

Filling in the System Design form This section describes the purpose of every property in the System Design form. If you have a DSA system, you must fill in a separate form for each nonredundant server or redundant server pair. If you have Cardholder Management, Global Schedules and a DSA system, consider the networking issues. See “Recommendations for Cardholder Management in a DSA system”. The System Design form will be required if you ever upgrade or reconfigure your system, so remember to keep it (and the EBI license) in a safe place for future reference. Related topics “System Design form” on page 15 “Recommendations for Cardholder Management and Global Schedules in a DSA system” on page 30 “Description of Windows Server properties” on page 20 “Description of TCP/IP properties” on page 21 “Description of EBI Server properties” on page 24 “Description of Modem connection properties” on page 25

19

1 – STARTING A SUCCESSFUL EBI INSTALLATION

Description of Windows Server properties Property

Description

Computer Name

The name of the server computer (the computer name). For more information about computer names, see “About computer names” on page 26.

Administrator password

The password for the Windows Administrator account. Note: This password is case-sensitive. You need this password whenever you perform administrative tasks on the server. If you have a DSA system, we recommend that the password for the Administrator account is the same on all EBI servers. For an explanation of Windows accounts, see “About Windows accounts, operator IDs and EBI security levels” on page 27.

Number of Concurrent Connections

Only applicable to Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2003. The number of Windows client access licenses (CALs) required. You need to enter the correct number of CALs for your system configuration. Note: If you require more than five CALs, you need to purchase and maintain the required number of additional CALs. For non-redundant systems: Number of Stations

Number of CALs required

5

5

6 to 10

10

11 to 15

15

16 to 20

20

For redundant systems:

20

Number of Stations

Number of CALs required

8

5

9 to 13

10

14 to 18

15

19 to 20

20

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

FILLING IN THE SYSTEM DESIGN FORM

Description of TCP/IP properties The tabs and properties in the following table correspond with the Microsoft TCP/IP Properties dialog box. Tab

Property

Description

General

IP Address

If you have an existing network, this will be provided by your network administrator. Otherwise, specify something like 192.186.0.x, where x is a unique number for each network adapter (and usually each host) on the network. This number can be between 1 and 254.

Subnet Mask

If you have an existing network, this will be provided by your network administrator. Otherwise, specify 255.255.255.0.

Default Gateway

If you have an existing network, this will be provided by your network administrator. If the computer is connected to a stand-alone network, leave this blank.

Preferred DNS server

Ask your network administrator for the IP address of the preferred Domain Name Server (DNS). Your company may have one or more DNS. The preferred DNS is the first DNS that your computer communicates with to resolve names to IP addresses. If the preferred DNS server is not available, your computer communicates with the alternate DNS, if one is supplied. If you are configuring a stand-alone network this parameter can be omitted.

Alternate DNS server

Ask your network administrator for the IP address of the alternate DNS. If you are configuring a stand-alone network this parameter can be omitted.

IP Settings

Interface metric

Ask your network administrator for this information. If your network administrator does not supply an interface metric, accept the default value during installation. If you are configuring a stand-alone network this parameter can be omitted.

21

1 – STARTING A SUCCESSFUL EBI INSTALLATION

Tab

Property

Description

DNS

DNS server Ask your network administrator for this information. addresses, in order If you are configuring a stand-alone network this of use parameter can be omitted. Append primary and connection specific DNS suffixes

Ask your network administrator for this information. If you are configuring a stand-alone network this parameter can be omitted.

Append parent suffixes of the primary DNS suffix

Ask your network administrator for this information. If you are configuring a stand-alone network this parameter can be omitted.

Append these DNS suffixes (in order)

Ask your network administrator for this information. If you are configuring a stand-alone network this parameter can be omitted.

DNS suffix for this connection

Ask your network administrator for this information. If you are configuring a stand-alone network this parameter can be omitted.

Register this Ask your network administrator for this information. connection’s If you are configuring a stand-alone network this addresses in DNS parameter can be omitted. Use this Ask your network administrator for this information. connection’s DNS If you are configuring a stand-alone network this suffix in DNS parameter can be omitted. registration

22

WINS

Ask your network administrator for this information. If you are configuring a stand-alone network this parameter can be omitted.

Options

Ask your network administrator for this information. If you are configuring a stand-alone network this parameter can be omitted.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

FILLING IN THE SYSTEM DESIGN FORM

Property

Description

Domain/Workgroup

If you are connecting to an existing network, ask your network administrator to specify the workgroup or domain. If it is a domain, you will need to find out the password from your network administrator. If you have a stand-alone network, specify a workgroup with a name such as EBI_NW. The name must be the same for all computers on the network. If you have Cardholder Management on a DSA system, all cardholder servers should be on a common domain. See “Recommendations for Cardholder Management and Global Schedules in a DSA system” on page 30.

Network Adapter Settings If you install a network adapter, record its address settings.

23

1 – STARTING A SUCCESSFUL EBI INSTALLATION

Description of EBI Server properties Property

Description

Windows Account Passwords

The passwords for the Windows accounts that are created by the EBI installation wizard. The passwords are case sensitive, must consist of at least six characters, and include at least one non-alphabetic character. Note: If you have more than one EBI server (either redundant servers or a DSA system), the passwords for the mngr account must be the same on all servers. For more information about Windows accounts, see “About Windows accounts, operator IDs and EBI security levels” on page 27.

OPC Account

Only applicable if you have an OPC server option. This account is used by OPC clients to connect to the OPC server.

Fast History collection interval

The interval at which the server collects fast history snapshots for point parameters for which fast history collection is enabled. The interval can be between 1 and 30 seconds (the default is 5 seconds). Note: If you make extensive use of fast history, an excessively short interval may place a heavy load on the server.

24

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

FILLING IN THE SYSTEM DESIGN FORM

Description of Modem connection properties Property

Description

Username

The remote access user account and password. Only applicable if one or more client computers are connected to the server via a modem.

Password

25

1 – STARTING A SUCCESSFUL EBI INSTALLATION

About computer names All EBI server and client computers must have a unique name and IP address. The following restrictions apply when naming server and client computers:

26

•

The name must be 14 characters, or less, in length.

•

The name can contain a combination of standard characters, that is, upper and lower case A to Z, digits 0 to 9, and hyphens.

•

The name cannot contain spaces, or any of the following characters: < > ; : " * + = \ | ? , ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & ( )` _

•

If you have a non-redundant server, avoid names (server and client) that end with “A” or “B”. Although this is not mandatory, it makes it easier if you later want to upgrade to redundant servers.

•

If you have redundant servers, the names of the server computers have a common base name, plus a single-letter suffix. In the case of the primary server, the suffix is “A”, and in the case of the backup server, the suffix is “B”. For example, if the base name is HSSERV: -

The primary server name would be HSSERVA.

-

The backup server name would be HSSERVB.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

FILLING IN THE SYSTEM DESIGN FORM

About Windows accounts, operator IDs and EBI security levels The EBI installation wizard creates some Windows accounts and an operator ID (which is used to log on to Station). Note With the installation of EBI R410, the Windows account EBIAdmin will be removed. Oper and Engr accounts which were available in previous versions will still work with sites that use them but are no longer set up when installing EBI.

Caution Some Windows accounts, operator IDs and EBI security levels have the same names. Consequently, it is important that you do not confuse them. This topic provides a summary of the accounts, operator IDs and security levels.

Windows Accounts The EBI installation wizard creates one Windows accounts and three Honeywell groups. The following table shows the account details after you install EBI. Windows group

Windows account mngri

Administratorii

Honeywell Administrators y

y

Honeywell Usersiii

y

y

Honeywell Station Usersiv

y

v

y

Administrators Users

v

Backup Operatorsv

y

i EBI services and some other EBI processes run under the mngr account. ii This is the default Windows account. iii Use this group when creating your own user accounts iv Use this group when creating user accounts for Station, HMIWeb Display Builder, and Quick Builder users v These are default Windows groups.

Operator IDs The EBI installation wizard creates the following operator ID. (Operator IDs are used to log on to Station.) 27

1 – STARTING A SUCCESSFUL EBI INSTALLATION

Operator ID

Description

mngr

This is the default operator ID for Station, for which the: • Security level is MNGR (see “EBI security levels” on page 28) • Default password is mngr1 (note the use of lower case because passwords are case-sensitive.) If you intend to use operator-based security, you use this operator ID to log on to Station, so that you can then add other operator IDs to your system. If you intend to use Station-based security, you do not need to use this operator ID, or create any other operator IDs.

EBI security levels EBI provides the following security levels that apply when you use Station. If you use:

28

•

Station-based security, you can “jump” to a particular security level by typing the password for that level on that Station

•

Operator-based security, each person is given a unique operator ID and assigned a specific security level

Security level

Description

LVL1

Only allows viewing. This level is only available with operator-based security.

LVL2

Allows viewing and alarm acknowledgement. This level is only available with operator-based security.

OPER

The standard operator level that allows alarm acknowledgement and routine control.

SUPV

Provides access supervisor-level functions.

ENGR

Provides access to engineer-level functions.

MNGR

Provides unrestricted access to all functions.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

FILLING IN THE SYSTEM DESIGN FORM

About User Account Control The Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7 operating systems have a new security feature called User Account Control (UAC) and secure desktop. This topic summarizes some of the key points related to the new security feature. For more information about UAC, see the Microsoft Web site. On these new operating systems, by default every application or process is launched with standard user privileges even if the current user is logged on with administrative privileges. (The exception to this is if the application has been specifically marked to launch with higher privileges.) This encourages the use of standard accounts for users of the computer rather than an administrator account. Another security feature on the new operating system is the use of elevation prompts. Elevation prompts are presented to all types of users if the action they are trying to perform requires administrator privileges. This can prevent such things as the silent installation of malware. A standard user must enter the name and password of the appropriate administration account to continue. An administrative user must give consent to continue. When the elevation prompts appear, the user’s desktop is replaced with the secure desktop. The user cannot continue normal operation until they cancel the action or give the appropriate consent. Using the secure desktop may cause issues by causing a loss of view of your EBI system. The secure desktop can be disabled. If the Station computer is connected to a network that is adequately secured, Honeywell recommends that the secure desktop be disabled so that there is no loss of view should any elevation prompt appear. Honeywell recommends that you assess the risk of disabling secure desktop. During installation a new Windows group is created, called Honeywell Station Users. This group has the required privileges that EBI users require to use Station, HMIWeb Display Builder and Quick Builder. During the installation process, the user account used for the installation is automatically added to the Honeywell Station Users group. User accounts for all other users need to be added to this group. Note that this does not prevent the elevation prompts. The new security features can be disabled, however you should only do so in consultation with the site’s IT personnel.

29

1 – STARTING A SUCCESSFUL EBI INSTALLATION

Recommendations for Cardholder Management and Global Schedules in a DSA system In a DSA system, Cardholder Management and Global Schedules use Microsoft SQL Server Replication technology to synchronize the contents of the cardholder database on each server. We recommend that all cardholder servers be on a common domain, logging on to a common domain server. This not only makes the DSA network more secure, it also simplifies account configuration and troubleshooting. If the servers log on to different domains, trust relationships must be set up between all domains the servers log on to. If the servers do not log on to a domain, they must operate on a common Windows workgroup. For more information about DSA in relation to Cardholder Management, see “Configuring Distributed System Architecture” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

30

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

RELATED EBI INSTALLATION DOCUMENTS

Related EBI installation documents The following EBI documents include information that may affect installation/ upgrade tasks. Please read these documents before starting the first task. Document

Description

Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin

Includes last-minute information that was not able to be included in the standard documents. You must read them to find out whether they contains any changes to installation/upgrade tasks. They are on the EBI DVD.

Overview

Provides a comprehensive overview of EBI.

Interface and Controller References

There is a separate reference for each type of interface and controller supported by EBI. Each reference includes configuration information specific to a particular interface or controller.

Configuration and Administration Your main reference after installation, it describes Guide how to configure EBI. Backup and Restore Guide

This guide describes how to backup and restore your EBI servers, clients and data.

31

1 – STARTING A SUCCESSFUL EBI INSTALLATION

32

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

2

New installation checklists

This section includes the top-level checklists for installing a new EBI system. Note that you only need to use the checklists appropriate to your installation scenario. For example, if you are installing a small system, you may only need the “Non-redundant EBI server” and “Station” checklists. Caution You must use these checklists to avoid installation problems. To learn how to use them, see “Using the checklists” on page 14.

Installation scenario

Go to:

Installation of the EBI server Non-redundant EBI server

page 34

Redundant EBI server

page 36

Installation of EBI client applications or third-party applications (not on the EBI server) Station

page 40

EBI client applications other than Station, or third-party applications such page 42 OPC servers/clients Installation of remote point servers and specialized applications Remote point server

page 44

Networked XLNET node

page 45

Mobile Station Server

page 46

33

2 – NEW INSTALLATION CHECKLISTS

Installation checklist: Non-redundant EBI server This is the top-level checklist for installing EBI on a non-redundant server. Note that controllers can be installed independently of EBI. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the installation process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

You have filled in the System Design form.

•

The server meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

The EBI DVD

•

The EBI license

•

You must log on with Windows administrator privileges.

•

You cannot install EBI on a computer that is configured as a Windows domain controller.

•

Disable any anti-virus programs on the server while installing EBI.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Prepare the server Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the server complies with hardware and software requirements Define the basic server properties.

page 126

Configure the display (monitor).

page 137

If required, install Microsoft Excel.

page 142

Protect against viruses.

page 146

Install specialized hardware on the server

34

If required, install a network interface card (network adapter).

page 150

If required, install serial adapters.

page 153

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

INSTALLATION CHECKLIST: NON-REDUNDANT EBI SERVER

Task

Go to:

If required, install a LonTalk adapter.

page 157

Done?

If you have the PhotoID option and this computer is to be page 247 used to capture portraits/signatures, install the relevant hardware and software. Note: Unless this is a very small system, we recommend that you install PhotoID hardware on a client computer. If required, install terminal server(s).

page 271

Install EBI on the server Install EBI components on the server.

page 160

Register the EBI server.

page 166

If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

Install and set up associated applications If required, set up Microsoft Excel data reports.

page 176

If you have any third-party OPC clients, create an account page 181 for them. If required, set up the EBI server as a file server.

page 184

Additional tasks If required, install the localization toolkit. Configure any peripherals, such as modems and printers, page 187 that are connected to the server. If your site implements Windows security policies, install your local policies in the normal manner. Configure custom firewall settings, if appropriate.

page 147

Tune the performance of the server.

page 431

Stop You have completed all tasks.

35

2 – NEW INSTALLATION CHECKLISTS

Installation checklist: Redundant EBI servers This is the top-level checklist for installing EBI on a redundant servers. Controllers can be installed independently of EBI. Note that the primary server is called “server A” and the backup server is called “server B”. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the installation process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

You have filled in the System Design form (page 19).

•

The servers meet the hardware and software requirements.

•

The EBI DVD.

•

The EBI license.

•

You must log on with Windows administrator privileges.

•

Disable any anti-virus programs on the servers while installing EBI.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

Tasks The tasks are split up into three stages. Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Prepare and install EBI on server A.

page 36

Prepare and install EBI on server B.

page 38

Perform tasks on both server A and server B.

page 39

Done?

Server A tasks Complete the tasks in the following order on server A. Task Prepare the server Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the server complies with hardware and software requirements.

36

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Go to:

Done?

INSTALLATION CHECKLIST: REDUNDANT EBI SERVERS

Task

Go to:

Define the basic server properties.

page 126

Configure the display.

page 137

Update the server’s hosts file.

page 139

If required, install Microsoft Excel.

page 142

Protect against viruses.

page 146

Done?

Install specialized hardware on the server If required, install a network interface card (network adapter).

page 150

If required, install serial adapters.

page 153

If required, install a LonTalk adapter.

page 157

If you have the PhotoID option and this computer is to be page 247 used to capture portraits/signatures, install the relevant hardware and software. Note: Unless this is a very small system, we recommend that you install PhotoID hardware on a client computer. If required, install terminal server(s).

page 271

Install EBI on the server Install EBI.

page 160

Register the EBI server.

page 166

If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

Install and set up associated applications If required, set up Microsoft Excel data reports.

page 176

If you have any third-party OPC clients, create an account page 181 for them. If required, set up the EBI server as a file server.

page 184

Additional tasks If required, install the localization toolkit. Configure any peripherals, such as modems and printers, page 187 that are connected to the server. If your site implements Windows security policies, install your local policies in the normal manner. Configure custom firewall settings, if appropriate.

page 147

Tune the performance of the server.

page 431

37

2 – NEW INSTALLATION CHECKLISTS

Server B tasks Complete the tasks in the following order on server B. Task

Go to:

Prepare the server Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the server complies with hardware and software requirements Define the basic server properties.

page 126

Configure the display.

page 137

Update the server’s hosts file.

page 139

If required, install Microsoft Excel.

page 142

Protect against viruses.

page 146

Install specialized hardware on the server If required, install a network interface card (network adapter).

page 150

If required, install serial adapters.

page 153

If required, install a LonTalk adapter.

page 157

If you have the PhotoID option and this computer is to be page 247 used to capture portraits/signatures, install the relevant hardware and software. Note: Unless this is a very small system, we recommend that you install PhotoID hardware on a client computer. If required, install terminal server(s).

page 271

Install EBI on the server Install EBI in the same location it was installed on server page 160 A. Register the EBI server.

page 166

If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

Install and set up associated applications If required, set up Microsoft Excel data reports.

page 176

If you have any third-party OPC clients, create an account page 181 for them. If required, set up the EBI server as a file server.

page 184

Additional tasks If required, install the localization toolkit. Configure any peripherals, such as modems and printers, page 187 that are connected to the server.

38

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

INSTALLATION CHECKLIST: REDUNDANT EBI SERVERS

Task

Go to:

Done?

If your site implements Windows security policies, install your local policies in the normal manner. Configure custom firewall settings, if appropriate.

page 147

Tune the performance of the server.

page 431

Server A and Server B tasks Complete the tasks on both server A and server B. Task

Go to:

Done?

Configure EBI server redundancy. Run setupredun.vbs (located in the \Program Files\Honeywell\ server\run folder) to set up the server for redundancy. For details, see “Configuring and monitoring a redundant server system” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

Stop You have completed all tasks.

39

2 – NEW INSTALLATION CHECKLISTS

Installation checklist: Station on a client computer This is the top-level checklist for installing Station on a client computer. (The checklist also allows you to install other EBI client applications, such as HMIWeb Display Builder and Quick Builder.) EBI supports two display storage techniques: centralized (displays and shapes are only stored on the server) and distributed (each Station has its own copies of the displays and shapes). For more information about the storage techniques, see “Display storage techniques” in the HMIWeb Display Building Guide. A Typical client installation type will only install Station and HMIWeb Display Builder. If you want to use distributed storage, select the Custom client installation type from the EBI installation wizard and select the required display options. For more information about installing Custom client options, see “Custom installation of the EBI client applications” on page 232. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the installation process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

The System Design form (page 19).

•

The computer meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

The EBI DVD.

•

You must log on with Windows administrator privileges.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Prepare the Station computer Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the computer complies with hardware and software requirements.

40

Configure the display.

page 137

Update the client computer’s hosts file.

page 226

If required, install Microsoft Excel.

page 142

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

INSTALLATION CHECKLIST: STATION ON A CLIENT COMPUTER

Task

Go to:

Done?

If you have licensed the PhotoID option and you want to page 247 use this computer to capture portraits/signatures, install the relevant hardware and software. Install and set up Station Install Station and, if required, other EBI client applications.

page 230

If Station and other EBI client applications are installed on the Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, or Windows 7 operating system, add the required user accounts to the Honeywell Station Users group.

page 234

If you have a redundant server, configure Station’s setup page 235 (stn) files for redundancy. If required, set up Station to use multiple monitors.

page 237

If required, set up Microsoft Excel Reports.

page 176

If required, install the localization toolkit. Configure the Station as appropriate. For details, see “Configuring Station connection properties” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

Stop You have completed all tasks.

41

2 – NEW INSTALLATION CHECKLISTS

Installation checklist: Client applications (other than Station) on a client computer This is the top-level checklist for installing EBI client applications (other than Station), and third-party applications such as OPC servers/clients, on a client computer. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the installation process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

You have filled in the System Design form (page 19).

•

The computer meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

The EBI DVD.

•

You must log on with Windows administrator privileges.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Prepare the client computer Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the computer complies with hardware and software requirements Configure the display.

page 137

Update the client computer’s hosts file.

page 226

If required, install Microsoft Excel.

page 142

Install applications as required If required, install EBI client applications.

page 230

If required, install Networked XLNET Node

page 239

If required, install a third-party OPC client or server.

page 241

If required, set up Microsoft Excel Reports.

page 176

If required, install the localization toolkit.

42

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

INSTALLATION CHECKLIST: CLIENT APPLICATIONS (OTHER THAN STATION) ON A CLIENT COMPUTER

Stop You have completed all tasks.

43

2 – NEW INSTALLATION CHECKLISTS

Installation checklist: Remote point server This is the top-level checklist for installing a point server on a remote computer, that is, a computer other than the EBI server computer. Note that if you are using both the LonWorks and EIRIS point servers, they must be on separate computers (and therefore require separate adapters). Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the installation process.

Prerequisites •

If you are installing a LonWorks point server, a qualified adapter. See the LonWorks Interface Reference.

•

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

You have filled in the System Design form (page 19).

•

The computer meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

The EBI license.

•

The EBI DVD.

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the computer complies with hardware and software requirements Update the computer’s hosts file.

page 226

If you are setting up a LonWorks point server, install the page 157 adapter. Install the point server components on the remote computer.

Stop You have completed all tasks.

44

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

page 257

Done?

INSTALLATION CHECKLIST: NETWORKED XLNET NODE

Installation checklist: Networked XLNET node This is the top-level checklist for installing a networked XLNET node. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the installation process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

You have filled in the System Design form (page 19).

•

The computer meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

The EBI license.

•

The EBI DVD.

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Done?

Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the computer complies with hardware and software requirements Install the Networked XLNET Node software.

page 239

Configure the C-Bus. For details, see “Configuring C-Busses” in the Honeywell EXCEL 5000 Interface Reference.

Stop You have completed all tasks.

45

2 – NEW INSTALLATION CHECKLISTS

Installation checklist: Mobile Station server This is the top-level checklist for installing a Mobile Station server. If Mobile Station Server is to be used in conjunction with Honeywell Digital Video Manager (Honeywell DVM), contact your local Honeywell representative. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the installation process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

You have filled in the System Design form (page 19).

•

The computer meets the hardware and software requirements. (Note that Mobile Station Server requires Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2003.)

•

The EBI DVD.

•

The EBI license.

•

Windows Server 2008 DVD or Windows Server 2003 CDs.

•

You have the required Client Access Licenses (CALs) for Terminal Services, which is an authorization key. (You receive this authorization key when you purchase CALs from Honeywell, or another vendor.) If your organization already has a Microsoft Terminal Services Licensing Server, you can use this server to assign CALs to handheld devices. In this case, do not install the Terminal Services Licensing option.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Prepare the Mobile Station Server computer Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the computer complies with hardware and software requirements

46

Set up the basic server details.

page 126

Configure the display.

page 137

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

INSTALLATION CHECKLIST: MOBILE STATION SERVER

Task

Go to:

Update the server’s hosts file.

page 139

Protect against viruses.

page 146

Done?

Install specialized hardware on the Mobile Station Server If required, install a network interface card (network adapter).

page 150

Install EBI client software on the Mobile Station Server Install Station. (You can also install other EBI client software if required.)

page 230

If required, install the localization toolkit. Install and configure Terminal Services on the Mobile Station Server Install Terminal Services.

page 260

If you installed the Terminal Services Licensing Server, activate it.

page 262

Install the Client Access Licenses (CALs).

page 265

If you are using an existing Terminal Services Licensing page 267 Server, configure Mobile Station Server to access it. Limit the number of connections to the Mobile Station Server.

page 268

Create and configure Mobile Station Server users Create the Mobile Station Server users.

page 269

If providing Mobile Access for Station, configure the Mobile Access for Station users.

page 270

Stop You have completed all tasks.

47

2 – NEW INSTALLATION CHECKLISTS

48

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

3

Upgrade checklists

This section includes the top-level checklists for upgrading EBI. Note that you only need to use the checklists appropriate to your upgrade scenario. If you are upgrading from EBI R300 or earlier, you must first upgrade to EBI R310, and then upgrade to EBI R410. Caution You must use these checklists to avoid upgrade problems. To learn how to use them, see “Using the checklists” on page 14.

Upgrade scenario

Go to:

Upgrades to the EBI server Non-redundant upgrade from EBI R400 on existing server

page 51

Redundant upgrade from EBI R400 on existing servers

page 55

Non-redundant upgrade from EBI R400 on new server and/or Windows operating system

page 61

Redundant upgrade from EBI R400 on new servers and/or Windows operating system

page 66

DSA system upgrade from EBI R400 on existing servers

page 73

Non-redundant upgrade from EBI R310 on existing server

page 75

Redundant upgrade from EBI R310 on existing servers

page 80

Non-redundant upgrade from EBI R310 on new server

page 87

Non-redundant upgrade from EBI R310 on existing server with new Windows operating system

page 93

Redundant upgrade from EBI R310 on new servers

page 99

Redundant upgrade from EBI R310 on existing servers with new Windows operating system

page 107

DSA system upgrade from EBI R310 on existing servers

page 115

49

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Upgrade scenario

Go to:

Upgrades to EBI client applications Station and displays

page 117

EBI client applications other than Station

page 119

Upgrades to remote point servers

50

Remote point server on an existing computer

page 121

Remote point server and moving to a new computer and/or Windows operating system

page 123

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R400 SP1 ON EXISTING NON-REDUNDANT SERVER

Upgrade checklist: From EBI R400 SP1 on existing nonredundant server This is the top-level checklist for upgrading from EBI R400 SP1 on an existing non-redundant server. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the installation process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

Relevant upgrades/service packs (if not on the EBI R410 DVD).

•

The server meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

Disable any anti-virus programs while upgrading EBI.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

Upgrade Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Done?

Preliminary tasks Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best page 341 Practices product bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan. If you are also upgrading components from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, you should read the SRB to understand when you need to incorporate upgrade tasks into this checklist. Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the server complies with hardware and software requirements. Take the access control controllers out of service. This ensures that events are buffered until the upgrade is complete.

51

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

If you have any LonWorks point servers, check that the names of the LNS databases comply with the new rules.

page 402

Done?

Generate an event archive of all current events. For details, see the “Archiving Events” section in the Operators Guide. If you use the Cardholder Management option and the server is part of a DSA system, disable SQL Server replication.

page 385

Freeze all changes on the server. Back up the server. For details, see the “Backing up EBI servers” section in the Backup and Restore Guide. Terminate any Station connections to the EBI server. • Stop any point servers. • Close any EBI-related applications, such as the EBI Control Panel and Quick Builder. Unload the EBI database and then close the Start-Stop EBI Server application.

page 206

If RSLinx is installed, uninstall it. Upgrade the server hardware Upgrade the hardware as specified when planning for the upgrade. Upgrade the server software (Only required if, during planning, you identified the need to upgrade third party software components on the server, for example, Internet Explorer.) Set the EBI services to manual startup.

page 380

Upgrade any other applications as appropriate. Checkpoint Before you proceed, ensure the operating system and any software and hardware has been installed correctly. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Upgrade EBI

52

Upgrade EBI components on the server.

page 362

Register the EBI server.

page 166

If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R400 SP1 ON EXISTING NON-REDUNDANT SERVER

Task

Go to:

Done?

Checkpoint Before you proceed, ensure that the EBI software has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Additional tasks If required, install the localization toolkit. Complete the upgrade If you have fire points configured, download the points from Quick Builder to the server.

page 395

Reapply any changes to the system acronym set. For details, see the “About acronyms” section in the HMIWeb Display Building Guide. Reapply any specialized scan periods. For details, see the “Scanning and standard points” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Configure event archiving. For details, see the “Configuring Event Archiving” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Return the access control controllers to in-service and check that they communicate without error. Tip: You should enable one controller at a time because they will send buffered events to the server. When the access control controller are returned to inservice, a download modified action occurs automatically. You can cancel the download modified action and perform a download all action when all access control controllers are back in service. It is recommended that you perform the download all action during off-peak times as the procedure may take some time and so that cardholders are not unnecessarily denied access. Check that all printers and OPC connections are working. If OPC connections are not working, see “Creating an account for third-party OPC clients” on page 181. Reapply any customizations to system displays. For details, see the “Configuring Stations and printers” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to the menus. For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide

53

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Reapply any customizations to Station’s toolbars For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s configuration file, station.ini. For details, see the “Station.ini” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s setup file, default.stn. For details, see the “Station setup files” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reset any watchdog timers. For details, see the “Monitoring the activity of a task” section in the Application Development Guide. Migrate Station-level scripts.

page 387

If you have any LonWorks points servers and have customized the XML templates, reapply the customizations.

page 406

Stop You have completed all tasks.

54

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R400 SP1 ON EXISTING REDUNDANT SERVERS

Upgrade checklist: From EBI R400 SP1 on existing redundant servers This is the top-level checklist for upgrading from EBI R400 SP1 on existing redundant servers. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the installation process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The server meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

Disable any anti-virus programs while upgrading EBI.

•

You have a local administrator account.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

Preliminary Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Attention The primary server is called “server A” and the backup server is called “server B”. Task

Go to:

Done?

Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best page 341 Practices product bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan. If you are also upgrading components from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, you should read the SRB to understand when you need to incorporate upgrade tasks into this checklist.

55

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify both servers comply with hardware and software requirements. Attention

If you do not have the required software installed, for example, the required version of Internet Explorer, the installation stops and you are required to install the appropriate software before proceeding with the EBI software installation.

If you have any LonWorks point servers, check that the names of the LNS databases comply with the new rules.

page 402

Freeze all changes on the server. On server A, start Station and call up the Redundancy Status display (sys113) and synchronize server A and server B. Disable SQL Server replication on both servers.

page 385

Upgrade Server B Complete the tasks in the following order to upgrade server B. Task

Go to:

Done?

Preliminary tasks Back up the server. For details, see the “Backing up EBI servers” section in the Backup and Restore Guide. If RSLinx is installed, uninstall it. Terminate any Station connections to the EBI server. • Stop any point servers. • Close any EBI-related applications, such as the EBI Control Panel and Quick Builder. Upgrade the server hardware Upgrade the hardware as specified when planning for the upgrade. Upgrade the server software (Only required if, during planning, you identified the need to upgrade third party software components on the server, for example, Internet Explorer.) Set the EBI services to manual startup.

page 380

Upgrade any other applications as appropriate. Upgrade EBI Upgrade EBI. 56

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

page 362

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R400 SP1 ON EXISTING REDUNDANT SERVERS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Checkpoint Before you proceed, ensure that the EBI software has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup. Additional tasks If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

If required, install the localization toolkit. Set EBI services to automatic startup.

page 382

Restart the computer. Take the channels out of service. Set the EBI server to database only. Reconnect the computer to the network. Upgrade critical Stations to R410. On the A server take the channels out of service. On the A server create an event archive. Stop the A server. Start EBI on the upgraded B server. Check that the upgraded Stations connect to the upgraded B server. Enable the channels one at a time allowing time for buffered events to be sent to the server. Check that they communicate without error. When the access control controller are returned to inservice, a download modified action occurs automatically. You can cancel the download modified action and perform a download all action when all access control controllers are back in service. It is recommended that you perform the download all action during off-peak times as the procedure may take some time and so that cardholders are not unnecessarily denied access. Checkpoint Ensure that the B server is operating without errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup.

57

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Upgrade Server A Complete the tasks in the following order to upgrade server A. Task

Go to:

Done?

Preliminary tasks Back up the server. For details, see the “Backing up EBI servers” section in the Backup and Restore Guide. If RSLinx is installed, uninstall it. • Stop any point servers. • Close any EBI-related applications, such as the EBI Control Panel and Quick Builder. Upgrade the server hardware Upgrade the hardware as specified when planning for the upgrade. Upgrade the server software (Only required if, during planning, you identified the need to upgrade software components, for example, Internet Explorer.) Set the EBI services to manual startup.

page 380

Upgrade any other applications as appropriate. Upgrade EBI Upgrade EBI.

page 362

Checkpoint Before you proceed, ensure that the EBI software has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup. Set EBI services to automatic startup.

page 382

Additional tasks If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

If required, install the localization toolkit.

Final tasks Complete the remaining tasks in the following order. Task Configure the servers 58

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Go to:

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R400 SP1 ON EXISTING REDUNDANT SERVERS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Start the A server as the backup server. Synchronize the A server with the B server. Failover to the A server. Synchronize the servers. Register the EBI servers.

page 166

Complete the upgrade If you have fire points configured, download the points from Quick Builder to the server.

page 395

Reapply any changes to the system acronym set. For details, see the “About acronyms” section in the HMIWeb Display Building Guide. Reapply any specialized scan periods. For details, see the “Scanning and standard points” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Configure event archiving. For details, see the “Configuring Event Archiving” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Return the access control controllers to in-service and check that they communicate without error. Tip: You should enable one controller at a time because they will send buffered events to the server. When the access control controller are returned to inservice, a download modified action occurs automatically. You can cancel the download modified action and perform a download all action when all access control controllers are back in service. It is recommended that you perform the download all action during off-peak times as the procedure may take some time and so that cardholders are not unnecessarily denied access. Check that all printers and OPC connections are working. If OPC connections are not working, see “Creating an account for third-party OPC clients” on page 181. Reapply any customizations to system displays. For details, see the “Configuring Stations and printers” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to the menus. For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide

59

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Reapply any customizations to Station’s toolbars For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s configuration file, station.ini. For details, see the “Station.ini” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s setup file, default.stn. For details, see the “Station setup files” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reset any watchdog timers. For details, see the “Monitoring the activity of a task” section in the Application Development Guide. Migrate Station-level scripts.

page 387

If you have any LonWorks points servers and have customized the XML templates, reapply the customizations.

page 406

Stop You have completed all tasks.

60

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R400 SP1 ON NEW NON-REDUNDANT SERVER AND/OR OPERATING

Upgrade checklist: From EBI R400 SP1 on new nonredundant server and/or operating system This is the top-level checklist for upgrading from EBI R400 SP1 and moving to a new non-redundant server and/or upgrading the Windows operating system. For example, your existing server runs Windows 2000, but your new server runs Windows 2008 Server. If you are keeping your existing computer (that is, only upgrading the Windows operating system), you should consider adding a new hard drive and using it as the primary disk (on which you install Windows and EBI), and keep the existing hard drive as a backup of the existing EBI server. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the upgrade process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The server meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

You have filled in the System Design form (page 19).

•

Disable any anti-virus programs while upgrading EBI.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

Preliminary tasks on the new server Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Done?

Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best page 341 Practices product bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan. If you are also upgrading components from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, you should read the SRB to understand when you need to incorporate upgrade tasks into this checklist.

61

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the new server complies with hardware and software requirements Attention

If you do not have the required software installed, for example, the required version of Internet Explorer, the installation stops and you are required to install the appropriate software before proceeding with the EBI software installation.

Configure the display.

page 137

Ensure Internet Explorer 7 Update the server’s hosts file.

page 139

If required, install Microsoft Excel.

page 142

Protect against viruses.

page 146

Install specialized hardware If required, install a network interface card (network adapter).

page 150

If required, install serial adapters.

page 153

If required, install a LonWorks network interface card.

page 157

If required, install the card or other devices associated with the Integrated PhotoID option.

page 247

Note: Only install PhotoID hardware on the server if the server used to capture portraits/signatures. (Unless this is a very small system, we recommend that you install PhotoID hardware on a client computer.) If required, install software to manage terminal server(s). page 271 Checkpoint Before you proceed, ensure the operating system, and any software and hardware has been installed correctly. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup using Acronis.

Preliminary tasks on the old (existing) server Complete the tasks in the following order. Task Take the access control controllers out of service. This ensures that events are buffered until the upgrade is complete.

62

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Go to:

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R400 SP1 ON NEW NON-REDUNDANT SERVER AND/OR OPERATING

Task

Go to:

If you have any LonWorks point servers, check that the names of the LNS databases comply with the new rules.

page 402

Done?

Freeze all changes on the servers. Generate an event archive of all current events. For details, see the “Archiving Events” section in the Operators Guide. Back up the servers. For details see the “Backing up EBI servers” section in the Backup and Restore Guide. If required, move the RSLinx activation code from the existing EBI server to the master diskette.

page 222

Unload the existing EBI database.

page 206

Run the PrepareDataForUpgrade utility.

page 383

If a LonWorks point server is installed on the server, back page 403 up the existing LonWorks point server data. If EXCEL 5000 Direct is installed on the server, back up page 408 the existing EXCEL 5000 Direct data.

Installation and migration tasks on the new server Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Install EBI.

page 367

If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

Done?

Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the EBI software has been installed correctly and thee are no errors. you must fix any errors before proceeding. Install and set up associated applications If required, set up Microsoft Excel data reports.

page 176

If you have any third-party OPC clients, create an account page 181 for them. If required, set up the EBI server as a file server.

page 184

Create a full backup using Acronis. Additional tasks If required, install the localization toolkit.

63

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Configure any peripherals, such as modems and printers, page 187 that are connected to the server. If your site implements Windows security policies, install your local policies in the normal manner. Complete the upgrade If you have fire points configured, download the points from Quick Builder to the server.

page 395

Reapply any changes to the system acronym set. For details, see the “About acronyms” section in the HMIWeb Display Building Guide. Reapply any specialized scan periods. For details, see the “Scanning and standard points” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Copy any relevant files, such as the history archives, from the server folder on the existing EBI server. Configure event archiving. For details, see the “Configuring Event Archiving” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. If a LonWorks point server was installed on your old page 404 server, restore the backup up LonWorks point server data. If you have any LonWorks points servers and have customized the XML templates, reapply the customizations.

page 406

If EXCEL 5000 Direct is installed on your old server, restore the backed up EXCEL 5000 Direct data.

page 409

Return the access control controllers to in-service and check that they communicate without error. Tip: You should enable one controller at a time because they will send buffered events to the server. When the access control controller are returned to inservice, a download modified action occurs automatically. You can cancel the download modified action and perform a download all action when all access control controllers are back in service. It is recommended that you perform the download all action during off-peak times as the procedure may take some time and so that cardholders are not unnecessarily denied access. Check that all printers and OPC connections are working. If OPC connections are not working, see “Creating an account for third-party OPC clients” on page 181.

64

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R400 SP1 ON NEW NON-REDUNDANT SERVER AND/OR OPERATING

Task

Go to:

Done?

Reapply any customizations to system displays. For details, see the “Configuring Stations and printers” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to the menus. For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide Reapply any customizations to Station’s toolbars For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s configuration file, station.ini. For details, see the “Station.ini” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s setup file, default.stn. For details, see the “Station setup files” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reset any watchdog timers. For details, see the “Monitoring the activity of a task” section in the Application Development Guide. Migrate Station-level scripts.

page 387

Re-register the EBI servers.

page 171

If you have renamed your server computer, you may want to change the server alias. Tune the performance of the servers.

page 431

Stop You have completed all tasks.

65

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Upgrade checklist: From EBI R400 SP1 on new redundant servers This is the top-level checklist for upgrading from EBI R400 SP1 and moving to new redundant servers and/or upgrading the Windows operating system. For example, your existing servers run Windows 2000, but your new servers run Windows 2008 Server. Note that the primary server is called “server A” and the backup server is called “server B”. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the upgrade process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The server meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

You have filled in the System Design form (page 19).

•

Disable any anti-virus programs while upgrading EBI.

•

You have a local administrator account.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

Preliminary tasks on the new servers Complete the tasks in the following order on both server A and server B. Task

Go to:

Prepare the new EBI servers Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best page 341 Practices product bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan. If you are also upgrading components from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, you should read the SRB to understand when you need to incorporate upgrade tasks into this checklist.

66

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R400 SP1 ON NEW REDUNDANT SERVERS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the server complies with hardware and software requirements Attention

If you do not have the required software installed, for example, the required version of Internet Explorer, the installation stops and you are required to install the appropriate software before proceeding with the EBI software installation.

Set the monitor resolution.

page 137

Update the server’s hosts file.

page 139

If required, install Microsoft Excel.

page 142

If required, install a network interface card (network adapter).

page 150

Protect against viruses.

page 146

Install specialized hardware on the servers If required, install serial adapters.

page 153

If required, install a LonWorks network interface.

page 157

If required, install the card or other devices associated with the Integrated PhotoID option.

page 247

Note: This is only applicable to small systems where you want operators to use this server to capture portraits or signatures. If required, install software to manage terminal server(s). page 271 Checkpoint Before you proceed, ensure the operating system, and any software and hardware has been installed correctly. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup using Acronis.

Preliminary tasks on the existing servers Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

If you have any LonWorks point servers, check that the names of the LNS databases comply with the new rules.

page 402

Done?

Freeze all changes on the servers. Disable SQL Server replication on both servers.

page 385

Back up the servers.

67

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Complete the following tasks only on “server A” If required, move the RSLinx activation code from the existing EBI server to the master diskette.

page 222

Upgrade new Server B Complete the tasks in the following order to upgrade to the new server B. Task

Go to:

Install EBI and migrate the data On the existing B server unload the EBI database.

page 206

Run the PrepareDataForUpgrade utility.

page 383

Disconnect the existing server B from the network. Upgrade EBI on the new computer.

page 367

If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the EBI software has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Install and set up associated applications If required, set up Microsoft Excel data reports.

page 176

If you have any third-party OPC clients, create an account page 181 for them. If required, set up the EBI server as a file server.

page 184

Create a backup. Additional tasks If required, install the localization toolkit. Configure any peripherals, such as modems and printers, page 187 that are connected to the server. If your site implements Windows security policies, install your local policies in the normal manner. Restart the computer. Take the channels out of service. Set the EBI server to database only. Reconnect the computer to the network. Upgrade critical Stations to R410.

68

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R400 SP1 ON NEW REDUNDANT SERVERS

Task

Go to:

Done?

On the A server take the channels out of service. On the A server create an event archive of all current events. For details, see the “Archiving Events” section in the Operators Guide. Stop the A server. Start EBI on the upgraded B server. Check that the upgraded Stations connect to the upgraded B server. Enable the channels one at a time allowing time for buffered events to be sent to the server. Check that they communicate without error. When the access control controller are returned to inservice, a download modified action occurs automatically. You can cancel the download modified action and perform a download all action when all access control controllers are back in service. It is recommended that you perform the download all action during off-peak times as the procedure may take some time and so that cardholders are not unnecessarily denied access. Checkpoint Ensure that the B server is operating without errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup.

Upgrade new Server A Complete the tasks in the following order to upgrade to the new server A. Task

Go to:

Done?

Back up the existing A server. For details see the “Backing up EBI servers” section in the Backup and Restore Guide. Install EBI and migrate the data Install EBI on the new computer.

page 160

If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

69

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Checkpoint Before you proceed, ensure that the EBI software has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Install and set up associated applications If required, set up Microsoft Excel data reports.

page 176

If you have any third-party OPC clients, create an account page 181 for them. If required, set up the EBI server as a file server.

page 184

Create a backup. Additional tasks If required, install the localization toolkit. Configure any peripherals, such as modems and printers, page 187 that are connected to the server. If your site implements Windows security policies, install your local policies in the normal manner. Reconnect the computer to the network. Restart the computer. Checkpoint Ensure that the new A server is operating without errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup.

Final tasks Complete the remaining tasks in the following order. Task Configure the servers Configure server A and server B for redundancy. For details, see the “Configuring and Monitoring a Redundant Server System” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. On server B, start Station and call up the Redundancy Status Display (sys113). Wait until the Backup indicator is green and then synchronize the servers. Failover to server A.

70

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Go to:

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R400 SP1 ON NEW REDUNDANT SERVERS

Task

Go to:

Done?

On server A, start Station and call up the Redundancy Status Display (sys113). Wait until the Backup indicator is green and then synchronize the servers. Complete the upgrade Re-register the EBI servers.

page 171

If you have fire points configured, download the points from Quick Builder to the server.

page 395

Reapply any changes to the system acronym set. For details, see the “About acronyms” section in the HMIWeb Display Building Guide. Reapply any specialized scan periods. For details, see the “Scanning and standard points” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Copy any relevant files, such as the history archives, from the server folder on the existing EBI R400 server. Configure event archiving. For details, see the “Configuring Event Archiving” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Check that all printers and OPC connections are working. If OPC connections are not working, see “Creating an account for third-party OPC clients” on page 181. Reapply any customizations to system displays on both servers. For details, see the “Configuring Stations and printers” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to the menus on both servers. For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide Reapply any customizations to Station’s toolbars on both servers. For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s configuration file, station.ini on both servers. For details, see the “Station.ini” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

71

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Reapply any customizations to Station’s setup file, default.stn on both servers. For details, see the “Station setup files” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reset any watchdog timers. For details, see the “Monitoring the activity of a task” section in the Application Development Guide. Migrate Station-level scripts.

page 387

If you have any LonWorks points servers and have customized the XML templates, reapply the customizations.

page 406

Tune the performance of the servers.

page 431

Stop You have completed all tasks.

72

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R400 SP1 ON AN EXISTING DSA SYSTEM

Upgrade checklist: From EBI R400 SP1 on an existing DSA system This is the top-level checklist for upgrading from EBI R400 SP1 on an existing DSA system. Note the following: •

You must have a CMS and Global Schedules freeze during this time. You must not modify any cards, cardholders or CMS configurations. Make certain that the upgrade is finalized before using the CMS as it will not function until the upgrade is complete.

•

You must upgrade all servers at the same time if using CMS or Global Schedules DSA synchronization. If you are just using point DSA, you can upgrade them one at a time as point DSA is supported between R400 and R410.

•

DSA server synchronization will be broken to all servers during the upgrade. Run the command stoprepl all uninstall to disable all DSA replication on all servers before upgrading them.

Prerequisites •

Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the installation process.

•

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The server meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

•

Disable any anti-virus programs while upgrading EBI.

•

To minimize downtime, you could install new hard disks in the servers. You would then still have the old hard disks with R400 installed if needed.

Task

Done?

Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best Practices product page 341 bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan. If you are also upgrading components from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, you should read the SRB to understand when you need to incorporate upgrade tasks into this checklist. Determine that DSA system is functioning correctly using EBI R400.

73

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Done?

Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the server(s) and client computer(s) being upgraded comply with hardware and software requirements. Attention

If you do not have the required software installed, for example, the required version of Internet Explorer, the installation stops and you are required to install the appropriate software before proceeding with the EBI software installation.

Determine the order of the upgrade. The upgrade should be done site by site, for example, the publisher is one site and each subscriber is another site. Upgrade the publishing site first, followed by each subscribing site. Upgrade the servers so you have at least an upgraded server and an upgraded station. Upgrade the most critical servers first, for example, the alarm monitoring server. Upgrade the clients according to their priority.

74

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON EXISTING NON-REDUNDANT SERVER

Upgrade checklist: From EBI R310 SP3 or later on existing non-redundant server This is the top-level checklist for upgrading from EBI R310 on an existing nonredundant server. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the installation process.

Prerequisites •

You have planned for the upgrade and performed the relevant pre-upgrade tasks. See “Planning for an upgrade to EBI on an existing server” on page 342.

•

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

Relevant upgrades/service packs (if not on the EBI R410 DVD).

•

The server meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

Disable any anti-virus programs while upgrading EBI.

•

You have a local administrator account on the EBI server computer.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

Upgrade Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Done?

Preliminary tasks Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best page 341 Practices product bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan. If you are also upgrading components from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, you should read the SRB for your component to understand when you need to incorporate upgrade tasks into this checklist. Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the server complies with hardware and software requirements.

75

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

If your R310 system contains points with illegal point names, rename the points before you upgrade.

page 391

Check that area names are not the same as any channel, controller, or point names. If there are any duplicate names, you must rename the areas.

page 389

If you have any LonWorks point servers, check that the names of the LNS databases comply with the new rules.

page 402

Done?

Generate an event archive of all current events. For details, see the “Archiving Events” section in the Operators Guide. If you use the Cardholder Management option and the server is part of a DSA system, disable SQL Server replication.

page 385

Back up the server. For details, see the “Backing up EBI servers” section in the Backup and Restore Guide. Take the access control controllers out of service. This ensures that events are buffered until the upgrade is complete. Terminate any Station connections to the EBI server. • Stop any point servers. • Close any EBI-related applications, such as the EBI Control Panel and Quick Builder. Unload the EBI database and then close the Start-Stop EBI Server application.

page 206

If RSLinx is installed, uninstall it. Upgrade the server hardware Upgrade the hardware as specified when planning for the upgrade. Upgrade the server software (Only required if, during planning, you identified the need to upgrade third party software components on the server, for example, Internet Explorer.) Set the EBI services to manual startup.

page 380

Upgrade any other applications as appropriate. Upgrade EBI Upgrade EBI components on the server.

76

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

page 362

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON EXISTING NON-REDUNDANT SERVER

Task

Go to:

Done?

Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the EBI software has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Register the EBI server.

page 166

If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

Additional tasks If required, install the localization toolkit. Complete the upgrade Reapply any changes to the system acronym set. For details, see the “About acronyms” section in the HMIWeb Display Building Guide. Reapply any specialized scan periods. For details, see the “Scanning and standard points” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. If you have the Cardholder Management System (CMS) complete the following tasks: • Understand the changes to user fields

page 396

• Modify field labels

page 397

• Make user fields visible

page 398

• Create new card layouts to replace DSP card layouts

page 399

• Migrate existing HTM card layouts

page 400

If you use operator profiles, re-create the operator profiles. For details see “Defining a cardholder management profile” topic in the Access Control Configuration Guide specific to your controller. Configure event archiving. For details, see the “Configuring Event Archiving” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

77

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Return the access control controllers to in-service and check that they communicate without error. Tip: You should enable one controller at a time because they will send buffered events to the server. When the access control controller are returned to inservice, a download modified action occurs automatically. You can cancel the download modified action and perform a download all action when all access control controllers are back in service. It is recommended that you perform the download all action during off-peak times as the procedure may take some time and so that cardholders are not unnecessarily denied access. If you have the pre-Outlook style Global Schedules, migrate the schedules.

page 410

Check that all printers and OPC connections are working. If OPC connections are not working, see “Creating an account for third-party OPC clients” on page 181. Reapply any customizations to system displays. For details, see the “Configuring Stations and printers” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to the menus. For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide Reapply any customizations to Station’s toolbars For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s configuration file, station.ini. For details, see the “Station.ini” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s setup file, default.stn. For details, see the “Station setup files” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reset any watchdog timers. For details, see the “Monitoring the activity of a task” section in the Application Development Guide. Migrate Station-level scripts.

78

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

page 387

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON EXISTING NON-REDUNDANT SERVER

Task

Go to:

If you have any LonWorks points servers and have customized the XML templates, reapply the customizations.

page 406

Upload new location information to the Quick Builder Projects database.

page 389

If you have fire points configured, download the points from Quick Builder to the server.

page 395

Done?

If you have LonWorks point servers, download the LonWorks networks, channels, and controllers from Quick Builder so that these items appear in the System Status display. If you use EXCEL 5000 Direct Dialup, download the EXCEL 5000 remote bus and controllers from Quick Builder so that these items appear in the System Status display.

Stop You have completed all tasks.

79

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Upgrade checklist: From EBI R310 SP3 or later on existing redundant servers This is the top-level checklist for upgrading from EBI R310 on existing redundant servers. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the installation process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The server meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

Disable any anti-virus programs while upgrading EBI.

•

You have a local administrator account.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

Preliminary Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Attention The primary server is called “server A” and the backup server is called “server B”. Task

Go to:

Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best page 341 Practices product bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan. If you are also upgrading components from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, you should read the SRB for your component to understand when you need to incorporate upgrade tasks into this checklist.

80

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON EXISTING REDUNDANT SERVERS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify both servers comply with hardware and software requirements. Attention

If you do not have the required software installed, for example, the required version of Internet Explorer, the installation stops and you are required to install the appropriate software before proceeding with the EBI software installation.

If your R310 system contains points with illegal point names, rename the points before you upgrade.

page 391

Check that area names are not the same as any channel, controller, or point names. If there are any duplicate names, you must rename the areas.

page 389

If you have any LonWorks point servers, check that the names of the LNS databases comply with the new rules.

page 402

Freeze all changes on the server. On server A, start Station and call up the Redundancy Status display (sys113) and synchronize server A and server B. Disable SQL Server replication on both servers.

page 385

Upgrade Server B Complete the tasks in the following order to upgrade server B. Task

Go to:

Done?

Preliminary tasks Back up the server. For details, see the “Backing up EBI servers” section in the Backup and Restore Guide. If RSLinx is installed, uninstall it. Terminate any Station connections to the EBI server. • Stop any point servers. • Close any EBI-related applications, such as the EBI Control Panel and Quick Builder. Upgrade the server hardware Upgrade the hardware as specified when planning for the upgrade.

81

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Upgrade the server software (Only required if, during planning, you identified the need to upgrade third party software components on the server, for example, Internet Explorer.) Set the EBI services to manual startup.

page 380

Upgrade any other applications as appropriate. Upgrade EBI Upgrade EBI.

page 362

Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the EBI software has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup. Additional tasks If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

If required, install the localization toolkit. Set EBI services to automatic startup. Restart the computer. Take the channels out of service. Set the EBI server to database only. Reconnect the computer to the network. Upgrade critical Stations to R410. On the A server take the channels out of service. On the A server create an event archive. Stop the A server. Start EBI on the upgraded B server. Check that the upgraded Stations connect to the upgraded B server.

82

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

page 382

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON EXISTING REDUNDANT SERVERS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Enable the channels one at a time allowing time for buffered events to be sent to the server. Check that they communicate without error. When the access control controller are returned to inservice, a download modified action occurs automatically. You can cancel the download modified action and perform a download all action when all access control controllers are back in service. It is recommended that you perform the download all action during off-peak times as the procedure may take some time and so that cardholders are not unnecessarily denied access. Checkpoint Ensure that the B server is operating without errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup.

Upgrade Server A Complete the tasks in the following order to upgrade server A. Task

Go to:

Done?

Preliminary tasks Back up the server. For details, see the “Backing up EBI servers” section in the Backup and Restore Guide. If RSLinx is installed, uninstall it. • Stop any point servers. • Close any EBI-related applications, such as the EBI Control Panel and Quick Builder. Upgrade the server hardware Upgrade the hardware as specified when planning for the upgrade. Upgrade the server software (Only required if, during planning, you identified the need to upgrade software components, for example, Internet Explorer.) Set the EBI services to manual startup.

page 380

Upgrade any other applications as appropriate. Upgrade EBI Upgrade EBI.

page 362

83

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the EBI software has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup. Set EBI services to automatic startup.

page 382

Additional tasks If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

If required, install the localization toolkit.

Final tasks Complete the remaining tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Configure the servers Start the A server as the backup server. Synchronize the A server with the B server. Failover to the A server. Synchronize the servers. Register the EBI servers.

page 166

Complete the upgrade Reapply any changes to the system acronym set. For details, see the “About acronyms” section in the HMIWeb Display Building Guide. Reapply any specialized scan periods. For details, see the “Scanning and standard points” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. If you have the Cardholder Management System (CMS) complete the following tasks:

84

• Understand the changes to user fields

page 396

• Modify field labels

page 397

• Make user fields visible

page 398

• Create new card layouts to replace DSP card layouts

page 399

• Migrate existing HTM card layouts

page 400

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON EXISTING REDUNDANT SERVERS

Task

Go to:

Done?

If you use operator profiles, re-create the operator profiles. For details see “Defining a cardholder management profile” topic in the Access Control Configuration Guide specific to your controller. Configure event archiving. For details, see the “Configuring Event Archiving” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Check that all printers and OPC connections are working. If OPC connections are not working, see “Creating an account for third-party OPC clients” on page 181. Reapply any customizations to system displays. For details, see the “Configuring Stations and printers” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to the menus. For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide Reapply any customizations to Station’s toolbars For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s configuration file, station.ini. For details, see the “Station.ini” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s setup file, default.stn. For details, see the “Station setup files” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reset any watchdog timers. For details, see the “Monitoring the activity of a task” section in the Application Development Guide. Migrate Station-level scripts.

page 387

If you have any LonWorks points servers and have customized the XML templates, reapply the customizations.

page 406

Upload new location information to the Quick Builder Projects database.

page 389

85

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

If you have fire points configured, download the points from Quick Builder to the server.

page 395

If you have the pre-Outlook style Global Schedules, migrate the schedules.

page 410

If you have LonWorks point servers, download the LonWorks networks, channels, and controllers from Quick Builder so that these items appear in the System Status display. If you use EXCEL 5000 Direct Dialup, download the EXCEL 5000 remote bus and controllers from Quick Builder so that these items appear in the System Status display.

Stop You have completed all tasks.

86

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON NEW NON-REDUNDANT SERVER

Upgrade checklist: From EBI R310 SP3 or later on new non-redundant server This is the top-level checklist for upgrading from EBI R310 and moving to a new non-redundant server and/or upgrading the Windows operating system. For example, your existing server runs Windows 2000, but your new server runs Windows 2008 Server. If you are keeping your existing computer (that is, only upgrading the Windows operating system), you should consider adding a new hard drive and using it as the primary disk (on which you install Windows and EBI), and keep the existing hard drive as a backup of the existing EBI server. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the upgrade process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The server meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

You have filled in the System Design form (page 19).

•

Disable any anti-virus programs while upgrading EBI.

•

You have a local administrator account on the EBI server computer.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

Preliminary tasks on the new server Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Done?

Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best page 341 Practices product bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan. If you are also upgrading components from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, you should read the SRB for your component to understand when you need to incorporate upgrade tasks into this checklist.

87

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the new server complies with hardware and software requirements Attention

If you do not have the required software installed, for example, the required version of Internet Explorer, the installation stops and you are required to install the appropriate software before proceeding with the EBI software installation.

Configure the display.

page 137

Ensure Internet Explorer 7 Update the server’s hosts file.

page 139

If required, install Microsoft Excel.

page 142

If required, install a network interface card (network adapter).

page 150

Protect against viruses.

page 146

Install specialized hardware If required, install serial adapters.

page 153

If required, install a LonWorks network interface card.

page 157

If required, install the card or other devices associated with the Integrated PhotoID option.

page 247

Note: Only install PhotoID hardware on the server if the server used to capture portraits/signatures. (Unless this is a very small system, we recommend that you install PhotoID hardware on a client computer.) If required, install software to manage terminal server(s). page 271

Preliminary tasks on the old (existing) server Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

If your R310 system contains points with illegal point names, rename the points before you upgrade.

page 391

Check that area names are not the same as any channel, controller, or point names. If there are any duplicate names, you must rename the areas.

page 389

If you have any LonWorks point servers, check that the names of the LNS databases comply with the new rules.

page 402

Freeze all changes on the server

88

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON NEW NON-REDUNDANT SERVER

Task

Go to:

Done?

Generate an event archive of all current events. For details, see the “Archiving Events” section in the Operators Guide. Backup the server. For details, see the “Backing up EBI servers” section in the Backup and Restore Guide. Take the access control controllers out of service. This ensures that events are buffered until the upgrade is complete. If required, move the RSLinx activation code from the existing EBI server to the master diskette.

page 222

Unload the existing EBI database.

page 206

Run the PrepareDataForUpgrade utility.

page 383

If a LonWorks point server is installed on the server, back page 403 up the existing LonWorks point server data. If EXCEL 5000 Direct is installed on the server, back up page 408 the existing EXCEL 5000 Direct data.

Installation and migration tasks on the new server Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Install EBI.

page 367

If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

Done?

Checkpoint Before you proceed, ensure that the EBI software has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Install and set up associated applications If required, set up Microsoft Excel data reports.

page 176

If you have any third-party OPC clients, create an account page 181 for them. If required, set up the EBI server as a file server.

page 184

Create a full backup using Acronis. Additional tasks If required, install the localization toolkit.

89

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Configure any peripherals, such as modems and printers, page 187 that are connected to the server. If your site implements Windows security policies, install your local policies in the normal manner. Complete the upgrade Reapply any changes to the system acronym set. For details, see the “About acronyms” section in the HMIWeb Display Building Guide. Reapply any specialized scan periods. For details, see the “Scanning and standard points” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Copy any relevant files, such as the history archives, from the server folder on the existing EBI server. If you have the Cardholder Management System (CMS) complete the following tasks. • Understand the changes to user fields

page 396

• Modify field labels

page 397

• Make user fields visible

page 398

• Create new card layouts to replace DSP card layouts

page 399

• Migrate existing HTM card layouts

page 400

If you use operator profiles, re-create the operator profiles. For details see “Defining a cardholder management profile” topic in the Access Control Configuration Guide specific to your controller. Configure event archiving. For details, see the “Configuring Event Archiving” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. If a LonWorks point server was installed on your old page 404 server, restore the backup up LonWorks point server data.

90

If you have any LonWorks points servers and have customized the XML templates, reapply the customizations.

page 406

If EXCEL 5000 Direct is installed on your old server, restore the backed up EXCEL 5000 Direct data.

page 409

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON NEW NON-REDUNDANT SERVER

Task

Go to:

Done?

Return the access control controllers to in-service and check that they communicate without error. Tip: You should enable one controller at a time because they will send buffered events to the server. When the access control controller are returned to inservice, a download modified action occurs automatically. You can cancel the download modified action and perform a download all action when all access control controllers are back in service. It is recommended that you perform the download all action during off-peak times as the procedure may take some time and so that cardholders are not unnecessarily denied access. Check that all printers and OPC connections are working. If OPC connections are not working, see “Creating an account for third-party OPC clients” on page 181. Reapply any customizations to system displays. For details, see the “Configuring Stations and printers” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to the menus. For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide Reapply any customizations to Station’s toolbars For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s configuration file, station.ini. For details, see the “Station.ini” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s setup file, default.stn. For details, see the “Station setup files” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reset any watchdog timers. For details, see the “Monitoring the activity of a task” section in the Application Development Guide. Migrate Station-level scripts.

page 387

Re-register the EBI servers.

page 171

Upload new location information to the Quick Builder Projects database.

page 389

91

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

If you have fire points configured, download the points from Quick Builder to the server.

page 395

If you have the pre-Outlook style Global Schedules, migrate the schedules.

page 410

If you have LonWorks point servers, download the LonWorks networks, channels, and controllers from Quick Builder so that these items appear in the System Status display. If you use EXCEL 5000 Direct Dialup, download the EXCEL 5000 remote bus and controllers from Quick Builder so that these items appear in the System Status display. If you have renamed your server computer, you may want to change the server alias. Tune the performance of the servers.

Stop You have completed all tasks.

92

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

page 431

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON EXISTING NON-REDUNDANT SERVER WITH

Upgrade checklist: From EBI R310 SP3 or later on existing non-redundant server with new operating system This is the top-level checklist for upgrading from EBI R310 and moving to a new Windows operating system. For example, your existing server runs Windows 2000, but you need to change the operating system to Windows 2008 Server. (You cannot upgrade the operating system, you must perform a clean installation of the new operating system.) Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the upgrade process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The server meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

You have filled in the System Design form (page 19).

•

Disable any anti-virus programs while upgrading EBI.

•

You have a local administrator account on the EBI server computer.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Done?

Preliminary tasks Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best page 341 Practices product bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan. If you are also upgrading components from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, you should read the SRB for your component to understand when you need to incorporate upgrade tasks into this checklist. If your R310 system contains points with illegal point names, rename the points before you upgrade.

page 391

93

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Check that area names are not the same as any channel, controller, or point names. If there are any duplicate names, you must rename the areas.

page 389

If you have any LonWorks point servers, check that the names of the LNS databases comply with the new rules.

page 402

Freeze all changes on the servers. Generate an event archive of all current events. For details, see the “Archiving Events” section in the Operators Guide. Create a backup of the server. For details see “Backing up EBI servers” section in the Backup and Restore Guide. Take the access control controllers out of service. This ensures that events are buffered until the upgrade is complete. If required, move the RSLinx activation code from the existing EBI server to the master diskette.

page 222

Unload the existing EBI database.

page 206

If you have any LonWorks point servers, check that the names of the LNS databases comply with the new rules.

page 402

Run the PrepareDataForUpgrade utility.

page 383

If a LonWorks point server is installed on the server, back page 403 up the existing LonWorks point server data. If EXCEL 5000 Direct is installed on the server, back up page 408 the existing EXCEL 5000 Direct data. Upgrade the server hardware and software Install the new operating system, making sure you include all of the service packs and hot fixes. Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the operating system has been installed correctly and there are no errors. Configure the display.

page 137

Ensure Internet Explorer 7 is installed. Update the server’s hosts file. If required, install Microsoft Excel.

page 142

Protect against viruses.

page 146

Install specialized hardware

94

page 139

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON EXISTING NON-REDUNDANT SERVER WITH

Task

Go to:

If required, install a network interface card (network adapter).

page 150

If required, install serial adapters.

page 153

If required, install a LonWorks network interface card.

page 157

If required, install the card or other devices associated with the Integrated PhotoID option.

page 247

Done?

Note: Only install PhotoID hardware on the server if the server used to capture portraits/signatures. (Unless this is a very small system, we recommend that you install PhotoID hardware on a client computer.) If required, install software to manage terminal server(s). page 271 Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the software and hardware has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. EBI installation and migration tasks Upgrade EBI.

page 367

If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the EBI software has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Install and set up associated applications If required, set up Microsoft Excel data reports.

page 176

If you have any third-party OPC clients, create an account page 181 for them. If required, set up the EBI server as a file server.

page 184

Create a backup using Acronis. Additional tasks If required, install the localization toolkit. Configure any peripherals, such as modems and printers, page 187 that are connected to the server. If your site implements Windows security policies, install your local policies in the normal manner. Complete the upgrade

95

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Reapply any changes to the system acronym set. For details, see the “About acronyms” section in the HMIWeb Display Building Guide. Reapply any specialized scan periods. For details, see the “Scanning and standard points” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Copy any relevant files, such as the history archives, from the server folder on the existing EBI server. If you have the Cardholder Management System (CMS) complete the following tasks. • Understand the changes to user fields

page 396

• Modify field labels

page 397

• Make user fields visible

page 398

• Create new card layouts to replace DSP card layouts

page 399

• Migrate existing HTM card layouts

page 400

If you use operator profiles, re-create the operator profiles. For details see “Defining a cardholder management profile” topic in the Access Control Configuration Guide specific to your controller. Configure event archiving. For details, see the “Configuring Event Archiving” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. If a LonWorks point server was installed on your old page 404 server, restore the backup up LonWorks point server data.

96

If you have any LonWorks points servers and have customized the XML templates, reapply the customizations.

page 406

If EXCEL 5000 Direct is installed on your old server, restore the backed up EXCEL 5000 Direct data.

page 409

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON EXISTING NON-REDUNDANT SERVER WITH

Task

Go to:

Done?

Return the access control controllers to in-service and check that they communicate without error. Tip: You should enable one controller at a time because they will send buffered events to the server. When the access control controller are returned to inservice, a download modified action occurs automatically. You can cancel the download modified action and perform a download all action when all access control controllers are back in service. It is recommended that you perform the download all action during off-peak times as the procedure may take some time and so that cardholders are not unnecessarily denied access. Check that all printers and OPC connections are working. If OPC connections are not working, see “Creating an account for third-party OPC clients” on page 181. Reapply any customizations to system displays. For details, see the “Configuring Stations and printers” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to the menus. For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide Reapply any customizations to Station’s toolbars For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s configuration file, station.ini. For details, see the “Station.ini” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s setup file, default.stn. For details, see the “Station setup files” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reset any watchdog timers. For details, see the “Monitoring the activity of a task” section in the Application Development Guide. Migrate Station-level scripts.

page 387

Re-register the EBI servers.

page 171

Upload new location information to the Quick Builder Projects database.

page 389

97

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

If you have fire points configured, download the points from Quick Builder to the server.

page 395

If you have the pre-Outlook style Global Schedules, migrate the schedules.

page 410

If you have LonWorks point servers, download the LonWorks networks, channels, and controllers from Quick Builder so that these items appear in the System Status display. If you use EXCEL 5000 Direct Dialup, download the EXCEL 5000 remote bus and controllers from Quick Builder so that these items appear in the System Status display. If you have renamed your server computer, you may want to change the server alias. Tune the performance of the servers.

98

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

page 431

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON NEW REDUNDANT SERVERS

Upgrade checklist: From EBI R310 SP3 or later on new redundant servers This is the top-level checklist for upgrading from EBI R310 and moving to new redundant servers and/or upgrading the Windows operating system. For example, your existing servers run Windows 2000, but your new servers run Windows 2008 Server. Note that the primary server is called “server A” and the backup server is called “server B”. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the upgrade process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The server meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

You have filled in the System Design form (page 19).

•

Disable any anti-virus programs while upgrading EBI.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

•

You have a local administrator account.

Preliminary tasks on the new servers Complete the tasks in the following order on both server A and server B. Task

Go to:

Done?

Prepare the new EBI servers Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best page 341 Practices product bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan. If you are also upgrading components from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, you should read the SRB for your component to understand when you need to incorporate upgrade tasks into this checklist.

99

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the server complies with hardware and software requirements Attention

If you do not have the required software installed, for example, the required version of Internet Explorer, the installation stops and you are required to install the appropriate software before proceeding with the EBI software installation.

Set the monitor resolution.

page 137

Update the server’s hosts file.

page 139

If required, install Microsoft Excel.

page 142

If required, install a network interface card (network adapter).

page 150

Protect against viruses.

page 146

Install specialized hardware on the servers If required, install serial adapters.

page 153

If required, install a LonWorks network interface.

page 157

If required, install the card or other devices associated with the Integrated PhotoID option.

page 247

Note: This is only applicable to small systems where you want operators to use this server to capture portraits or signatures. If required, install software to manage terminal server(s). page 271 Checkpoint Before you proceed, ensure the operating system, and any software and hardware has been installed correctly. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup using Acronis.

Preliminary tasks on the existing servers Complete the tasks in the following order.

100

Task

Go to:

If your R310 system contains points with illegal point names, rename the points before you upgrade.

page 391

Check that area names are not the same as any channel, controller, or point names. If there are any duplicate names, you must rename the areas.

page 389

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON NEW REDUNDANT SERVERS

Task

Go to:

If you have any LonWorks point servers, check that the names of the LNS databases comply with the new rules.

page 402

Done?

Freeze all changes on the servers. Disable SQL Server replication on both servers.

page 385

Back up the servers. For details see the “Backing up EBI servers” section in the Backup and Restore Guide. Complete the following tasks only on “server A” If required, move the RSLinx activation code from the existing EBI server to the master diskette.

page 222

Upgrade new Server B Complete the tasks in the following order to upgrade server B. Task

Go to:

Done?

Install EBI and migrate the data On the existing B server, unload the EBI database.

page 206

Run the PrepareDataForUpgrade utility and copy the page 383 existing EBI server databases and the event archive to the new B server. Disconnect the existing server B from the network. Upgrade EBI on the new computer.

page 367

If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the EBI software has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Install and set up associated applications If required, set up Microsoft Excel data reports.

page 176

If you have any third-party OPC clients, create an account page 181 for them. If required, set up the EBI server as a file server.

page 184

Create a backup. Additional tasks If required, install the localization toolkit.

101

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Configure any peripherals, such as modems and printers, page 187 that are connected to the server. If your site implements Windows security policies, install your local policies in the normal manner. Restart the computer. Take the channels out of service. Set the EBI server to database only. Reconnect the computer to the network. Upgrade critical Stations to R410. On the A server take the channels out of service. On the A server create an event archive. Stop the A server. Start EBI on the upgraded B server. Check that the upgraded Stations connect to the upgraded B server. Enable the channels one at a time allowing time for buffered events to be sent to the server. Check that they communicate without error. When the access control controller are returned to inservice, a download modified action occurs automatically. You can cancel the download modified action and perform a download all action when all access control controllers are back in service. It is recommended that you perform the download all action during off-peak times as the procedure may take some time and so that cardholders are not unnecessarily denied access. Checkpoint Ensure that the B server is operating without errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup.

Upgrade new Server A Complete the tasks in the following to upgrade server A. Task Back up the existing A server. For details see the “Backing up EBI servers” section in the Backup and Restore Guide.

102

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Go to:

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON NEW REDUNDANT SERVERS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Install EBI and migrate the data Install EBI on the new computer.

page 160

If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

Checkpoint Before you proceed, ensure that the EBI software has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Install and set up associated applications If required, set up Microsoft Excel data reports.

page 176

If you have any third-party OPC clients, create an account page 181 for them. If required, set up the EBI server as a file server.

page 184

Create a backup. Additional tasks If required, install the localization toolkit. Configure any peripherals, such as modems and printers, page 187 that are connected to the server. If your site implements Windows security policies, install your local policies in the normal manner. Reconnect the computer to the network. Restart the computer. Checkpoint Ensure that the new A server is operating without errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup.

Final tasks Complete the remaining tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Done?

Configure the servers Configure server A and server B for redundancy. For details, see the “Configuring and Monitoring a Redundant Server System” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

103

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

On server B, start Station and call up the Redundancy Status Display (sys113). Wait until the Backup indicator is green and then synchronize the servers. Failover to server A. On server A, start Station and call up the Redundancy Status Display (sys113). Wait until the Backup indicator is green and then synchronize the servers. Complete the upgrade Re-register the EBI servers.

page 171

Reapply any changes to the system acronym set. For details, see the “About acronyms” section in the HMIWeb Display Building Guide. Reapply any specialized scan periods. For details, see the “Scanning and standard points” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Copy any relevant files, such as the history archives, from the server folder on the existing EBI R310 server. If you have the Cardholder Management System (CMS) complete the following tasks: • Understand the changes to user fields

page 396

• Modify field labels

page 397

• Make user fields visible

page 398

• Create new card layouts to replace DSP card layouts

page 399

• Migrate existing HTM card layouts

page 400

If you use operator profiles, re-create the operator profiles. For details see “Defining a cardholder management profile” topic in the Access Control Configuration Guide specific to your controller. Configure event archiving. For details, see the “Configuring Event Archiving” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Check that all printers and OPC connections are working. If OPC connections are not working, see “Creating an account for third-party OPC clients” on page 181. Reapply any customizations to system displays on both servers. For details, see the “Configuring Stations and printers” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

104

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON NEW REDUNDANT SERVERS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Reapply any customizations to the menus on both servers. For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide Reapply any customizations to Station’s toolbars on both servers. For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s configuration file, station.ini on both servers. For details, see the “Station.ini” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s setup file, default.stn on both servers. For details, see the “Station setup files” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reset any watchdog timers. For details, see the “Monitoring the activity of a task” section in the Application Development Guide. Migrate Station-level scripts.

page 387

If you have any LonWorks points servers and have customized the XML templates, reapply the customizations.

page 406

Upload new location information to the Quick Builder Projects database.

page 389

If you have fire points configured, download the points from Quick Builder to the server.

page 395

If you have the pre-Outlook style Global Schedules, migrate the schedules.

page 410

If you have LonWorks point servers, download the LonWorks networks, channels, and controllers from Quick Builder so that these items appear in the System Status display. If you use EXCEL 5000 Direct Dialup, download the EXCEL 5000 remote bus and controllers from Quick Builder so that these items appear in the System Status display. Tune the performance of the servers.

page 431

105

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Stop You have completed all tasks.

106

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON EXISTING REDUNDANT SERVERS WITH

Upgrade checklist: From EBI R310 SP3 or later on existing redundant servers with new operating system This is the top-level checklist for upgrading from EBI R310 and moving to a new Windows operating system. For example, your existing servers run Windows 2000, but you need to change to Windows 2008 Server. If you are keeping your existing computer (that is, only upgrading the Windows operating system), you should consider adding a new hard drive and using it as the primary disk (on which you install Windows and EBI), and keep the existing hard drive as a backup of the existing EBI server. Note that the primary server is called “server A” and the backup server is called “server B”. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the upgrade process.

Prerequisites •

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The server meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

You have filled in the System Design form (page 19).

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

Preliminary tasks on the existing servers Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Done?

Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best page 341 Practices product bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan. If you are also upgrading components from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, you should read the SRB for your component to understand when you need to incorporate upgrade tasks into this checklist.

107

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

If your R310 system contains points with illegal point names, rename the points before you upgrade.

page 391

Check that area names are not the same as any channel, controller, or point names. If there are any duplicate names, you must rename the areas.

page 389

If you have any LonWorks point servers, check that the names of the LNS databases comply with the new rules.

page 402

Done?

Freeze all changes on the servers. On server A, start Station and call up the Redundancy Status display (sys113) and synchronize server A and server B. Generate an event archive of all current events. For details, see the “Archiving Events” section in the Operators Guide. Disable SQL Server replication on both servers.

page 385

Back up the servers. For details, see the “Backing up EBI servers” section in the Backup and Restore Guide. If required, move the RSLinx activation code from the existing EBI server to the master diskette.

page 222

Upgrade Server B Complete the tasks in the following order on server B only. Task

Go to:

Unload the existing EBI database

page 206

Run the PrepareDataForUpgrade utility and store the page 383 server database on a network. Upgrade the server hardware and software Install the new operating system, making sure you include all of the service packs and hot fixes. Ensure correct versions of software are installed as listed in the compatibility matrix (for example, Internet Explorer 7). Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the operating system has been installed correctly. Reboot the server and ensure there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding.

108

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON EXISTING REDUNDANT SERVERS WITH

Task

Go to:

Configure the display.

page 137

Update the server’s hosts file.

page 139

If required, install Microsoft Excel.

page 142

Protect against viruses.

page 146

Done?

Install specialized hardware If required, install a network interface card (network adapter).

page 150

If required, install serial adapters.

page 153

If required, install a LonWorks network interface card.

page 157

If required, install the card or other devices associated with the Integrated PhotoID option.

page 247

Note: Only install PhotoID hardware on the server if the server is used to capture portraits/signatures. (Unless this is a very small system, we recommend that you install PhotoID hardware on a client computer.) Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the software and hardware has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup using Acronis. Install EBI and migrate the data Copy the existing EBI server databases (created using the PrepareDataforUpgrade utility) from the storage location you chose. Upgrade EBI on the new operating system.

page 367

If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the EBI software has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Install and set up associated applications If required, set up Microsoft Excel data reports.

page 176

If you have any third-party OPC clients, create an account page 181 for them. If required, set up the EBI server as a file server.

page 184

Create a full backup using Acronis. Additional tasks

109

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

If required, install the localization toolkit. Configure any peripherals, such as modems and printers, page 187 that are connected to the server. If your site implements Windows security policies, install your local policies in the normal manner. Restart the computer. Take the channels out of service. Set the EBI server to database only. Reconnect the computer to the network. Upgrade critical Stations to R410. On the A server take the channels out of service. On the A server create an event archive. Stop the A server. Start EBI on the upgraded B server. Check that the upgraded Stations connect to the upgraded B server. Enable the channels one at a time allowing time for buffered events to be sent to the server. Check that they communicate without error. When the access control controller are returned to inservice, a download modified action occurs automatically. You can cancel the download modified action and perform a download all action when all access control controllers are back in service. It is recommended that you perform the download all action during off-peak times as the procedure may take some time and so that cardholders are not unnecessarily denied access. Checkpoint Ensure that the B server is operating without errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup.

Upgrade Server A Complete the tasks in the following order on server A only.

110

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON EXISTING REDUNDANT SERVERS WITH

Task

Go to:

Done?

Back up the server. For details, see the “Backing up EBI servers” section in the Backup and Restore Guide. Upgrade the server hardware and software Install the new operating system, making sure you include all of the service packs and hot fixes. Ensure the correct versions of software are installed as per the compatibility matrix (for example, Internet Explorer 7). Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the operating system has been installed correctly. Reboot the server and ensure there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Configure the display.

page 137

Ensure Internet Explorer 7 is installed. Update the server’s hosts file.

page 139

If required, install Microsoft Excel.

page 142

Protect against viruses.

page 146

Install specialized hardware If required, install a network interface card (network adapter).

page 150

If required, install serial adapters.

page 153

If required, install a LonWorks network interface card.

page 157

If required, install the card or other devices associated with the Integrated PhotoID option.

page 247

Note: Only install PhotoID hardware on the server if the server used to capture portraits/signatures. (Unless this is a very small system, we recommend that you install PhotoID hardware on a client computer.) Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the software and hardware has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup using Acronis. Install EBI Install EBI on the new operating system.

page 367

If you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx, install RSLinx.

page 173

111

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Done?

Checkpoint Before you proceed, check that the EBI software has been installed correctly and there are no errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Install and set up associated applications If required, set up Microsoft Excel data reports.

page 176

If you have any third-party OPC clients, create an account page 181 for them. If required, set up the EBI server as a file server.

page 184

Create a full backup using Acronis. Additional tasks If required, install the localization toolkit. Configure any peripherals, such as modems and printers, page 187 that are connected to the server. If your site implements Windows security policies, install your local policies in the normal manner. Reconnect the computer to the network. Restart the computer. Checkpoint Ensure that the A server is operating without errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Create a backup.

Final tasks Complete the remaining tasks in the following order. Task Configure the servers Configure server A and server B for redundancy. For details, see the “Configuring and Monitoring a Redundant Server System” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. On server B, start Station and call up the Redundancy Status Display (sys113). Wait until the Backup indicator is green and then synchronize the servers. Failover to server A.

112

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Go to:

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON EXISTING REDUNDANT SERVERS WITH

Task

Go to:

Done?

On server A, start Station and call up the Redundancy Status Display (sys113). Wait until the Backup indicator is green and then synchronize the servers. Checkpoint Ensure both servers are operating without errors. You must fix any errors before proceeding. Complete the upgrade Re-register the EBI servers.

page 171

If you have fire points configured, download the points from Quick Builder to the server.

page 395

Reapply any changes to the system acronym set. For details, see the “About acronyms” section in the HMIWeb Display Building Guide. Reapply any specialized scan periods. For details, see the “Scanning and standard points” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Copy any relevant files, such as the history archives, from the server folder on the existing EBI R310 server. If you have the Cardholder Management System (CMS) complete the following tasks: • Understand the changes to user fields

page 396

• Modify field labels

page 397

• Make user fields visible

page 398

• Create new card layouts to replace DSP card layouts

page 399

• Migrate existing HTM card layouts

page 400

Configure event archiving. For details, see the “Configuring Event Archiving” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Check that all printers and OPC connections are working. If OPC connections are not working, see “Creating an account for third-party OPC clients” on page 181. Reapply any customizations to system displays on both servers. For details, see the “Configuring Stations and printers” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to the menus on both servers. For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide 113

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Reapply any customizations to Station’s toolbars on both servers. For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s configuration file, station.ini on both servers. For details, see the “Station.ini” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s setup file, default.stn on both servers. For details, see the “Station setup files” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reset any watchdog timers. For details, see the “Monitoring the activity of a task” section in the Application Development Guide. Migrate Station-level scripts.

page 387

If you have any LonWorks points servers and have customized the XML templates, reapply the customizations.

page 406

Upload new location information to the Quick Builder Projects database.

page 389

If you have the pre-Outlook style Global Schedules, migrate the schedules.

page 410

Tune the performance of the servers.

page 431

Stop You have completed all tasks.

114

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: FROM EBI R310 SP3 OR LATER ON AN EXISTING DSA SYSTEM

Upgrade checklist: From EBI R310 SP3 or later on an existing DSA system This is the top-level checklist for upgrading from EBI R310 on an existing DSA system. Note the following: •

You must have a CMS and Global Schedules freeze during this time. You must not modify any cards, cardholders or CMS configurations. Make certain that the upgrade is finalized before using the CMS as it will not function until the upgrade is complete.

•

You must upgrade all servers at the same time if using CMS or Global Schedules DSA synchronization. If you are just using point DSA, you can upgrade them one at a time as point DSA is supported between R310 and R400.

Prerequisites •

Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the installation process.

•

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The server meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

If required, you have the Localization toolkit for your language. Localization toolkits are available from your Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

•

Disable any anti-virus programs while upgrading EBI.

•

To minimize downtime, you could install new hard disks in the servers. You would then still have the old hard disks with R310 installed if needed.

Task

Done?

Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best Practices product page 341 bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan. If you are also upgrading components from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, you should read the SRB to understand when you need to incorporate upgrade tasks into this checklist. Determine that DSA system is functioning correctly using EBI R310. If your R310 system contains points with illegal names, rename the points page 391 before you upgrade each server.

115

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Done?

Check that area names are not the same as any channel, controller, or page 389 point names. If there are any duplicate names, you must rename the areas. Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the server(s) and client computer(s) being upgraded comply with hardware and software requirements. Attention

If you do not have the required software installed, for example, the required version of Internet Explorer, the installation stops and you are required to install the appropriate software before proceeding with the EBI software installation.

Determine the order of the upgrade. The upgrade should be done site by site, for example, the publisher is one site and each subscriber is another site. Upgrade the publishing site first, followed by each subscribing site. Upgrade the servers so you have at least an upgraded server and an upgraded station. Upgrade the most critical servers first, for example, the alarm monitoring server. Upgrade the clients according to their priority.

116

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: STATION AND DISPLAYS

Upgrade checklist: Station and displays This is the top-level checklist for upgrading Station and the displays on a client computer. (If appropriate, you can also install other EBI client applications such as HMIWeb Display Builder and Quick Builder.) Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the upgrade process.

Prerequisites •

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The computer meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

Disable any anti-virus programs while upgrading EBI.

Upgrade Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Done?

Preparatory tasks Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best Practices product bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan.

page 341

Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the computer complies with hardware and software requirements Attention

If you do not have the required software installed, for example, the required version of Internet Explorer, the installation stops and you are required to install the appropriate software before proceeding with the EBI software installation.

Back up custom displays if they are not stored C:\ Honeywell\client\abstract.

If you are also upgrading Quick Builder, back up the projects. (Typically stored C:\Honeywell\client\ qckbld.) If required, install/upgrade Microsoft Excel.

page 142

Upgrade Station and the displays Upgrade Station and the displays (and, if required other EBI client applications).

page 377

117

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

If Station and other EBI client applications are installed on the Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, or Windows 7 operating system, add the required user accounts to the Honeywell Station Users group.

page 234

Migrate client application data Restore the backed up custom displays to C:\ Program Files\Honeywell\client\abstract.

Reapply any customizations to system displays. For details, see the “Configuring Stations and printers” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to the menus. For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide Reapply any customizations to Station’s toolbars For details, see the “Customizing toolbars, menus and keyboard shortcuts” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s configuration file, station.ini. For details, see the “Station.ini” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reapply any customizations to Station’s setup file, default.stn. For details, see the “Station setup files” section in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Reset any watchdog timers. For details, see the “Monitoring the activity of a task” section in the Application Development Guide. Migrate HMIWeb displays and shapes.

page 386

Migrate Station-level scripts.

page 387

If you upgraded Quick Builder, migrate Quick Builder projects.

page 388

Upload new location information to the Quick Builder Projects database.

page 389

Stop You have completed all tasks.

118

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: EBI CLIENT APPLICATIONS OTHER THAN STATION

Upgrade checklist: EBI client applications other than Station This is the top-level checklist for upgrading EBI client applications (other than Station) on a client computer. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the upgrade process.

Prerequisites •

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The computer meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

Disable any anti-virus programs while upgrading EBI.

Upgrade Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Done?

Preparatory tasks Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best Practices product bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan.

page 341

Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the computer complies with hardware and software requirements If you are upgrading Quick Builder, back up the projects. (Typically stored in C:\Honeywell\client\qckbld.) Upgrade EBI client applications Upgrade the EBI client applications.

page 377

Migrate client application data If you upgraded Quick Builder, migrate Quick Builder projects.

page 388

Upload new location information to the Quick Builder Projects database.

page 389

119

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Stop You have completed all tasks.

120

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: REMOTE POINT SERVER ON EXISTING COMPUTER

Upgrade checklist: Remote point server on existing computer This is the top-level checklist for upgrading a remote point server on an existing computer. Attention If you are upgrading point servers that are installed from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, see the SRB for your point server for instructions on how to upgrade the point server.The SRBs are available on the auxiliary DVD. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the upgrade process.

Prerequisites •

You have upgraded EBI.

•

You have filled in the System Design form (page 19).

•

The computer meets the hardware and software requirements.

•

The EBI DVD.

•

The EBI license.

•

Disable any anti-virus programs.

Upgrade Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best Practices product bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan.

page 341

Done?

Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the computer complies with hardware and software requirements. If you are upgrading a LonWorks point server, check that page 402 the name of the LNS database complies with the new rules. Upgrade the point server components on the remote computer.

page 375

If you have a LonWorks point server and have customized page 406 the XML templates, reapply the customizations.

121

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Stop You have completed all tasks.

122

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADE CHECKLIST: REMOTE POINT SERVER ON NEW COMPUTER AND/OR OPERATING SYSTEM

Upgrade checklist: Remote point server on new computer and/or operating system This is the top-level checklist for upgrading a remote point server, as well as moving it to a new computer and/or Windows operating system. For example, your existing point server runs on Windows NT, but you want your upgraded point server to run on Windows 7. Attention If you are upgrading point servers that are installed from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, see the SRB for your point server for instructions on how to upgrade the point server.The SRBs are available on the auxiliary DVD. Attention Make a photocopy of this checklist so that it is easier to keep track of where you are in the upgrade process.

Prerequisites •

You have upgraded EBI.

•

The server meets the hardware and software requirements

•

If you are installing a LonWorks point server, a qualified LonWorks Network Interface. (See the LonWorks Interface Reference.)

•

You have read the Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin, located on the EBI DVD.

•

You have filled in the System Design form (page 19).

•

The EBI DVD.

•

The EBI license.

•

The Windows CDs and Certificate of Authenticity if you are moving to a new operating system on the exiting computer.

•

Disable any anti-virus programs.

Upgrade Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Create a plan for the upgrade. Use the Upgrading Best Practices product bulletin (available from the HBS Product Technical Support Global Website) and the planning information in this guide to create a plan.

page 341

Done?

123

3 – UPGRADE CHECKLISTS

Task

Go to:

Check the EBI compatibility matrix and verify the server complies with hardware and software requirements If you are moving the point server to a new computer, update the hosts file on the new computer.

page 139

Stop the point server on your existing computer. Run the PrepareDataForUpgrade utility on your existing computer.

page 383

If you are upgrading a LonWorks point server, back up the LonWorks point server data from the existing computer.

page 403

If you are upgrading EXCEL 5000 Direct, back up the EXCEL 5000 Direct data from the existing computer.

page 408

If you are moving to a new Windows operating system on your existing computer, install it. Upgrade the point server components on the new/ upgraded computer.

page 373

If you are upgrading a LonWorks point server, restore the page 404 backed up LonWorks point server data. If you have a LonWorks points server and have customized the XML templates, reapply the customizations.

page 406

If you are upgrading an EXCEL 5000 Direct and have CBusses, install and configure them. If you are upgrading an EXCEL 5000 Direct Dial-up, install and configure the modems. If you are upgrading an EXCEL 5000 Direct point server, page 409 restore the backed up EXCEL 5000 Direct data.

Stop You have completed all tasks.

124

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

Preparing the server

4

This section describes how to prepare a server, which you must do before you can install EBI. Attention Only complete a task in this section if you are instructed to do so by the appropriate checklist.

125

4 – PREPARING THE SERVER

Defining the basic server properties This section describes how to define the server’s basic properties, such as its name and IP address. Prerequisites •

System Design form

If you have:

Go to:

Windows Server 2008

page 127

Windows 7

page 129

Windows Server 2003

page 131

Windows XP

page 134

Related topics “System Design form” on page 15 “Starting the Licensing Service” on page 136

126

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

DEFINING THE BASIC SERVER PROPERTIES

Defining the basic server properties in Windows Server 2008 To define the properties 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows administrator.

2

Choose Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center.

3

Click Manage Network Connections.

4

Right-click Local Area Connection and choose Properties.

5

Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) check box and then click the Properties button.

6

Click Use the Following IP Address.

7

Type the TCP/IP settings on the General tab, as specified in the System Design form.

8

Click Advanced, navigate to the appropriate tab and type the WINS and DNS information, as specified in the System Design form.

9

Click OK to close the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog box.

10 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box. 11 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box. 12 Choose Start > Control Panel > System Maintenance > System. 13 Under Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings, click the

Change settings. The System Properties dialog box opens. 14 On the Computer Name tab click Change.

The Computer Name Changes dialog box opens. 15 Type the computer name, as specified in the System Design form. 16 If the server is part of a domain, under Member of click Domain and then type

the domain name, as specified in the System Design form. 17 If prompted, type the user name and password of the domain administrator,

and then click OK. The computer registers with the Domain. This may take several seconds. 18 Click OK to close the Computer Name Changes dialog box. 19 Click OK to close the System Properties dialog box. 20 Choose Start > Control Panel > Clock, Language, and Region. 21 Click Regional and Language Options. 22 Click the Administrative tab.

127

4 – PREPARING THE SERVER

23 Click Change system locale. 24 From the Current system locale list, click the appropriate locale for your

region and click OK. 25 Click OK to close the Regional and Language Options. 26 Choose Start > Administrative Tools > Computer Management. 27 In the left pane, navigate to the \Local Users and Groups\Users folder. 28 Right-click Administrator and choose Set Password.

A warning message appears, informing you of the dangers of changing the password. 29 Click Proceed to change the password. 30 Type the password, as specified in the System Design form, and then click

OK. 31 Close the Computer Management window. 32 Choose Start > Control Panel > Clock, Language, and Region. 33 Click the Date and Time. 34 Click Change time zone. 35 From the Time zone list, click the time zone for your region. If you want the

time to automatically adjust for daylight savings, select the Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings changes check box. 36 Click OK to close the Time Zone Settings dialog box. 37 Click OK to close the Date and Time dialog box. 38 Open Windows Explorer and the right-click drive on which you are installing

EBI and choose Properties. 39 Click the General tab and ensure that the Compress drive to save disk space

check box is cleared. EBI and Microsoft SQL server cannot be installed onto a compressed hard drive. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “System Design form” on page 15 “Starting the Licensing Service” on page 136

128

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

DEFINING THE BASIC SERVER PROPERTIES

Defining the basic server properties in Windows 7 To define the properties 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows administrator.

2

Choose Start > Control Panel.

3

Under Network and Internet, click View network status and tasks.

4

In the left pane click Change adapter settings.

5

Right-click Local Area Connection and choose Properties.

6

Click the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IP) and then click Properties.

7

Click Use the Following IP Address.

8

Type the TCP/IP settings on the General tab, as specified in the System Design form.

9

Click Advanced and type the WINS and DNS information, as specified in the System Design form.

10 Click OK to close the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog box. 11 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box. 12 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box. 13 Choose Start > Control Panel and click System Security. 14 Under System click See the name of this computer. 15 Under Computer name, domain and workgroup settings, click Change

settings. 16 On the Computer Name tab click Change. 17 Type the computer name, as specified in the System Design form. 18 If the server is part of a domain, under Member of, click the Domain option

button and then type the domain name, as specified in the System Design form. 19 If prompted, type the user name and password of the domain administrator,

and then click OK. The computer registers with the Domain. This may take several seconds. 20 Click OK to close the Computer Name Changes dialog box. 21 Click OK to close the System Properties dialog box. 22 Choose Start > Control Panel and click Clock, Language, and Region. 23 Under Region and Language, click Change location.

The Region and Language dialog box opens.

129

4 – PREPARING THE SERVER

24 Click the Administrative tab and click Change system locale. 25 From the Current system locale list, click the appropriate locale for your

region and click OK. 26 Click OK to close the Region and Language dialog box. 27 Choose Start, right-click Computer and choose Manage.

The Computer Management console opens. 28 In the left pane, choose Local Users and Groups > Users. 29 Right-click Administrator and choose Set Password.

A warning message appears, informing you of the dangers of changing the password. 30 Click Proceed to change the password. 31 Type the password, as specified in the System Design form, and then click

OK. 32 Close the Computer Management window. 33 Choose Start > Control Panel and click Clock, Language, and Region. 34 Under Date and Time, click Change the time zone.

The Date and Time dialog box opens. 35 Click Change time zone. 36 From the Time Zone list and click the time zone for your region. 37 If you want the time to automatically adjust for daylight savings, select the

Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings changes check box and click OK. 38 Click OK to close the dialog box. 39 Open Windows Explorer and right-click the drive on which you are installing

EBI and choose Properties. 40 Click the General tab and ensure that the Compress drive to save disk space

check box is cleared. EBI and Microsoft SQL server cannot be installed onto a compressed hard drive. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “System Design form” on page 15

130

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

DEFINING THE BASIC SERVER PROPERTIES

Defining the basic server properties in Windows Server 2003 To define the properties 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows administrator.

2

In Windows Control Panel, open Network Connections.

3

Right-click Local Area Connection and choose Properties.

4

Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) check box and then click the Properties button.

5

Click Use the Following IP Address.

6

Type the TCP/IP settings on the General tab, as specified in the System Design form.

7

Click Advanced, navigate to the appropriate tab and type the WINS and DNS information, as specified in the System Design form.

8

Click OK to close the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog box.

9

Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box.

10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box. 11 Click Back (on the window’s toolbar). 12 Double-click the System icon to open the System Properties dialog box. 13 Click the Computer Name tab. 14 Click Change to open the Computer Name Changes dialog box. 15 Type the computer name, as specified in the System Design form. 16 If the server is part of a domain, click Change: a. Select the Domain option and then type the domain name, as specified in

the System Design form. b. If prompted, type the user name and password of the domain

administrator, and then click OK. The computer registers with the Domain. This may take several seconds. c. Click OK to close the Computer Name Changes dialog box. 17 Click OK to close the System Properties dialog box. 18 Double-click the Regional and Language Options icon. 19 Click the Advanced tab. 20 Under Language for non-Unicode programs, select the appropriate locale

for your region. 21 Click OK to close the dialog box.

131

4 – PREPARING THE SERVER

22 Double-click the Administrative Tools icon. 23 Double-click Computer Management to open the Computer Management

dialog box. 24 In the left pane, navigate to the \Local Users and Groups\Users folder. 25 Right-click Administrator and choose Set Password.

A warning message appears, informing you of the dangers of changing the password. 26 Click Proceed to change the password. 27 Type the password, as specified in the System Design form, and then click

OK. 28 Close the Computer Management window. 29 In the Administrative Tools window, click Back (on the window’s toolbar) to

return to Windows Control Panel. 30 Double-click the Date and Time icon. 31 Click the Time Zone tab and select the time zone for your region. 32 If you want the time to automatically adjust for daylight savings, select the

Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings changes check box. 33 Click OK to close the dialog box. 34 Double-click the Licensing icon to open the Licensing dialog box. 35 Select the Per Server option and then click Add Licenses to open the Choose

Licensing Mode dialog box. (If a “licensing logging service is not started” message appears, you must start the service before you can proceed to the next step.) 36 Type the number of connections, as specified in the System Design form, and

then click OK. 37 Click OK to close the Licensing dialog box. 38 Open Windows Explorer and right-click the drive on which you are installing

EBI and choose Properties. 39 Click the General tab and ensure that the Compress drive to save disk space

check box is cleared. EBI and Microsoft SQL server cannot be installed onto a compressed hard drive. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

132

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

DEFINING THE BASIC SERVER PROPERTIES

Related topics “System Design form” on page 15

133

4 – PREPARING THE SERVER

Defining the basic server properties in Windows XP Professional To define the properties 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows administrator.

2

In Windows Control Panel, open Network Connections.

3

Right-click Local Area Connection and choose Properties.

4

Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) check box and then click the Properties button.

5

Click Use the Following IP Address.

6

Type the TCP/IP settings on the General tab, as specified in the System Design form.

7

Click Advanced and type the WINS and DNS information, as specified in the System Design form.

8

Click OK to close the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog box.

9

Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box.

10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box. 11 Click Back (on the window’s toolbar). 12 Double-click the System icon to open the System Properties dialog box. 13 Click the Computer Name tab. 14 Click Change to open the Computer Name Changes dialog box. 15 Type the computer name, as specified in the System Design form. 16 If the server is part of a domain: a. Select the Domain option and then type the domain name, as specified in

the System Design form. b. If prompted, type the user name and password of the domain

administrator, and then click OK. The computer registers with the Domain. This may take several seconds. c. Click OK to close the Computer Name Changes dialog box. 17 Click OK to close the System Properties dialog box. 18 Double-click the Regional and Language Options icon. 19 Click the Advanced tab. 20 Under Language for non-Unicode program, select the appropriate locale for

your region. 21 Click OK to close the dialog box.

134

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

DEFINING THE BASIC SERVER PROPERTIES

22 Double-click the Administrative Tools icon. 23 Double-click Computer Management to open the Computer Management

dialog box. 24 In the left pane, choose Local Users and Groups > Users. 25 Right-click Administrator and choose Set Password.

A warning message appears, informing you of the dangers of changing the password. 26 Click Proceed to change the password. 27 Type the password, as specified in the System Design form, and then click

OK. 28 Close the Computer Management window. 29 Double-click the Date and Time icon. 30 Click the Time Zone tab and select the time zone for your region. 31 If you want the time to automatically adjust for daylight savings, select the

Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings changes check box. 32 Click OK to close the dialog box. 33 Open Windows Explorer and right-click the drive on which you are installing

EBI and choose Properties. 34 Click the General tab and ensure that the Compress drive to save disk space

check box is cleared. EBI and Microsoft SQL server cannot be installed onto a compressed hard drive. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “System Design form” on page 15

135

4 – PREPARING THE SERVER

Starting the Licensing Service If a “licensing logging service” appears, you must start the service before you can add licenses. To start the service 1

In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools.

2

Double-click the Services icon.

3

Click the Extended tab at the bottom of the window.

4

Click the License Logging service and then click Start on the left-hand panel.

5

Close the Services window.

Related topics “Defining the basic server properties in Windows Server 2008” on page 127

136

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY (MONITOR)

Configuring the display (monitor) You must configure the display (monitor) so that it suitable for use by Station. In general, setup automatically detects your display adapter and installs the correct drivers. However, if setup doesn’t detect the display adapter (that is, only a VGA adapter is detected), you must manually install the display adapter drivers in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Attention Do not use a CPU-intensive, or graphics-intensive, screen saver as its CPU requirements may degrade EBI’s performance.

To configure display in Windows Server 2008 or Windows 7 1

Choose Start > Control Panel > Adjust screen resolution.

2

Move the Resolution slider so that the resolution is 1280x1024 or higher.

3

From the Colors list, click Highest (32-bit).

4

Click Advanced and then click the Monitor tab and set the Screen Refresh Rate to the highest rate that the display can handle.

5

Click Apply to apply the changes to your screen, click Apply again and then OK to display a sample screen.

6

If the sample screen displays correctly, click Yes to keep the settings. If it doesn’t, adjust the Refresh Frequency, Colors or Screen Area to correct the problem.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

To configure the display in windows Server 2003 or Windows XP Professional 1

In Windows Control Panel, open Display. The Display Properties dialog box appears. If the Display icon is not displayed, switch to Classic view.

2

Click the Settings tab and set the Color Quality to Highest (32-bit) and the Screen resolution to the standard EBI value (1280x1024) or higher.

3

Click Advanced and then click the Monitor tab and set the Screen Refresh Rate to the highest rate that the display can handle.

4

Click Apply to apply the changes to your screen, click Apply again and then OK to display a sample screen.

137

4 – PREPARING THE SERVER

138

5

If the sample screen displays correctly, click Yes to keep the settings. If it doesn’t, adjust the Refresh Frequency, Colors or Screen Area to correct the problem.

6

Click the Appearance tab and select Normal as the Font Size.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPDATING THE SERVER’S HOSTS FILE

Updating the server’s hosts file You must identify each communications link in the hosts file on each server. The hosts file is in %SystemRoot%\system32\drivers\etc\, where %SystemRoot% is normally c:\windows. Use a text editing tool such as Notepad to update the file. The following examples show typical system configurations, and the required entries. Single EBI server, single-network system You do not need to edit the hosts file. Redundant EBI server, single-network system

Server A hsserva

Server B hsservb

Network Assume the addresses are: •

192.168.0.1

for hsserva

•

192.168.0.2

for hsservb

The hosts file on both servers would therefore include the following: 127.0.0.1 localhost 192.168.0.1 hsserva hsserva0 192.168.0.2 hsservb hsservb0

139

4 – PREPARING THE SERVER

Distributed EBI servers, non-redundant system

Server dsserv

Server hsserv

Assume that the address is 192.168.0.1 for hsserv, and 192.168.0.2 for dsserv.

The hosts file on dsserv would therefore include the following: 127.0.0.1 localhost 192.168.0.1 hsserv hsserv

would contain corresponding entries in its hosts file.

Distributed EBI servers, redundant system

Server dsserv

Primary Server hsserva

140

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Backup Server hsservb

UPDATING THE SERVER’S HOSTS FILE

Assume that the addresses for the redundant servers are: •

192.168.0.1

for hsserva

•

192.168.0.2

for hsservb

The hosts file on dsserv would therefore include the following: 127.0.0.1 localhost 192.168.0.1 hsserva hsserva0 192.168.0.2 hsservb hsservb0 hsserva

and hsservb would contain corresponding entries in their hosts files.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

141

4 – PREPARING THE SERVER

Installing Microsoft Excel Microsoft Excel is required if you want to capture real-time point value and history information from EBI and display the data in an Excel spreadsheet. This section describes how to install and configure Microsoft Excel. If you install Microsoft Excel on a remote computer (that is, a computer other than the server), it uses the full name of the primary server when requesting information from the server. Prerequisites •

Microsoft Office or Microsoft Excel CD.

•

You must be logged on as a Windows administrator.

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Install Microsoft Excel.

page 143

Install the Microsoft Office Service Pack.

page 144

Configure Microsoft Excel.

page 145

Done?

Related topics “Specifying the server name in Data Access applications” on page 246

142

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING MICROSOFT EXCEL

Installing Microsoft Excel To install/upgrade Microsoft Excel 1

Insert the Microsoft Office or Microsoft Excel CD into the CD-ROM drive.

2

In Windows Explorer, browse to the CD and double-click setup.exe.

3

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.

4

Restart the computer.

Related topics “Installing the Microsoft Office Service Pack” on page 144 “Configuring Microsoft Excel” on page 145

143

4 – PREPARING THE SERVER

Installing the Microsoft Office Service Pack Prerequisites •

Latest Microsoft Office service pack for your version of Microsoft Office or Microsoft Excel. You can download the appropriate service pack(s) from the following location: http://office.microsoft.com/Downloads/default.aspx, or you can order a CD from Microsoft containing these updates.

•

Microsoft Office or Microsoft Excel CD.

To install the Microsoft Office service pack

144

1

Close any applications that are running.

2

In Windows Explorer, browse to the folder containing the Microsoft Office service pack, and double-click on the setup application file, such as Office2003SP2*.exe.

3

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.

4

Restart the computer.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING MICROSOFT EXCEL

Configuring Microsoft Excel After installing Microsoft Excel, you need to change the default macro security setting. By default, the macro security level is High and needs to be changed to Medium for successful installation of Microsoft Excel Data Exchange components. To change the macro security settings for Microsoft Excel 2003 1

Start Microsoft Excel.

2

Choose Tools > Macro > Security to display the Security dialog box.

3

Click Medium and click OK.

4

Close Microsoft Excel.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

To change the macro security settings for Microsoft Excel 2007 1

Start Microsoft Excel 2007.

2

Click the Office button and click Excel Options.

3

In the left pane click Trust Center, then click Trust Center Settings. The Trust Center dialog box opens.

4

Under Macro Settings click Disable all macros with notification.

5

Click OK to close the Trust Center dialog box.

6

Click OK to close Excel Options.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “Installing Microsoft Excel” on page 143

145

4 – PREPARING THE SERVER

Protecting your EBI system against viruses You must install antivirus software on your EBI system. The compatibility matrix lists the recommend antivirus software and the version recommended for use with EBI. Because virus signatures are changing constantly, hot fixes and patches are released frequently to combat system vulnerabilities and new viruses as they are identified. Ensure that the signature files are updated regularly. To avoid degradation of system performance you can exclude the Program Files\Honeywell\Server\Data folder from virus scanning. Before you exclude any folders from virus scanning, ensure that only authorized accounts have write access to the folder. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

146

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING THE WINDOWS FIREWALL

Configuring the Windows Firewall The EBI installation wizard automatically configures the inbuilt Windows firewall as required by EBI. If you have any special firewall settings, for example, another application requires special firewall settings, you can manually adjust the configuration by double-clicking the Windows Firewall icon in Windows Control Panel.

147

4 – PREPARING THE SERVER

148

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Installing specialized hardware on the server

5

This section describes how to install and configure specialized hardware on a server. Attention Only complete a task in this section if you are instructed to do so by the appropriate checklist.

Related topics “Installing a Network Interface card” on page 150 “Changing the Network Adapter settings” on page 150 “Installing the Microsoft Loopback adapter” on page 151 “Installing a serial adapter” on page 153 “Installing a Digiboard” on page 156 “Installing a Stallion EasyConnection” on page 154 “Installing a LonWorks Network Interface” on page 157

149

5 – INSTALLING SPECIALIZED HARDWARE ON THE SERVER

Installing a Network Interface card This section describes how to install a network interface card (network adapter) and driver. Install the network interface card in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, and then install the appropriate driver as described here. If you do not install a network interface card, you must install the Microsoft Loopback adapter driver, regardless of the connection status. For details, see “Installing the Microsoft Loopback adapter”. If you have problems, see the section on “Network interface cards (network adapters)”. ESD Hazard Ensure that you are properly grounded when installing any hardware in a computer. It is recommended that you use an antistatic wrist strap. Alternatively, frequently touch metal parts on the computer to prevent the buildup of static electricity.

Prerequisites •

The network interface card is qualified for use with EBI.

•

The diskette or CD supplied with the network interface card.

Changing the Network Adapter settings To change the configuration 1

Choose Start > Settings > Network Connections.

2

Select the connection, right-click and choose Properties.

3

Make the required changes.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “Installing the Microsoft Loopback adapter” on page 151 “Network interface cards (network adapters)” on page 426

150

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING A NETWORK INTERFACE CARD

Installing the Microsoft Loopback adapter If the computer does not have a network interface card (network adapter) and you do not install one, you must install the Microsoft Loopback adapter driver. To install the Microsoft Loopback adapter on Windows Server 2008 or Windows 7 1

Choose Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound.

2

Click Device Manager. Device Manager opens.

3

Choose Action > Add legacy hardware. Tip

If the Add legacy hardware option is not visible, click on any device and then return to the Action menu.

4

When the Add Hardware wizard starts, click Next to continue.

5

Click Install the hardware that I manual select from a list and click Next.

6

In the Common hardware types list, click Network adapters and click Next.

7

In the Manufacturers list, click Microsoft, and in the Network Adapter list, click Microsoft Loopback Adapter and click Next.

8

Click Next to start the hardware installation.

9

Click Finish.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

To install the Microsoft Loopback adapter on Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP 1

In Windows Control Panel, open Add Hardware.

2

When the Add Hardware wizard starts, click Next to continue.

3

Click Yes, I have already connected the hardware and click Next. The wizard will locate and list all the plug and play hardware devices.

4

From the list of devices, select Add a new hardware device and click Next.

5

Click Install the hardware that I manually select from a list and click Next.

6

In the Common Hardware Types list, click Network adapters and click Next.

7

In the Manufacturers list, click Microsoft, and in the Network Adapter list, click Microsoft Loopback Adapter and click Next.

151

5 – INSTALLING SPECIALIZED HARDWARE ON THE SERVER

152

8

Click Next to start the hardware installation.

9

Click Finish.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING A SERIAL ADAPTER

Installing a serial adapter Prerequisites •

The serial adapter is qualified for use with EBI.

To install a:

Go to:

Stallion EasyConnection

page 154

Digiboard

page 156

153

5 – INSTALLING SPECIALIZED HARDWARE ON THE SERVER

Installing a Stallion EasyConnection ESD Hazard Ensure that you are properly earthed when installing any hardware in a computer. Honeywell recommends that you use an antistatic wrist strap. Alternatively, frequently touch metal parts on the computer to prevent the buildup of static electricity.

The Stallion EasyConnection serial adapter can connect RS-232, RS-422 and RS485 devices. The following figure shows a typical configuration. •

For details about connecting controllers to the adapter, see “Cabling for Stallion EasyConnection” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

Server

Stallion Adapter RS-485

Controller

Controller

Controller

Prerequisites •

Stallion EasyConnection adapter.

•

Diskette, or CD, supplied with the adapter.

To install a Stallion EasyConnection and configure its driver on Windows Server 2008 or Windows 7 1

Install the adapter in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, using the default DIP switch settings.

2

Choose Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound.

3

Click Device Manager. Device Manager opens.

4

Choose Action > Add legacy hardware. Tip

154

If the Add legacy hardware option is not visible, click on any device and then return to the Action menu.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING A SERIAL ADAPTER

5

When the Add Hardware wizard starts, click Next to continue.

6

Click Install the hardware that I manually select from a list and click Next.

7

In the Common hardware types list click Show All devices and click Next.

8

Click Have Disk to install the Stallion EasyConnection driver from the Stallion diskette.

9

Browse to \i386 on the diskette, or %windir%\i386 on the CD, and then follow the instructions.

To install a Stallion EasyConnection and configure its driver on Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP 1

Install the adapter in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, using the default DIP switch settings.

2

In Windows Control Panel, open Add Hardware.

3

When the Add Hardware wizard starts, click Next to continue.

4

Click Yes, I have already connected the hardware and click Next. The wizard will locate and list all the plug and play hardware devices.

5

From the list of devices, click Add a new hardware device and click Next.

6

Click Install the hardware that I manually select from a list and click Next.

7

Click Show all devices in the Common Hardware Types list and click Next.

8

Click Have Disk to install the Stallion EasyConnection driver from the Stallion diskette.

9

Browse to \i386 on the diskette, or %windir%\i386 on the CD, and then follow the instructions.

155

5 – INSTALLING SPECIALIZED HARDWARE ON THE SERVER

Installing a Digiboard ESD Hazard Ensure that you are properly earthed when installing any hardware in a computer. It is recommended that you use an antistatic wrist strap. Alternatively, frequently touch metal parts on the computer to prevent the buildup of static electricity.

Install the card in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The card is automatically detected by Windows. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

156

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING A LONWORKS NETWORK INTERFACE

Installing a LonWorks Network Interface This section describes how to install a LonWorks Network Interface card and driver. The LonWorks Network Interface card is used by a LonWorks point server to communicate with field devices. If you have a redundant server system, the point server (and therefore the adapter) must be installed on a separate computer. See “Installing point server components on a remote server”. If you are using both the LonWorks and EIRIS point servers, they must be on separate computers (and therefore require separate adapters). Caution Do not install the LonWorks Network Interface card in the computer before installing the driver. It is essential that you install the driver before installing the card, as described in the following procedure.

Prerequisites •

An adapter that is qualified for use with the point server. See the LonWorks Interface Reference.

•

The EBI DVD.

•

You must be logged on as a Windows administrator.

To install the adapter 1

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive.

2

In Windows Explorer, browse to the ThirdParty\LNS\Drivers\adapter folder on the DVD, where adapter is the adapter type you are installing.

3

Double-click setup.exe and follow the setup instructions.

4

Shut down the computer.

5

Install the adapter in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

6

Restart the computer.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

157

5 – INSTALLING SPECIALIZED HARDWARE ON THE SERVER

Related topics “Installing point server components on a remote server” on page 257

158

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Installing EBI on the server

6

This section describes how to install EBI and associated components on the server. Attention Only complete a task in this section if you are instructed to do so by the appropriate checklist.

159

6 – INSTALLING EBI ON THE SERVER

Installing the EBI components on the server This section describes how to install the EBI components on the server. The EBI installation wizard checks that the correct applications, versions and service packs of Windows and supporting applications have been installed. If there is a problem: •

The wizard may continue with the installation, in which case you must correct the problem after installation.

•

The wizard may immediately exit, in which case you must correct the problem before restarting it.

You can also install EBI client applications, such as Station and Quick Builder, as part of the installation. It is recommended that you close all other applications before starting. If you are installing EBI onto the VMware ESX or ESXi platform, you need to use VNC or RADMIN; installing EBI using remote desktop fails. If you have problems, see the topic “EBI server installation problems”. There are two types of server installation available: •

A Typical installation on the EBI server installs all EBI components available with the license. All settings are automatically configured and they may be changed after install using the EBI Configuration Panel. For more information about the Configuration Panel, see “Configuration Panel” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

•

A Custom installation allows you to select from a set of available options for a particular installation. This is useful for systems that may run over several computers, or if a large amount of data means that archive directories are stored on separate drives. Components, directories and configurable options, such as paper size and fast history rate, can be set as part of a Custom install.

Related topics “EBI server installation problems” on page 422 “Typical installation of the EBI components on the server” on page 161 “Custom installation of the EBI components on the server” on page 163

Recommended disk partitioning For optimal performance, it is recommended that you store key components on separate hard drives or partitions.

160

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING THE EBI COMPONENTS ON THE SERVER

For performance systems it is recommended that the EBI server software partition be located on a separate hard drive and using a separate disk controller from the operating system. To follow these recommendations, you should choose the Custom installation type. Hard drive/ Partition

Component

Minimum capacity

C:

Windows operating system, Microsoft Service Packs, and Updates

20 GB

D:

Page File

10 GB

E:

Microsoft SQL Server

30 GB

F:

EBI Server software

80 GB

G:

(Optional) Storage of video and/or data files

As required

Attention For detailed information on system requirements, disk partitioning and performance levels see the EBI R410 Compatibility Matrix.

Typical installation of the EBI components on the server Prerequisites •

The EBI DVD

•

The System Design form

•

If you are installing EBI onto the VMware ESX or ESXi platform you have VNC or Radmin

To perform a Typical installation of EBI components on the server 1

Log on to the computer as Windows administrator.

2

Disable any real-time virus protection applications, such as Norton AntiVirus. Such an application may interfere with DVD detection during the installation procedure.

3

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically displays. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

161

6 – INSTALLING EBI ON THE SERVER

4

Click Installation. Your system is checked for certain software that is required by the EBI installation wizard. If prompted, install the prerequisite software and if required, reboot the computer. If you have to reboot the computer, when the computer is restarted doubleclick the setup.exe file to return to the wizard. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 page appears.

5

Click Next to continue. The Setup Type page appears.

6

Click Enterprise Buildings Integrator server setup.

7

The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any Critical Issues must be resolved before installation can proceed. Click Next to continue.

8

Type in the System number and the Authorization number, as specified in your EBI license.

9

Click Next to continue.

10 Click Typical Install to install all components available with the license. 11 Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell.

If you want to change the base installation directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next. If you are installing redundant servers, you must install the server software in the same location on both server computers. 12 Select one or more point server types you want to install and click Next.

Tip

Point servers that are not included in your license appear “grayed out”.

13 Type a valid password for the Windows mngr account in the Password box, as

specified in the System Design form. Confirm the password by typing it again in the Confirm Password box and then click Next. Note that the password must meet your IT security policy password requirements. If the password does not meet these requirements, the installation cannot proceed. 14 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Install to start installing

the EBI server and client applications. 15 When the installation is complete, click Finish. You will be prompted to

restart your computer. Click Yes to restart.

162

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING THE EBI COMPONENTS ON THE SERVER

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Custom installation of the EBI components on the server Prerequisites •

The EBI DVD

•

The System Design form

•

If you are installing EBI onto the VMware ESX or ESXi platform you have VNC or Radmin

To perform a Custom installation of EBI components on the server 1

Log on to the computer as Windows administrator.

2

Disable any real-time virus protection applications, such as Norton AntiVirus. (Such an application may interfere with DVD detection during the installation procedure.)

3

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically displays. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

4

Click Installation. Your system is checked for certain software that is required by the EBI installation wizard. If prompted, install the prerequisite software and if required, reboot the computer. If you have to reboot the computer, when the computer is restarted doubleclick the setup.exe file to return to the wizard. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 page appears.

5

Click Next to continue.

6

Click Enterprise Buildings Integrator server setup in the Setup Type page. The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any Critical Issues must be resolved before installation can proceed. Click Next to continue.

7

Type in the System number and the Authorization number, as specified in your EBI license.

163

6 – INSTALLING EBI ON THE SERVER

8

Click Next to continue.

9

Select Custom as the type of installation.

10 Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell.

If you want to change the base installation directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next. If you are installing redundant servers, you must install the server software in the same location on both server computers. 11 Select one or more point server types you want to install and click Next.

Tip

Point servers that are not included in your license appear “grayed out”.

12 Select the Custom Installation Server options you want to install, and then

click Next. 13 Type the password for the Windows mngr account in the Password box, as

specified in the System Design form. Confirm the password by typing it again in the Confirm Password box and then click Next. 14 Click Next to accept the following default archive folders. C:\Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\archive C:\Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\RestoredArchives C:\Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\evtarch. If you want to change these directories, click the Browse buttons to locate the directories for History Archive, Restore Archive or Events Archive, click OK, and then click Next.

15 Click Next to accept the following default directory for third-party software

installation. Third-party software includes Microsoft SQL Server and LonWorks software. The default location for Microsoft SQL Server is C:\Program Files\ Microsoft SQL Server. The default location for LonWorks software is c:\ LonWorks. If you want to change this directory, click the Browse buttons to locate the directory for third-party software installation, click OK, and then click Next. 16 If you chose to install MEDE, click Yes in the MEDE Choice page if you

want to allow Microsoft Excel Data Exchange to write to the EBI database. Click Next to continue. 17 If you chose to install Web Toolkit, click Yes in the Web Toolkit Choice page

if you want to allow Web Toolkit to write to the EBI database. Click Next to continue.

164

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING THE EBI COMPONENTS ON THE SERVER

18 If the license allows Station UL listing, the Station Choice page appears.

Click Yes if the station is to be used as the primary monitoring or control point for a UL Listed Fire, Security or Smoke Control System. 19 If you are licensed for the Pharma option: a. Click Yes to allow you to disable Electronic Signatures on individual

locations. Otherwise, click No to have Electronic Signatures on all locations. b. Click Next to continue. 20 The Choose Number of Group Control Stations page appears. Group

Control enables operators to perform a defined set of actions on up to 30 points with a single push button. Type in the number of Stations to be configured for Group Control and click Next. 21 Click the paper size used by your report printer, either Letter or A4, and then

click Next. 22 Select the server Fast History Rate, as specified in the System Design form,

and then click Next. 23 The Server Shortcut Folder page appears. As a minimum, shortcuts will be

created in the Start menu for Start-Stop EBI Server, Station, Diagnostics Framework, HMIWeb Display Builder, and Quick Builder. a. Select Install Quick Launch Shortcuts to have shortcuts also created as

icons on the Quick Launch bar. b. Select Install Desktop Shortcuts to have shortcuts also created on the

desktop. c. Click Next to continue. 24 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Install to start installing

the EBI server and client applications. 25 When the installation is complete, click Finish. You will be prompted to

restart your computer. Click Yes to restart. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “Filling in the System Design form” on page 19 “EBI server installation problems” on page 422

165

6 – INSTALLING EBI ON THE SERVER

Registering EBI servers The section describes how to register EBI servers with Honeywell. In addition to the system number and license number entered during the EBI server installation, the EBI server requires a registration code. You request the registration code after installing the EBI server. After installing the EBI server, there is a one-week grace period. During this week, an urgent alarm is raised every day, stating the number of days remaining before the end of the grace period. During this grace period, the EBI server operates normally. After this grace period, an urgent alarm is raised when the EBI server starts, stating that the EBI server will shut down in five hours. The EBI server will then shut down every five hours until the server is registered. Tasks

166

Task:

Go to:

Registering a non-redundant EBI server

page 167

Registering redundant EBI servers

page 169

Re-registering EBI server software

page 171

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

REGISTERING EBI SERVERS

Registering a non-redundant EBI server The section describes how to register a non-redundant EBI server with Honeywell. Prerequisites •

You have installed the EBI server.

•

You have Internet email access to request the registration code. Internet email access can be from any computer in your network if you can transfer files from that computer to the EBI server computer.

To register the server: 1

On the EBI server, copy the following file: \Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\RegistrationRequestFile.hrf

to the computer with Internet email access. 2

On the computer with Internet email access, start the email application and do the following: a. Create a new email message. b. In the email To address, type [email protected]. c. Attach the RegistrationRequestFile.hrf file that you copied from the

EBI server. This file must be the only attachment in the email. You must not have graphic images or backgrounds included in the email. d. Send the email message. 3

Wait for an email response from [email protected]. The email response is automated and you should receive it within 10 to 15 minutes.

4

Open the email message and save the RegistrationCode.hrc file attachment to the hard disk of the EBI server.

5

On the EBI server, start Station.

6

Change the security level to MNGR.

7

Click the Command Zone.

8

Type sysLicenceRegistration.dsp and then press ENTER to display the Server Software Registration display.

9

Click Load from file.

10 Browse to the location where you saved the RegistrationCode.hrc file

attachment, select this file, and then click Open. The registration code is displayed in the Registration code box.

167

6 – INSTALLING EBI ON THE SERVER

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

168

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

REGISTERING EBI SERVERS

Registering redundant EBI servers The section describes how to register redundant EBI servers that have been configured for redundancy. If you have installed EBI servers that are destined for redundancy, however, they have not yet been configured for redundancy, follow the steps in “Registering a non-redundant EBI server” on page 167 on each server. Attention In the following tasks, server A is referred to as the primary server and server B is referred to as the backup server.

Prerequisites •

You have installed and configured the redundant EBI servers.

•

You have Internet email access to request the registration code. Internet email access can be from any computer in your network if you can transfer files from that computer to the EBI server computer.

To register the primary server: 1

On the primary server, copy the following file: \Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\RegistrationRequestFile.hrf

to the computer with Internet email access. 2

On the computer with Internet email access, start the email application and do the following: a. Create a new email message. b. In the email To address, type [email protected]. c. Attach the RegistrationRequestFile.hrf file that you copied from the

primary server. This file must be the only attachment in the email. You must not have graphic images or backgrounds included in the email. d. Send the email message. 3

Wait for an email response from [email protected]. The email response is automated and you should receive it within 10 to 15 minutes.

4

Open the email message and save the RegistrationCode.hrc file attachment to the hard disk of the primary server.

5

On the primary server, start Station.

6

Change the security level to MNGR.

7

Click the Command Zone.

8

Type sysLicenceRegistration.dsp and then press ENTER to display the Server Software Registration display.

169

6 – INSTALLING EBI ON THE SERVER

9

Click Load from file.

10 Browse to the location where you saved the RegistrationCode.hrc file

attachment, select this file, and then click Open. The registration code is displayed in the Registration code box. To register the backup server: 1

On the backup server, copy the following file: \Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\RegistrationRequestFile.hrf

to the computer with Internet email access. 2

On the computer with Internet email access, start the email application and do the following: a. Create a new email message. b. In the email To address, type [email protected]. c. Attach the RegistrationRequestFile.hrf file that you copied from the

backup server. This file must be the only attachment in the email. You must not have graphic images or backgrounds included in the email. d. Send the email message. 3

Wait for an email response from [email protected]. The email response is automated and you should receive it within 10 to 15 minutes.

4

Open the email message and save the RegistrationCode.hrc file attachment to the following folder on the backup server: C:\Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\

5

Rename the saved attachment file from: C:\Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\RegistrationCode.hrc

to: C:\Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\regcode

6

Restart the backup server.

7

Choose Start > Run.

8

Type cmd and then click OK to open a Command Prompt window.

9

Type liclist.exe and then press ENTER. The license details for the server are displayed. The line after the system number should be The server is registered.

10 If the server is unregistered, check that you saved the RegistrationCode.hrc

attachment to the correct location and with the filename regcode.

170

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

REGISTERING EBI SERVERS

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Re-registering EBI server software The section describes how to re-register EBI server software. The automatic registration procedure for EBI software only works for an initial installation and registration. Any subsequent attempt to re-register the software will result in the HSC_Orders system returning a reply stating: Our system indicates that you have reached your registration limit and so a registration code has not been automatically generated for you.

Making certain hardware changes (such as replacing network interface cards), can result in the server failing registration checks. This will be reported as an urgent system alarm. Changes that cannot be reversed require a new registration code. The server software may require a new registration code if you make any of the following changes: •

Replace the first network interface card

•

Replace the motherboard (where the network interface card is onboard)

•

Disable the first network interface card

•

Physically change the order of the PCI cards in the server

•

Re-install the software on a new server

The server software may not require a new registration code if you: •

Undo any of these changes and restore the system to its original state

•

Reinstall the same version of the server software on the exact same server hardware

•

If you have lost your original registration code. In this case, you can request the same code again.

Prerequisites •

You have installed the EBI server.

•

You have Internet email access to request the registration code. Internet email access can be from any computer in your network if you can transfer files from that computer to the EBI server computer.

171

6 – INSTALLING EBI ON THE SERVER

To re-register the server software 1

On the EBI server, copy the following file: \Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\RegistrationRequestFile.hrf

to the computer with Internet email access. 2

On the computer with Internet email access, create a new email message and include the following: a. An explanation covering the reason that the server requires re-registering b. The RegistrationRequestFile.hrf file that you copied from the EBI

server 3

If you are a Honeywell customer, send the email to your Honeywell Account Manager. The Account Manager will contact the Technical Assistance Center (TAC) and arrange for a new registration code to be sent to you. If you are a Honeywell employee, send the email directly to your TAC. The TAC may require additional information to raise a support case for your re-registration. The TAC will then co-ordinate the issue of a new code.

4

Open the reply email message when it arrives and save the RegistrationCode.hrc file attachment to the hard disk of the EBI server.

5

On the EBI server, start Station.

6

Change the security level to MNGR.

7

Click the Command Zone.

8

Type sysLicenceRegistration.dsp and then press ENTER to display the Server Software Registration display.

9

Click Load from file.

10 Browse to the location where you saved the RegistrationCode.hrc file

attachment, select this file, and then click Open. The registration code is displayed in the Registration code box. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

172

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING AND CONFIGURING RSLINX

Installing and configuring RSLinx You only need to perform these tasks if you have controllers that communicate with the EBI server via RSLinx. Prerequisites •

The RSLinx CD and licenses key activation diskette.

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Install the RSLinx components.

page 173

Register the Electronic Datasheets (EDS)

page 173

Configure the RSLinx drivers.

page 174

Done?

Installing the RSLinx components To install RSLinx 1

Close any applications that are running.

2

Insert the RSLinx CD into the CD-ROM drive.

3

Double-click setup.exe.

4

Follow the on-page instructions to complete the installation.

5

After the installation is complete, reboot the computer.

Registering Electronic Data Sheets (EDS) To register the EDS 1

Choose Start > Programs > Rockwell Software > RSLinx Tools > EDS Hardware Installation Tool.

2

Click Add.

3

Select Register a directory of EDS files.

4

Click Browse and browse to C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\ RSCommon\Honeywell EDS, and then click OK.

5

Click Next. 173

6 – INSTALLING EBI ON THE SERVER

6

Review the Installation Test Results and click Next.

7

Click Next to accept the default icons.

8

Click Next to register the devices.

9

Click Finish to complete the wizard.

10 Click Exit.

Configuring RSLinx drivers for an Ethernet network This section describes how to configure the RSLinx drivers for an Ethernet Network. Prerequisites •

RSLinx must be activated and be in OEM mode to use the Ethernet drivers. For information about activating OEM mode, see “Moving the RSLinx activation file”.

•

The bootpdata.txt file must be located in the C:\Program Files\ Honeywell\system\bin folder. If you are upgrading to EBI R410, this file was backed up from your previous installation before the migration and must be copied to this folder before continuing this task. If you are installing a new EBI system, you need to create this file.

To configure the RSLinx drivers 1

Check the settings of the Ethernet network interface card that communicates with the controller.

2

Configure the IP address for each controller.

3

Configure the RSLinx drivers. A driver must be configured for each controller.

4

Restart the computer.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “Moving the RSLinx activation file” on page 222

174

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Installing and setting up associated applications

7

This section describes how to install and set up associated applications. Attention Only complete a task in this section if you are instructed to do so by the appropriate checklist.

175

7 – INSTALLING AND SETTING UP ASSOCIATED APPLICATIONS

Setting up Microsoft Excel reports You can set up Microsoft Excel Reports so that it accesses EBI data using either Microsoft Excel Data Exchange (MEDE) or the EBI ODBC driver. Prerequisites •

You have installed Microsoft Excel. See “Installing Microsoft Excel” on page 142.

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Do one of the following, depending how you want to access data:

page 177

• Set up Microsoft Excel Data Exchange

page 178

• Install the EBI ODBC driver If you have a network printer, configure it.

176

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

page 180

Done?

SETTING UP MICROSOFT EXCEL REPORTS

Setting up Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Setting up Microsoft Excel Data Exchange (MEDE) for use with Microsoft Excel Reports involves activating the Windows mngr account for use with MEDE. Prerequisites •

You have installed Microsoft Excel.

To set up Microsoft Excel Data Exchange 1

Log on using the Windows mngr account.

2

In Windows Explorer, browse to C:\Program Files\Honeywell\client\ xldataex folder and double-click the activatemede.vbs file.

Related topics “Installing Microsoft Excel” on page 142

177

7 – INSTALLING AND SETTING UP ASSOCIATED APPLICATIONS

Installing the EBI ODBC client In order for a client application, such as Microsoft Access, to use the EBI ODBC driver, the ODBC client must be installed on the same computer as the client application. If the client application is on the EBI server, you do not have to separately install the ODBC client because it is installed as part of the EBI installation. However, if the client application is on another computer, you must install the ODBC client on that computer. After installing the ODBC client, you have to configure the EBI ODBC driver. See “Configuring the EBI ODBC driver” in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Prerequisites •

The EBI DVD.

To install the ODBC client 1

Close any applications that are running.

2

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically displays. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

3

Click Installation. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 page appears.

4

Click Next to continue. The Setup Type page appears.

5

Click Enterprise Buildings Integrator Client Setup.

6

The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any critical issues must be resolved before installation can proceed.

7

Click Custom on the Installation Type page.

8

Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell.

If you want to change the base installation directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next. 9

Click Next to continue.

10 Select ODBC Client and click Next. (If necessary, you can also select other

applications, such as Station.) 178

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

SETTING UP MICROSOFT EXCEL REPORTS

11 Enter the EBI server name and click Next to continue. 12 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Install to start installing

the EBI client applications. 13 When the installation is complete, click Finish. You will be prompted to

restart your computer. Click Yes to restart. Related topics “Checklist: Configuring the EBI ODBC driver” on page 137

179

7 – INSTALLING AND SETTING UP ASSOCIATED APPLICATIONS

Configuring a printer If you want to print Integrated Microsoft Excel reports to a network printer, you must be logged on using the Windows mngr account when configuring that printer. (Printers configured using other accounts cannot be used because the connection to the network print queue will not always be visible to other accounts on the same computer.) Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

180

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CREATING AN ACCOUNT FOR THIRD-PARTY OPC CLIENTS

Creating an account for third-party OPC clients If you have an EBI OPC server (data and/or alarm and event), you must create a Windows account on the EBI server computer so that third-party OPC clients can connect to the server computer. (The account must be added to the Users group.) You must also configure DCOM security so that the account can access the EBI OPC server via DCOM. If the OPC client is on a remote computer, you must also set up the client computer. See “Setting up a third-party OPC client or server”. Prerequisites •

The System Design form

•

You must be logged on as a Windows administrator.

To create an account for third-party OPC clients for Windows 7 1

Choose Start, right-click Computer and choose Manage. The Computer Management console opens.

2

In the left pane, choose Local Users and Groups > Users.

3

Expand the Local Users and Groups item and then expand the Users item.

4

Choose Action > New User to display the New User dialog box.

5

Type the user name and password for the OPC Account, as specified in the System Design form.

6

It is a good idea to type an appropriate Full Name and Description, such as OPC Client.

7

Clear the User must change password at next logon check box and select Password never expires.

8

Click Create to add the account.

9

Close the Computer Management dialog box.

To create an account for third-party OPC clients for Windows Server 2008 1

Choose Start > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.

2

Expand the Local Users and Groups item and then expand the Users item.

3

Choose Action > New User to display the New User dialog box.

4

Type the user name and password for the OPC Account, as specified in the System Design form.

181

7 – INSTALLING AND SETTING UP ASSOCIATED APPLICATIONS

5

It is a good idea to type an appropriate Full Name and Description, such as OPC Client.

6

Clear the User must change password at next logon check box and select Password never expires.

7

Click Create to add the account.

8

Close the Computer Management dialog box.

To create an account for third-party OPC clients for Windows Server 2003 or XP 1

In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools.

2

Double-click Computer Management to display the Computer Management dialog box.

3

Expand the Local Users and Groups item and then expand the Users item.

4

Choose Action > New User to display the New User dialog box.

5

Type the user name and password for the OPC Account, as specified in the System Design form.

6

It is a good idea to type an appropriate Full Name and Description, such as OPC Client.

7

Clear the User must change password at next logon check box and select Password never expires.

8

Click Create to add the account.

9

Close the Computer Management dialog box.

Configuring DCOM security To configure DCOM security

182

1

Choose Start and type run to open the Run dialog box.

2

Type dcomcnfg and click OK to open the Component Services dialog box.

3

Click Component Services, then Computers, My Computer and then DCOM Config.

4

Select Honeywell OPC Server, right-click and click on Properties.

5

Click the Security tab.

6

In the Access Permissions section, select the Customize option and then click Edit.

7

Click Add to add the account you have just created.

8

Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the Launch & Activation permissions.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CREATING AN ACCOUNT FOR THIRD-PARTY OPC CLIENTS

9

Close the Component Services dialog box.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “System Design form” on page 15 “Setting up a third-party OPC client or server” on page 241

183

7 – INSTALLING AND SETTING UP ASSOCIATED APPLICATIONS

Setting up a file server A file server allows other computers to share its files over a network. EBI uses the file-sharing capabilities of the Microsoft Windows Network. EBI uses a file server to store displays and Quick Builder projects. Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Set up the folder as a shared folder.

page 185

On each computer that needs access to the shared folder, page 186 assign a drive letter. In the case of Station, specify the location of the shared folder. For details, see “Configuring Station connection properties” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

184

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

SETTING UP A FILE SERVER

Setting up a shared folder To set up a shared folder 1

Log on as a Windows administrator.

2

Start Windows Explorer and right-click the folder you want to share.

3

From the shortcut menu, choose Sharing and Security to open the property page.

4

Click Share this folder.

5

Change the Share Name if you need a different one.

6

Set the maximum number of users that can simultaneously access the folder. (See your System Administrator for an estimate of the anticipated number of users logging on at the server at any one time.)

7

Set the permissions to determine which users are able to access the shared folder. To set the permissions: a. Click Permissions and a dialog box appears. b. Click Add or Remove to set which users are able to access the folder. c. In the Permissions area, in the Allow column make sure that Read is the

only option selected. d. Click Apply, then click OK to close the dialog box. 8

Click Apply again, then click OK to share the folder and close the dialog box.

185

7 – INSTALLING AND SETTING UP ASSOCIATED APPLICATIONS

Assigning a drive letter on a client computer to a shared folder In order for a client computer to access files in a shared folder, you must assign a drive letter to the shared folder. To assign a drive letter 1

In Windows Explorer, choose Tools > Map Network Drive. The Map Network Drive dialog box opens.

2

Select an unassigned letter from the Drive list.

3

Click Browse and select the computer and the shared folder and click OK.

4

Click Finish.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

186

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

8

Connecting printers and modems to the server

This section describes how to install peripherals, such as printers and modems. To install a:

Go to:

Printer

page 188

Modem

page 196

187

8 – CONNECTING PRINTERS AND MODEMS TO THE SERVER

Installing a printer This section describes how to install a printer. If you are installing an alarm printer, such as an Epson LQ 1070+ ESC P2, the paper size is usually set to US Std Fanfold. Prerequisites •

A suitable printer.

•

You must be logged on as a Windows Administrator.

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Connect the printer to the computer as specified by the manufacturer. Install the print driver. Specify the location of the print job spool.

page 194

If this is an alarm/report printer and it is connected to a computer other than the server, create a guest account.

page 195

Configure the printer as described in the “Printers” section of the Configuration and Administration Guide.

188

page 189

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

INSTALLING A PRINTER

Installing a printer driver The procedure for installing a printer driver and setting up printers depends on the printer connection and how it is to be used. To install a printer driver for a:

Go to:

Local printer that is only used by that computer

page 189

Local printer that is used by other computers

page 190

Network-connected printer that has a suitable share name (That is, the page 190 name does not contain more than 30 characters, and does not contain any spaces.) Network-connected printer that does not have a suitable share name.

page 192

Installing a printer driver for a local printer This procedure is only applicable if the printer is connected to the computer, and is only used by this computer. To install the printer driver 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows administrator.

2

Choose Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound.

3

Click Add a Printer. The Add Printer wizard appears. Click Next to continue.

4

Click Local Printer and click Next.

5

Select the port to which the printer is connected. Click Next to continue.

6

Click the printer manufacturer in the Manufacturers list.

7

Click the printer model in the Printers list, and then click Next.

8

Name the printer. The name cannot contain spaces, and must not contain more than 30 characters.

9

Click Yes to use this printer as the default printer. Click Next to continue.

10 Specify whether or not the printer can be shared by other network users then

click Next. 11 Specify Location and Comment if the printer is shared and click Next. 12 Click Yes to print a test page and click Next. 13 Check the information is correct and click Finish to finish installing the

printer.

189

8 – CONNECTING PRINTERS AND MODEMS TO THE SERVER

Installing a printer driver for a local shared printer This procedure is only applicable if the printer is connected to the computer, and it is shared by other computers. To install the printer driver 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows Administrator.

2

Depending on your operating system, do one of the following: •

For Windows Server 2008 or Windows 7, choose Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound.

•

For Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP, choose Start > Settings > Printers and Faxes.

3

Click the Add a Printer. The Add Printer wizard appears. Click Next to continue.

4

Click Local Printer and click Next.

5

Select the port to which the printer is connected. Click Next to continue.

6

Click the printer manufacturer in the Manufacturers list.

7

Click the printer model in the Printers file, and then click Next.

8

Name the printer. The name cannot contain spaces, and must not contain more than 30 characters.

9

Click Yes to use this printer as the default printer. Click Next to continue.

10 Click Share name, type the printer share name, and then click Next. 11 If you want to, specify Location and Comments. 12 Click Next. 13 Click Yes to print a test page and then click Next. 14 Check the information is correct and click Finish to finish installing the

printer.

Installing a printer driver for a shared network printer (with a suitable share name) This procedure is only applicable if the printer is connected directly to the network, and the current share name does not contain spaces or more than 30 characters. (If this is not the case, see “Installing a printer driver for a shared network printer (whose existing share name is unsuitable)” on page 192.)

190

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING A PRINTER

To install the printer driver 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows administrator.

2

Depending on your operating system, do one of the following: •

For Windows Server 2008 or Windows 7, choose Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound.

•

For Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP, choose Start > Settings > Printers and Faxes.

3

Click the Add a Printer. The Add Printer wizard appears. Click Next to continue.

4

Click Network Printer and click Next.

5

Click Next to browse a list of shared printers on the network.

6

Select the printer you want to add and click Next.

7

Specify whether or not you want the network printer to be the default and click Next. EBI does not require the printer to be the default. However, if it is your only printer, and you want to print screen dumps, you must make it the default printer.

8

Check the information is correct and click Finish to complete the installation.

To set the paper size 1

Depending on your operating system, do one of the following: •

For Windows Server 2008 or Windows 7, choose Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound.

•

For Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP, choose Start > Settings > Printers and Faxes.

2

Click Printers.

3

Right-click the printer name and choose Printing Preferences.

4

Click Advanced.

5

Select the correct paper size and click OK.

6

On the Layout tab, select the orientation: Portrait, Landscape, or Rotated.

7

Click Apply and then click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.

191

8 – CONNECTING PRINTERS AND MODEMS TO THE SERVER

Installing a printer driver for a shared network printer (whose existing share name is unsuitable) This procedure is only applicable if the printer’s current share name contains spaces or more than 30 characters. (If this is not the case, see “Installing a printer driver for a shared network printer (with a suitable share name)”) To install the printer driver 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows Administrator.

2

Depending on your operating system, do one of the following: •

For Windows Server 2008 or Windows 7, choose Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound.

•

For Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP, choose Start > Settings > Printers and Faxes.

3

Click the Add a Printer. The Add Printer wizard appears. Click Next to continue.

4

Click Local Printer and click Next.

5

Click Create a new port, click Local Port in the Type of Port list and click Next.

6

Type the full network UNC pathname for the printer in the Port Name dialog box and click OK.

7

Click the printer manufacturer in the Manufacturers list.

8

Click the printer model in the Printers list, and then click Next.

9

Name the printer. The name cannot contain spaces, and must not contain more than 30 characters.

10 Specify whether or not you want the printer to be the default and click Next.

EBI does not require the printer to be the default. However, if it is your only printer, and you want to print screen dumps, you must make it the default printer. 11 Click Do not share this printer and click Next. 12 Specify Location and Comments, if required. 13 Click Next. 14 Click Yes to print a test page and click Next. 15 Check the information is correct and click Finish to finish installing the

printer.

192

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING A PRINTER

To set the paper size 1

Depending on your operating system, do one of the following: •

For Windows Server 2008 or Windows 7, choose Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound.

•

For Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP, choose Start > Settings > Printers and Faxes.

2

Click Printers.

3

Right-click the printer name and choose Printing Preferences.

4

Click Advanced.

5

Select the correct paper size and click OK.

6

On the Layout tab, select the orientation: Portrait, Landscape, or Rotated.

7

Click Apply and then click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.

193

8 – CONNECTING PRINTERS AND MODEMS TO THE SERVER

Setting up the Print Job Spool folder When you install a printer, Windows creates a folder to temporarily store print jobs before sending them to the printer. By default, the folder is %windir%\ System32\Spool\Printers. To change the spool folder for Windows 7 1

Choose Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound.

2

Click Devices and Printers.

3

Click any printer and then click Printer Server Properties.

4

Click the Advanced tab.

5

Click Change Advanced Settings.

6

In the Spool folder box, type a path for the print spool folder that is not in the primary partition.

7

Click Apply, then click OK to save your changes.

To change the spool folder for Windows Server 2008 1

Choose Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound.

2

Click Printers.

3

Click Server Properties.

4

Click the Advanced tab.

5

Click Change Advanced Settings.

6

In the Spool folder box, type a path for the print spool folder that is not in the primary partition.

7

Click Apply, then click OK to save your changes.

To change the spool folder for Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP

194

1

Choose Start > Settings > Printers and Faxes.

2

Choose File > Server Properties and click the Advanced tab.

3

Type a path for the print spool folder that is not in the primary partition.

4

Click Apply, then click OK to save your changes.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING A PRINTER

Creating a Guest account When printing alarms, events, or reports on a printer that is connected to a computer other than the server, network security becomes a factor. This is because EBI runs under the Windows mngr account. When EBI attempts to print via another computer, it logs into that computer using this account and associated password. The print job will fail if the login fails. To ensure that security does not become an issue when printing, you must create a “guest” account on the other computer called, mngr. If this account is only used for printing, you can set it up for only printing privileges. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

195

8 – CONNECTING PRINTERS AND MODEMS TO THE SERVER

Installing a modem This section describes how to install a modem. You can set up a modem for either: •

Microsoft Remote Access Service (RAS) and a virtual network connection. This is the primary way, and can be used by any client computer, regardless of the application it is running (Station, Quick Builder, and so on.).

•

Alarm Pager.

If you want to set up remote access as well as alarm paging, two modems need to be installed on separate COM ports. For details, see “Configuring alarm paging for pagers” in the Configuration and Administration Guide. If you have problems, see the “Modems” section. Prerequisites •

Modem

•

Appropriate modem cables, as shown in the following figures. Figure 1 Cable for a Computer with a 9-pin COM Port

Computer DB9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

196

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Modem DB25 8 3 2 20 7 6 4 5 22

INSTALLING A MODEM

Figure 2 Cable for a Computer with a 25-pin COM Port

Computer DB25 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22

Modem DB25 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Set up the modem.

page 198

Set up the modem connection.

page 199

Done?

Related topics “Modems” on page 427 “Alarm paging for pagers” on page 107

197

8 – CONNECTING PRINTERS AND MODEMS TO THE SERVER

Setting up the modem The server modem is configured as the “dumb” modem and the client computer modem is configured as the “active” modem. To set up the modem 1

Set the DIP switch settings as shown in the following figures. Figure 3 NetComm M7F DIP Switch Settings

Server

Client ON

ON

OFF 1

2

3

4

5

6

OFF 1

2

3

4

5

6

Figure 4 Sportster DIP Switch Settings

Server

Client ON

ON OFF

OFF 1

2

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Connect the modem to the computer’s COM port using the modem cable, and switch on the modem.

Modem connection Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order.

198

Task

Go to:

Set up the connection.

page 199

Configure RAS

page 200

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

INSTALLING A MODEM

Task

Go to:

Done?

Add a remote user on: • Windows Server 2008

page 202

• Windows Server 7

page 202

• Windows Server 2003

page 203

• Windows XP

page 203

Setting up the modem connection To set up the modem connection for Windows Server 2008 1

Make sure the modem is connected to the computer and switched on, because Windows searches for any modem connected during install.

2

Choose Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound and click Phone and Modem Options.

3

Click the Modems tab.

4

Click Add. If you want to select your modem, select Don’t Detect my Modem; l will select it from a list.

5

Click Next. Windows takes about a minute to search for your modem. If Windows finds a modem, Windows will query it and its lights will blink as Windows and the modem communicate with each other.

6

Click Next to accept the modem.

7

Select the port you want to install the modem on and click Next. The modem is now installed.

8

Click Finish.

9

Click OK to close the Phone and Modem Options dialog box.

To set up the modem connection for Windows 7 1

Make sure the modem is connected to the computer and switched on, because Windows searches for any modem connected during install.

2

Choose Start > Control Panel.

3

From the View by list, click Small icons.

4

Click Phone and Modem.

5

Click the Modems tab.

199

8 – CONNECTING PRINTERS AND MODEMS TO THE SERVER

6

Click Add. If you want to select your modem, select Don’t Detect my Modem; l will select it from a list.

7

Click Next. Windows takes about a minute to search for your modem. If Windows finds a modem, Windows will query it and its lights will blink as Windows and the modem communicate with each other.

8

Click Next to accept the modem.

9

Select the port you want to install the modem on and click Next. The modem is now installed.

10 Click Finish. 11 Click OK to close the Phone and Modem Options dialog box.

To set up the modem connection on Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP 1

Make sure the modem is connected to the computer and switched on, because Windows searches for any modem connected during install.

2

In Windows Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options.

3

Click the Modems tab.

4

Select Add. If you want to select your modem, select Don’t Detect my Modem; l will select it from a list.

5

Click Next. Windows takes about a minute to search for your modem. If Windows finds a modem, Windows will query it and its lights will blink as Windows and the modem communicate with each other.

6

Click Next to accept the modem.

7

Select the port you want to install the modem on and click Next. The modem is now installed.

8

Click Finish.

9

Click OK to close the Phone and Modem Options dialog box.

Configuring RAS To configure RAS as a server on Windows 7 1

200

Choose Start > Control Panel. Under Network and Internet, click View network status and tasks.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING A MODEM

2

In the left pane, click Change adapter settings.

3

Press ALT and choose File > New Incoming Connections.

4

Select the user accounts that you want to connect to this computer and click Next.

5

Select the modem to be used to connect to this computer and click Next.

6

Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties.

7

Assign the TCP/IP addresses, click OK and then click Next.

8

Click Allow access.

To configure RAS as a server on Windows XP 1

Choose Start > Settings > Network Connections.

2

Double-click the Create a new connection icon. The New Connection wizard starts.

3

Click Next.

4

Select Set up an advanced connection.

5

Select Accept incoming connections, click Next.

6

Select the modem and click Next.

7

Select Do not allow virtual private connections and click Next.

8

Select the users allowed to connect and click Next.

9

Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties.

10 Assign the TCP/IP addresses, click OK and then click Next. 11 Click Finish.

To configure a RAS client on Windows 7 1

Choose Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet and click Network and Sharing Center.

2

Click Set up a connection or network.

3

Click Set up a dial-up connection and click Next.

4

Type the phone number, user name and password as appropriate.

5

In the Connection name box, type a name for this connection.

6

Click Create.

To configure a RAS client on Windows XP 1

Choose Start > Settings > Network Connections.

201

8 – CONNECTING PRINTERS AND MODEMS TO THE SERVER

2

Double-click the Create a new connection icon. The New Connection wizard starts.

3

Click Next.

4

Click Connect to the network at my workplace.

5

Click Dial-up connection, and click Next.

6

Type a name for the connection.

7

Type the phone number and click Next.

8

Select the appropriate connection availability, and click Next.

9

Click Finish.

10 In Windows Control Panel, open Network Connections and select the dial-up

connection. 11 From the File menu, choose Properties and make any changes that are

required.

Adding a Remote User on Windows Server 2008 To add the remote user 1

Choose Start > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.

2

Click the Users folder from Local Users and Groups and choose Action > New User.

3

Type the Username and Password as specified in the System Design form.

4

Select User cannot change password at next logon and Password never expires.

5

Click Create and then click Close.

6

Double-click the new user’s name to open the Properties dialog box.

7

Click the Dial-in tab, and select Allow access.

8

Click OK to finish.

Adding a Remote User on Windows 7 To add the remote user

202

1

Choose Start, right-click Computer and choose Manage.

2

Click the Users folder from Local Users and Groups and choose Action > New User.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING A MODEM

3

Type the Username and Password as specified in the System Design form.

4

Select User cannot change password at next logon and Password never expires.

5

Click Create and then click Close.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Adding a Remote User on Windows Server 2003 To add the remote user 1

In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools and double-click Computer Management.

2

Click the Users folder from Local Users and Groups and choose Action > New User.

3

Type the Username and Password as specified in the System Design form.

4

Select User cannot change password at next logon and Password never expires.

5

Click Create and then click Close.

6

Double-click the new user’s name to open the Properties dialog box.

7

Click the Dialin tab, and select Allow access.

8

Click OK to finish.

Adding a Remote User on Windows XP To add the remote user 1

In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools and double-click Computer Management.

2

Click the Users folder from Local Users and Groups and choose Action > New User.

3

Type the Username and Password as specified in the System Design form.

4

Select User cannot change password at next logon and Password never expires.

5

Click Create and then click Close.

203

8 – CONNECTING PRINTERS AND MODEMS TO THE SERVER

204

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Supplementary tasks

9

This section contains supplementary tasks that are either part of a checklist, or can be completed, if required, after an installation.

205

9 – SUPPLEMENTARY TASKS

Starting and stopping the EBI server This section describes how to stop or start the EBI server. To stop the EBI server 1

Choose Start > All Programs > Enterprise Buildings Integrator Server > Start-Stop Enterprise Buildings Integrator Server. The EBI Server dialog box opens.

2

If the EBI Server dialog box is displayed in simple mode, click the on the title bar, and choose Advanced > Full Mode.

icon

Mode Simple

Full

3

There are three stop modes available in Full mode: Database Unloaded, Database & Daemons, and Database Only. Select the stop mode specified by the current task.

4

If prompted, click Yes to confirm the action. Wait for the server to stop. This may take several minutes.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

To start the EBI server

206

1

Choose Start > All Programs > Enterprise Buildings Integrator Server > Start-Stop Enterprise Buildings Integrator Server. The EBI Server dialog box opens.

2

If the EBI Server dialog box is displayed in simple mode, click the on the title bar, and choose Advanced > Full Mode.

3

To start the EBI server, select System Running.

4

If prompted, click Yes to confirm the action. Wait for the server start. This may take several minutes.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

icon

STARTING AND STOPPING THE EBI SERVER

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

207

9 – SUPPLEMENTARY TASKS

Stopping EBI services This section describes how to stop the EBI-related services on a server. Caution Manually stopping EBI-related services without using the Start-Stop EBI Server application may cause the EBI system to become unstable. You should manually stop EBI-related services only when instructed by your local Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

208

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

STOPPING EBI SERVICES

Displaying the Computer Management Services Console To display the Computer Management Services Console on Windows Server 2003 and Windows XP 1

Click Start, right-click My Computer and choose Manage.

2

Expand Services and Applications and click Services.

To display the Computer Management Services Console on Windows Server 2008 1

Click Start, right-click Computer and choose Manage.

2

Expand Configuration and click Services.

To display the Computer Management Services Console on Windows 7 1

Click Start, right-click Computer and choose Manage.

2

Expand Services and Applications and click Services.

Results The services are displayed on the right pane of the console. Most EBI-related process names are prefixed with “EBI”.

209

9 – SUPPLEMENTARY TASKS

Stopping RSLinx The system tray is the area on the Windows operating system task bar displaying the time. To left side of the time, there are one or more icons displayed. To stop RSLinx

210

1

Click the RSLinx icon in the system tray to display the RSLinx application.

2

Choose File > Exit and Shutdown.

3

When the “Shutdown RSLinx anyway?” message dialog box is displayed, click Yes.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

MAKING CHANGES AFTER INSTALLATION

Making changes after installation To:

Go to:

Change the license

page 212

Adding new or reinstalling EBI components

page 214

Change the default History archive and Event archiving folders

page 213

211

9 – SUPPLEMENTARY TASKS

Changing the EBI license This section describes how to change the EBI license. Some major license changes require you to install components from the EBI DVD. You are notified you if this is the case. You should also check whether you need to reapply an service packs or cumulative updates for the components you have added to your system. If you have a redundant server system, you have to perform this procedure on each server. Prerequisites •

The EBI DVD.

•

The new EBI license.

•

You have backed up the database, especially if the database size is being changed.

To change the EBI license 1

Log on to the server as a Windows administrator.

2

Choose Start > All Programs > Enterprise Buildings Integrator > EBI Configuration Panel.

3

Click View or Change License.

4

Click Change License.

5

Type in the System number and the Authorization number, as specified in your EBI license and click OK.

6

If you need to install additional components, insert the EBI DVD.

7

Click Modify to continue.

8

Click Add/Remove components and follow the wizard to install the additional components.

9

If required reapply any service packs or cumulative updates.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “Starting and stopping the EBI server” on page 206

212

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

MAKING CHANGES AFTER INSTALLATION

Changing the default History Archive folders The History Archive folder can be modified after installation using the EBI Server Configuration Panel. For more information about the Configuration Panel, see “Configuration Panel” in the Configuration and Administration Guide. To change the default History archive folder 1

Log on to the server as a Windows administrator.

2

Stop the EBI server.

3

Choose Start > Programs > Enterprise Buildings Integrator > EBI Configuration Panel to open the EBI Server Configuration Panel.

4

Next to the History archive directory, click Browse.

5

Locate the new archive folder and click OK.

6

Click OK to close the Configuration Panel.

7

Restart the EBI server.

Related topics “Starting and stopping the EBI server” on page 206

213

9 – SUPPLEMENTARY TASKS

Adding new or reinstalling EBI components Adding or reinstalling EBI components involves stopping EBI, and turning the computer off and then back on. Prerequisites •

The EBI DVD.

To install new EBI components or reinstall existing components 1

Log on to the server as a Windows administrator.

2

Stop the EBI server.

3

Insert the EBI DVD. The EBI Installation startup screen appears. If the startup screen does not appear, in Windows Explorer navigate to the DVD drive and double-click setup.exe.

4

Click Modify.

5

Click Next to continue. The Program Maintenance page appears.

6

Select Add Components and then click Next.

7

The System Check Warning page appears. Click Next.

8

Select the EBI components you want to add or reinstall and then click Next.

9

Review the components you want to add or reinstall and click Install.

10 Restart the computer so that the changes take effect. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “Starting and stopping the EBI server” on page 206

214

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING THE DATABASE SETUP

Configuring the database setup After installing EBI, you can adjust the database sizing for history samples and other non-licensed items to meet your system’s requirements. To:

Go to:

Adjust history retention

page 216

Adjust sizing for non-licensed items

page 218

Check the maximum number of points and card readers allowed by your page 219 license

215

9 – SUPPLEMENTARY TASKS

Adjusting history retention You can adjust history retention periods, including the duration and number of samples, with the sysbld utility. For details about this utility, see “sysbld” in the “Command Reference” section of the Configuration and Administration Guide. History types When you configure a point you can choose to store up to three types of history (standard, extended and fast) for each point parameter. The following table describes the type of samples taken for each history type. The default retention period refers to the length of time before old history samples are discarded from the online history files. You can configure the number of history samples retained after installation. The maximum number of samples that can be collected is 100,000, providing you have enough disk space. History type

Sample(s) taken

Default retention period Duration

Standard

Extended

Fast History

Number of samples

1-minute snapshot

24 hours

1442

6-minute average

7 days

1682

1-hour average

7 days

170

8-hour average

3 months

281

24-hour average

1 year

368

1-hour snapshot

7 days

170

8-hour snapshot

3 months

281

24-hour snapshot

1 year

368

Snapshots taken at intervals 2 hours to 8652 between 1 and 30 seconds (interval 72 hours specified during installation)

The following table lists the default and maximum number of parameters for which history can be recorded.

216

History type

Default number of point parameters

Maximum number of point parameters

Standard

Equal to the number of points or 2000 (whichever is smaller)

100000

Extended

200

100000

Fast History

100

100000

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING THE DATABASE SETUP

Calculating disk space requirements for History The following formula allows you to calculate the disk space requirements (in bytes) for the EBI history files. (N1+N2+N3+N4+N5+2)*PS*4+(N6+2)*PF*4+(N7+N8+N9+2)*PE*4

where: Part

Description

PS

The number of point parameters that can be assigned to standard history.

PF

The number of point parameters that can be assigned to fast history.

PE

The number of point parameters that can be assigned to extended history.

N1 to N5

The number of samples of history retained for each of the standard history intervals.

N6

The number of samples of history retained for the fast history interval.

N7 to N9

The number of samples of history retained for the extended history.

217

9 – SUPPLEMENTARY TASKS

Adjusting sizing of non-licensed items You can adjust the sizing of non-licensed items, so that the sizing meets your needs, with the sysbld utility. The following table lists the non-licensed items whose sizing you can adjust. For details about this utility, see “sysbld” in the “Command Reference” section of the Configuration and Administration Guide. Attention Because some of non-licensed items affect disk space and memory requirements, you need to take care when setting their sizes. Item

Default number

Max number

Additional disk space required/item (kilobytes)

Printer connections

50

50

0

Controller channels

97

97

0

Controllers

100

255

0

Algorithm blocks

6000

6000

0

Assignable locations

1000

1000

0

Dynamic objects on named displays

300

300

0

Trends

3000

3000

0

Groups

16000

16000

0

Reports

1000

1000

0

Point control schedules

1000

1000

0

Operators

400

1000

0

Concurrent alarms

2000

2000

0

Concurrent messages

1000

1000

0

Event Summary

32000

327671

0.25

Number of user files

3

150

User defined

Number of application tasks 80

80

0

Point lists

2000

0

2000

1. The maximum configurable size of the online Event Summary.

218

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING THE DATABASE SETUP

Determining how many points you can configure The following table lists the maximum number of points and card readers you can configure for each database size. (You can find the maximum number of points on your software license certificate.) Database size

Maximum number of points

Maximum number of card readers

1

250

12

2

500

24

3

1000

36

4

2000

48

5

3500

64

6

5000

80

7

7500

120

8

10000

256

9

15000

512

10

20000

1024

11

30000

2000

12

40000

2000

13

63000

2000

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

219

9 – SUPPLEMENTARY TASKS

Synchronizing the date and time If you have redundant servers or a DSA system, you must synchronize the date and time on the servers to ensure that all dates/times associated with events in the database are consistent. In the case of redundant servers, the primary server is used as the time source and the backup server is configured to synchronize with the primary server. In the case of distributed servers, you need to take into account the local time if they are in different time zones. For example, if one server is in a time zone that is one hour ahead of the other server(s), then its time must be set so that it is exactly one hour ahead of the other server(s). Take note of the following considerations when synchronizing the date and time: •

If the servers are members of a Windows domain, the servers can synchronize time with a domain controller.

•

If you are using a domain controller as a time source, you only need to ensure that the Windows Time server on each server is set to automatic startup.

•

To configure the backup server so that it synchronizes with the primary server, you need to run the Microsoft Time Service application on the backup server.

•

For redundancy, if you use the setupredun.vbs script, time sources will be set up for you, that is, the script will set up the A server as the primary time source and the B server as the other one. For more information, see “Running setupredun.vbs” in the Configuration and Administration Guide. For DSA, you should still use the settimesource.vbs script.

To set up the local or primary server as a time source 1

Choose Start > Run and run settimesource.vbs. The settimesource file is located in the Program Files\Honeywell\ server\run folder. This program enables the server to set up as a time source, and is silent if successful.

To synchronize the time on the remote or backup server 1

220

On the remote or backup server, choose Start > Run and run: settimesource.vbs primaryname The settimesource file is located in the Program Files\Honeywell\ server\run folder. Primaryname is the machine name of the local or primary server.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

SYNCHRONIZING THE DATE AND TIME

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

221

9 – SUPPLEMENTARY TASKS

Moving the RSLinx activation file This section describes how to move the activation file (evrsi.sys) either from the RSLinx Master diskette to the computer’s hard drive, or from the computer’s hard drive back to the RSLinx Master diskette. RSLinx requires this activation file for the software to operate as the OEM version, rather than the Lite version. To support EBI systems that communicate using Ethernet, the RSLinx version must be OEM. Therefore, you must follow this procedure if you need to upgrade RSLinx from the Lite version to the OEM version. If the activation file is already present on the computer’s hard drive when you install RSLinx, the application will operate as the OEM version. Take note of the following considerations: •

If you ever have to reformat your computer’s hard drive, you must move the activation file to the RSLinx Master diskette before you reformat the computer’s hard drive.

•

Do not manually copy or move the evrsi.sys file. Moving or coping the evrsi.sys file will disable the OEM version of RSLinx. Always use the EVMOVE.EXE application to move the evrsi.sys file.

•

If the evrsi.sys file is corrupted, or if you manually move it, and the RSLinx application runs as the Lite version, rather than the OEM version, you can visit the Rockwell Automation Web site (http:// support.rockwellautomation.com/resetcodes/) to recover the RSLinx activation.

Prerequisites •

RSLinx Master diskette.

•

Ensure that you shut down all EBI server and RSLinx services before you remove the activation file.

To move the RSLinx activation files 1

Choose Start > Programs > Rockwell Software > RSLinx > RSLinx to open the RSLinx application.

2

Check the title in the RSLinx dialog box.

3

If the title displays “RSLinx Lite”: a. Choose File > Exit. b. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

4

222

If the title displays “RSLinx OEM”, choose File > Exit.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

MOVING THE RSLINX ACTIVATION FILE

5

Stop the RSLinx service. See “Stopping RSLinx” on page 210.

6

Stop the EBI server. See “Starting and stopping the EBI server” on page 206.

7

Insert the RSLinx Master diskette into drive A.

8

In Windows Explorer, browse to drive A and double-click evmove.exe.

9

Select the From Drive and the To Drive. If you are preparing for an upgrade, select C: in the From Drive and select A: in the To Drive. If you are activating a new installation of RSLinx, select A: in the From Drive and select C: in the To Drive.

10 Click OK to initiate the move. 11 Click Move to move the activation file. 12 When a successful message dialog box is displayed, click OK. 13 Remove the Master diskette from drive A and store it in a safe place. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “Stopping RSLinx” on page 210 “Starting and stopping the EBI server” on page 206

223

9 – SUPPLEMENTARY TASKS

224

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Preparing a client computer

10

This section describes how prepare a client computer so that it is suitable for EBI client applications, such as Station and Quick Builder, or for third-party applications such as OPC clients/servers. Attention Only complete a task in this section if you are instructed to do so by the appropriate checklist.

225

10 – PREPARING A CLIENT COMPUTER

Updating the computer’s hosts file You must identify each communications link to the EBI server(s) in the computer’s hosts file. The hosts file is %SystemRoot%\system32\drivers\etc\hosts, where %SystemRoot% is normally c:\windows. Use Windows Notepad or a similar text editing tool to update the file. The following examples show typical system configurations, and the required entries. Non-redundant server system

Client hsclnt

Server hsserv

Assume the server addresses is 192.168.0.1. The hosts file of the client computer would therefore include the following: 127.0.0.1 localhost 192.168.0.1 hsserv

226

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPDATING THE COMPUTER’S HOSTS FILE

Redundant server system

Client hsclnt

Primary Server hsserva

Backup Server hsservb

Assume the server addresses are: •

192.168.0.1

for hsserva

•

192.168.0.2

for hsservb

The hosts file of the client computer would therefore include the following: 127.0.0.1 localhost 192.168.0.1 hsserva 192.168.1.2 hsservb

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

227

10 – PREPARING A CLIENT COMPUTER

228

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Installing applications on a client computer

11

This section describes how to install EBI client applications (such as Station and Quick Builder) and third-party applications (such as OPC clients/servers) on a client computer. Attention Only complete a task in this section if you are instructed to do so by the appropriate checklist.

229

11 – INSTALLING APPLICATIONS ON A CLIENT COMPUTER

Installing EBI client applications This section describes how to install EBI client applications, such as Station and Quick Builder, on a client computer. A Client install only installs client subsystems. Typical and Custom client applications installation types There are two types of client application installation available: •

A Typical installation will install EBI Station and HMIWeb Display Builder only. All settings are automatically configured and they may be changed after install using the EBI Configuration Panel. For more information about the Configuration Panel, see “Configuration Panel” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

•

A Custom installation allows you to select from a set of available options for a particular installation. All subsystems in a Client install are optional, but at least one subsystem must be installed.

Typical installation of the EBI client applications Prerequisites •

The EBI DVD.

•

The System Design form.

•

If required, Microsoft Office 2007 is installed. To avoid compatibility issues with ActiveX documents embedded in custom displays, ensure that Microsoft Office 2007 is installed before installing Station.

To perform a Typical installation of EBI client applications

230

1

Close any applications that are running.

2

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically appears. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING EBI CLIENT APPLICATIONS

3

If you are required to install some prerequisite software, click Install Prerequisite Software. Your system is checked for certain software that is required by the EBI installation wizard. If you are required to install the prerequisite software, all other installation options appear “grayed out”. If all other installation options are available, then go to step 5.

4

Follow the prompts to install the prerequisite software and restart your computer when requested.

5

Click Installation. Several applications, including InstallShield Scripting Engine and .NET, are installed automatically, if they are not detected on the client computer. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 page appears.

6

Click Next to continue. The Setup Type page appears.

7

Click Enterprise Buildings Integrator client.

8

The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any Critical Issues must be resolved before installation can proceed. Click Next to continue.

9

Click Typical Install on the Installation Type page to install Station and HMIWeb Display Builder.

10 Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell.

If you want to change the base installation directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next. 11 Enter the EBI server name that the client will be connecting to by default and

click Next to continue. 12 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Install to start installing

the EBI client applications. 13 When the installation is complete, click Finish. You will be prompted to

restart your computer. Click Yes to restart. Related topics “Filling in the System Design form” on page 19

231

11 – INSTALLING APPLICATIONS ON A CLIENT COMPUTER

Custom installation of the EBI client applications Prerequisites •

The EBI DVD.

•

The System Design form.

•

If required, Microsoft Office 2007 is installed. (To avoid compatibility issues with ActiveX documents embedded in custom displays, ensure that Microsoft Office 2007 is installed before installing Station.)

To Custom install EBI client applications

232

1

Close any applications that are running.

2

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically displays. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

3

If you are required to install some prerequisite software, click Install Prerequisite Software. Your system is checked for certain software that is required by the EBI installation wizard. If you are required to install the prerequisite software, all other installation options appear “grayed out”. If all other installation options are available, then go to step 5.

4

Follow the prompts to install the prerequisite software and restart your computer when requested.

5

Click Installation. Several applications, including InstallShield Scripting Engine and .NET, are installed automatically, if they are not detected on the client computer. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 page appears.

6

Click Next to continue. The Setup Type page appears.

7

Click Enterprise Buildings Integrator client.

8

The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any Critical Issues must be resolved before installation can proceed. Click Next to continue.

9

Click Custom on the Installation Type page.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING EBI CLIENT APPLICATIONS

10 Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell.

If you want to change the base installation directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next. 11 Select the EBI Client options you want to install.

If an option has an asterisk (*) next to it, a license for this option is required on the EBI server. 12 Click Next to continue. 13 If you chose the OPC Server Connect client installation option, type the

password for the Windows mngr account in the Password box, as specified in the System Design form. Confirm the password by typing it again in the Confirm Password box and then click Next. 14 If you chose the Microsoft Excel Data Exchange client installation option,

click Yes in the MEDE Choice page if you want to allow Microsoft Excel Data Exchange to write to the EBI database. Click Next to continue. 15 The Station Choice page appears. Click Yes if the station is to be used as the

primary monitoring or control point for a UL Listed Fire, Security or Smoke Control System. 16 Enter the EBI server name that the client installation will be connecting to by

default. Click Next to continue. 17 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Install to start installing

the EBI client applications. 18 When the installation is complete, click Finish. You will be prompted to

restart your computer. Click Yes to restart. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “Filling in the System Design form” on page 19

233

11 – INSTALLING APPLICATIONS ON A CLIENT COMPUTER

Adding Windows accounts to the Honeywell Station Users group If you have installed Station, HMIWeb Display Builder, or Quick Builder on a computer with Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, or Windows 7, you must add Windows user accounts for the users of these applications to the Honeywell Station Users group that was created during installation. You require administrative privileges to perform this task. To add an account to the Honeywell Station Users group 1

Click Start and in the Start search box type mmc. The Microsoft Management Console opens.

2

Choose File > Add/Remove Snap-in. The Add/Remove Snap-in dialog box opens.

3

In the Available Snap-ins list, click Local Users and Groups and click Add.

4

Click OK.

5

Click the Groups folder.

6

In the list of groups, double-click Honeywell Station Users. The Properties dialog box opens.

7

Click Add. The Select Users Computer, or Groups dialog box opens.

8

Type the names of the users you want to add to the group and click Check Names.

9

Click OK.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

234

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A STATION FOR SERVER REDUNDANCY

Configuring a Station for server redundancy Station needs to connect to whichever server is running as the primary server. Station’s connection settings (as well as its other configuration settings) are stored in a set of “stn” files. A single-network system requires two stn files. If Station cannot connect using a particular stn file, it then attempts to connect using the next stn file in the “chain”. (Each stn file specifies the next file in the chain.) The default stn file, Default.stn, is located in Client\Station. The following procedure describes one way of configuring Station and creating the required stn files. However, you can manually edit the stn files using a text editor such as Notepad. If you decide to do this, see “Configuring Station connection properties” in the Configuration and Administration Guide for details about the syntax of the stn files. Attention The configuration settings need to be identical in all stn files, except for the server and network connection details. This means that if you ever change Station’s configuration, you must ensure that the change is replicated in all stn files.

To configure Station for redundancy 1

Open Station. As Station opens, it reads Default.stn and attempts to connect to the primary server. However, this will fail because Default.stn does not yet specify the server’s name.

2

When the Unable to Connect message appears, click Cancel.

3

Choose Station > Connect to open the Connect dialog box.

4

Click Edit Connection to open the Connection Properties dialog box.

5

Using the following table, type the first server name (for your network type) in Server.

6

Select Auxiliary setup file and type the name of the file specified in the following table. (If these properties are not visible, click Advanced.)

7

Set Station’s other configuration details as appropriate. For details, see “Configuring Station connection properties” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

8

When Station is configured as required, click Save and click Yes in response to the prompt.

9

Click Connect. Station will attempt to connect to the server. If it cannot connect, check that you have specified the correct server name.

235

11 – INSTALLING APPLICATIONS ON A CLIENT COMPUTER

10 Check that Station’s configuration works as expected.

You have now configured Default.stn. 11 Configure the remaining stn files for your network type: a. Choose Station > Connect. b. Click Edit Connection to open the Connection Properties box. c. Type the server’s name in Server. d. Select Auxiliary setup file and type the name of the auxiliary file. e. Click Save As and type the name of the stn file. Network type

Server name:

Auxiliary setup file:

Save stn file as:

Single

BaseNamea

BaseNameb.stn

Default.stn

BaseNameb

Default.stn

BaseNameb.stn

where BaseName is the server’s basename (see “Description of Windows Server properties” on page 20).

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “Description of Windows Server properties” on page 20

236

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

SETTING UP A MULTI-MONITOR STATION

Setting up a multi-monitor Station You set up Station so that it runs on multiple monitors by making the appropriate changes to %windir%\station.ini (%windir% is normally C:\Windows). You may also want to set up Display Builder in the same way as Station. See “Setting up Display Builder for multiple monitors” on page 238. To specify the resolution for Station 1

Using a text editor such as Notepad, open station.ini.

2

Edit the following Station section entries: [Station] ScreenWidth=x ScreenHeight=y

where x and y are the required width and height. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Example

If you have a dual-monitor (side-by-side) setup, with a total resolution of 2560x1024, and the resolution of each monitor is 1280x1024, you would make the following changes: [Station] ScreenWidth=1280 ScreenHeight=1024

Related topics “Setting up Display Builder for multiple monitors” on page 238

237

11 – INSTALLING APPLICATIONS ON A CLIENT COMPUTER

Setting up Display Builder for multiple monitors If you set up Station to use multiple monitors, you may also want to set up Display Builder in the same way to make display creation is easier. To set up Display Builder with the same resolution as in Station 1

Open regedit and navigate to: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Honeywell\Display Builder

2

Change the DWORD values of ScreenWidth and ScreenHeight as appropriate.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Example

If you have a side-by-side monitors, with a total resolution of 2560x1024, and the resolution of each monitor is 1280x1024, you would make the following changes: ScreenWidth=1280 ScreenHeight=1024

238

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING NETWORKED XLNET NODE SOFTWARE

Installing Networked XLNET Node software This section describes how to install Networked XLNET Node software on a client computer. Prerequisites •

The System Design form (page 15).

•

The EBI DVD.

•

You have prepared the computer as described in “Preparing a client computer” on page 225.

•

You must be logged on as a Windows administrator.

To install networked XLNET node software 1

Close any applications that are running.

2

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically displays. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

3

Click Installation. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 page appears.

4

Click Next to continue. The Setup Type page appears.

5

Click Enterprise Buildings Integrator Client. The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any critical issues must be resolved before installation can proceed.

6

Click Next to continue.

7

Click Custom on the Installation Type page.

8

Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell. If you want to change the base installation directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next.

9

Click Next to continue.

10 Select XLNet Node and click Next.

If desired, you can also select additional client options, such as Station. 239

11 – INSTALLING APPLICATIONS ON A CLIENT COMPUTER

11 Type the password for the Windows mngr account in the Password box, as

specified in the System Design form. Confirm the password by typing it again in the Confirm Password box and then click Next. 12 Type in the EBI server name and click Next to continue. 13 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Install to start installing

the EBI client applications. 14 When the installation is complete, click Finish. You will be prompted to

restart your computer. Click Yes to restart. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “System Design form” on page 15 “Preparing a client computer” on page 225

240

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

SETTING UP A THIRD-PARTY OPC CLIENT OR SERVER

Setting up a third-party OPC client or server This section describes how to set up third-party OPC client and/or OPC server on a computer other than the EBI server computer. If you have an OPC client, it must specify the full name of the primary server when requesting information from the server. See “Specifying the server name in Data Access applications” on page 246. Prerequisites •

The relevant installation software, license and documentation for the thirdparty OPC software.

•

The System Design form (page 15).

•

You have prepared the computer as described in “Preparing a client computer” on page 225.

•

You must be logged on as a Windows administrator.

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to:

Done?

Install the OPC software in accordance with the manufacturer’s documentation. If you have installed an OPC client, create a Windows

page 242

mngr account.

If necessary, specify the OPC client’s read/write access.

page 243

If you have installed an OPC server, create a Windows

page 244

mngr account and configure DCOM security.

241

11 – INSTALLING APPLICATIONS ON A CLIENT COMPUTER

Creating a Windows mngr account for a third-party OPC client When a EBI OPC server returns data to an OPC client on a remote computer, it connects to that computer using the Windows mngr account and associated password. You must therefore create the mngr account on that computer. Prerequisites •

The System Design form (page 15).

•

You must be logged on as a Windows administrator.

To create the account 1

Choose Start, right-click Computer and choose Manage.

2

Expand the System Tools item and then expand Local Users and Groups item.

3

Click Users.

4

Choose Action > New User to open the New User dialog box.

5

Type mngr as the User Name and type the password, as specified in the System Design form.

6

It is a good idea to type an appropriate Full Name and Description, such as OPC Server.

7

Clear the User must change password at next logon check box and select the Password never expires check box.

8

Click Create to add the account.

9

Close the Computer Management dialog box.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “System Design form” on page 15

242

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

SETTING UP A THIRD-PARTY OPC CLIENT OR SERVER

Controlling Read/Write access By default, anyone with an account on a client computer which is set up to communicate with the EBI OPC Data Access Server has full read and write access to the EBI database. If you want to prevent such access, you must configure the server computer’s permissions on a per-user basis. To configure the permissions 1

On the server computer, open up the registry and locate the key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Honeywell\MyTPSDomain\HciComponents\ Honeywell HCI Server\MethodSecurity

2

Note the filenames specified for the following entries: •

OPCRead

• OPCWrite These files are used to control read/write access. 3

Use Windows Explorer to locate (or create) these files in \Hwiac\Security.

4

For each file: a. Right-click it and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog box. b. Click the Security tab and click File Permissions. c. Add or delete users from the access list to set up the appropriate security.

Anyone with full access to OPCRead will have read access to the OPC Data Access Server, and anyone with full access to OPCWrite will have write access to the OPC Data Access Server. In order to set up a particular account with read-only access, you must give the account full access to OPCRead, but deny access to OPCWrite. (It is not possible to give an account write access to the OPC Data Access Server without also giving it read access.) Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

243

11 – INSTALLING APPLICATIONS ON A CLIENT COMPUTER

Creating a Windows mngr account for a third-party OPC server When a EBI OPC client on the EBI server connects to an OPC server on another computer, it connects to that computer using the Windows mngr account and associated password. You must therefore create the mngr account on the computer, and configure DCOM security so that the account can access the OPC server via DCOM. Prerequisites •

The System Design form (page 15).

•

You must be logged on as a Windows administrator.

To create the account 1

Choose Start, right-click Computer and choose Manage.

2

Expand the System Tools item and then expand Local Users and Groups item.

3

Click Users.

4

Choose Action > New User to open the New User dialog box.

5

Type mngr as the User Name and type the password, as specified in the System Design form.

6

It is a good idea to type an appropriate Full Name and Description, such as OPC Server.

7

Clear the User must change password at next logon check box and select the Password never expires check box.

8

Click Create to add the account.

9

Close the Computer Management dialog box.

To configure DCOM security

244

1

Press the Windows key+R. The Run dialog box opens.

2

Type dcomcnfg and click OK to open the Component Services window.

3

Expand the Component Service item, then expand the Computers item.

4

Right-click My Computer and then choose Properties.

5

Click the COM Security tab.

6

Click Edit Default in the Access Permissions section.

7

Click Add and add the mngr account.

8

Repeat steps 6 and 7 for Edit Limits.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

SETTING UP A THIRD-PARTY OPC CLIENT OR SERVER

9

Click Edit Default in the Launch and Activation Permissions section.

10 Click Add and add the mngr account. 11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 for Edit Limits. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “System Design form” on page 15

245

11 – INSTALLING APPLICATIONS ON A CLIENT COMPUTER

Specifying the server name in Data Access applications When a data access application running on client computer requests data from the server, it must specify the appropriate server name. (In a redundant system, client computers see the two server names, for example: hsserva0 and hsservb0.) When to use the basename Use the basename (for example, hsserv) when specifying the server name in the following applications: •

An application (for Network API)

•

A workbook (for Microsoft Excel Data Exchange)

•

ODBC client application (for ODBC Client)

When to use the full name of the primary server Use the full name of the primary server (for example, hsserva0) when specifying the server name in the following applications: •

Quick Builder

•

Third-party OPC client communicating with an OPC server on the server computer

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

246

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

12

Setting up Integrated PhotoID hardware

This section is only applicable if you have licensed the Integrated PhotoID option. This section describes how to install and configure hardware used by Integrated PhotoID. The hardware must be installed on the computer that is used to capture portraits/ signatures. If you have a small system, you can install the hardware on the server. The procedures involve tasks that are performed in Station (which can only be performed after EBI has been installed). If necessary you can install the hardware, then install EBI, and finally perform the Station-based tasks. Prerequisites •

Relevant hardware.

Tasks Task If applicable, set up a live video capture card.

Done? page 248

If applicable, set up a graphics tablet. If applicable, set up a TWAIN-compatible capture device. page 255

247

12 – SETTING UP INTEGRATED PHOTOID HARDWARE

Setting up a FlashPoint card Prerequisites •

Supported FlashPoint card.

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order.

248

Task

Go to:

Install the card.

page 249

Install the FlashPoint MCI driver.

page 250

Configure station.ini.

page 252

Configure Integrated PhotoID to use the card.

page 254

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done?

SETTING UP A FLASHPOINT CARD

Installing the FlashPoint card To install the card 1

Install the card in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

2

Install the software supplied with the card accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

3

Check the installation by plugging in a camera, and running the supplied video application, fpg32. See the manufacturer’s documentation for guidance.

249

12 – SETTING UP INTEGRATED PHOTOID HARDWARE

Installing the FlashPoint MCI driver Attention You must install and setup your FlashPoint card before installing the FlashPoint MCI driver.

To install the FlashPoint MCI driver 1

Choose Start > Control Panel and click Hardware and Sound.

2

Click Device Manager.

3

Right-click the computer name (the root node) and choose Add legacy hardware.

4

When the Add Hardware wizard starts, click Next to continue.

5

Click Install the hardware that I manually select from a list and click Next.

6

Click Sound, video and game controllers in the Common Hardware Types list and click Next.

7

Click Have disk.

8

Browse to flashpt\fpvmci\mcint (or fp3d\mci\nt if installing a FlashPoint 3D card).

9

Select oemsetup and click Open.

10 Click OK. 11 Answer Yes to dialog boxes concerning digital signatures. 12 Select (MCI) FlashPoint MCI Driver (NT) or (MCI) FlashPoint 3D MCI Driver (NT) when installing FlashPoint 3D card from the list of models in the Select a Device Driver dialog box.

13 Click Next twice. 14 Answer Yes to dialog boxes concerning digital signatures. 15 If requested, from the Files Needed dialog box, browse to flashpt\fpvmci\ mcint

(or fp3d\mci\nt if installing FlashPoint 3D card).

16 Select mcifpv32.dll (or mcif3d32.dll for FlashPoint 3D) and click Open. 17 Click OK. 18 A dialog box with the current MCI setup is displayed. Select the settings as

shown below.

250

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

SETTING UP A FLASHPOINT CARD

19 Click Finish. 20 Restart the computer by clicking Yes when prompted. 21 Click OK in the FlashPoint MCI Setup dialog box. 22 Click OK in the Multimedia Properties dialog box.

251

12 – SETTING UP INTEGRATED PHOTOID HARDWARE

Configuring station.ini You must configure station.ini to optimize the performance of the card. To configure the file 1

Choose Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.

2

Open station.ini by typing the following command at the c:\> prompt: notepad %SystemRoot%\station.ini

3

Find the [Video Overlay] section, which contains entries that define the appearance of the video overlay on screen and when printed.

4

Modify the following entries as appropriate.

Entry

Description

alias

The internal alias for the overlay device used by the video object. It used in hardware-specific capture commands, and must be used consistently in station.ini to ensure that printing works correctly.

capture_file

The name of the file used to store an immediate image during printing.

set_source

Specifies whether the video source rectangle is set to the size of the video object. The default value is 0. See the manufacturer’s documentation for a description.

set_frame

Specifies whether the video frame rectangle is set to the size of the video object. The default values is 0.

set_windowmode

Specifies size of the video frame within the available window. For FlashPoint 3DX and Flashbus cards choose one of the following values:

•

0

= stretch mode (enabled) - video frame is scaled to parent window.

•

2

= fixed mode (disabled) - video frame is resized to a specified scale.

For FlashPoint 4XL Lite cards choose one of the following values:

•

1 = stretch to a rectangle mode (enabled) - video

frame is scaled to parent window. •

252

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

= fixed to a rectangle mode (disabled) - video frame is resized to a specified scale.

3

SETTING UP A FLASHPOINT CARD

Entry

Description

set_handle

Enables or disables the ability to set the window handle (ID) to the MCI device driver. The default value is 1 (enabled). For FlashPoint 4XL Lite cards, this feature must be disabled (set to 0).

open_command

Opens a connection to the MCI device driver. The default value is: open overlay alias %s parent %d

For FlashPoint 4XL Lite cards, set value to: open overlay alias %s parent %d style child clipboard_command1 clipboard_command2

The MCI command strings used to capture the video frame buffer as a Windows Device Independent Bitmap (DIB). See the manufacturer’s documentation for details about capturing a frame buffer as a DIB. The capture commands must use the values specified for overlay_alias and capture_file for printing to work correctly.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

253

12 – SETTING UP INTEGRATED PHOTOID HARDWARE

Configuring Integrated PhotoID to use the card To configure PhotoID

254

1

In Station, choose Configure > Cardholder Management > Configuration > Image Capture Settings to call up the Image Capture Setup display.

2

Select the appropriate options. For details, see “Configuring Integrated PhotoID for controllers” in the relevant Access Control Configuration Guide.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

SETTING UP A TWAIN IMAGE CAPTURE DEVICE

Setting up a TWAIN image capture device The following procedure describes how to install a typical TWAIN-compatible device, in this case a Kodak DC265 digital camera. (Each TWAIN-compatible device has its own installation procedure, which is described in manufacturer’s documentation.) Setting up a TWAIN-compatible capture device involves installing the device, and then configuring Integrated PhotoID to use that device. Prerequisites •

Digital camera or other TWAIN-compatible image capture device.

To set up the Kodak DC265 camera 1

Insert the CD supplied with the camera into the CD-ROM drive and run setup.exe to install the camera’s software.

2

Select the appropriate language when prompted.

3

Select Install DC265 Software.

4

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. Ensure that the Digital Access (TWAIN acquire) component is selected.

5

The setup program automatically invokes installation of the Picture Easy Software. Follow the on-screen instructions.

6

Shutdown your computer and connect the digital camera.

7

Start the DC265 Properties program, and configure the camera so that it can communicate with the computer. Select the appropriate baud rate and communications port.

8

The digital camera is now installed.

To configure PhotoID 1

In Station, choose Configure > Cardholder Management > Configuration > Image Capture Settings to call up the Image Capture Setup display.

2

Set Image Capture Source for Signature to TWAIN.

3

A TWAIN Source drop down list appears. Click Kodak DC265. For other configuration details, see “Configuring Integrated PhotoID for controllers” in the relevant Access Control Configuration Guide.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

255

12 – SETTING UP INTEGRATED PHOTOID HARDWARE

Setting up signature capture pads The following procedure describes how to install an ePad Ink or Topaz SigLite signature pad. Note that although the image capture settings option is Wintab, these devices no longer interface with EBI software using the Wintab API. Prerequisites •

ePad Ink or Topaz SigLite signature pad

To set up the signature pad 1

Insert the CD supplied with the device into the CD-ROM drive.

2

Install the vendor’s software.

To configure PhotoID

256

1

In Station, choose Configure > Cardholder Management > Configuration > Image Capture Settings to call up the Image Capture Setup display.

2

Set Image Capture Source for Signature to Wintab.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Installing point server components on a remote server

13

This section describes how to install point server components on a remote server, that is, a computer other than the EBI server computer. The EBI installation wizard allows you to install other applications, such as Quick Builder, which are not required by the point server. However, you can install them if convenient. Attention Only complete a task in this section if you are instructed to do so by the appropriate checklist.

Prerequisites •

You have licensed a point server.

•

The System Design form

•

You have the EBI license.

•

You have the EBI DVD.

•

You must be logged on as a Windows administrator.

To install the point server components 1

If you have not already done so, set the system date and time so that it is the same as on the EBI server.

2

Close any applications that are running.

3

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically displays. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

4

Click Installation. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 page appears.

257

13 – INSTALLING POINT SERVER COMPONENTS ON A REMOTE SERVER

5

Click Next to continue. The Setup Type page appears.

6

Click Enterprise Buildings Integrator point server. The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any critical issues must be resolved before installation can proceed.

7

Click Next to continue.

8

When prompted, type your EBI software license details and click Next.

9

Click Typical Install to install all components available with the license.

10 Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell.

If you want to change the base installation directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next. 11 Select the point server(s) you want to install and click Next. 12 Type the password for the Windows mngr account in the Password box, as

specified in the System Design form. Confirm the password by typing it again in the Confirm Password box and then click Next. 13 Enter the EBI server name and click Next to continue. 14 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Install to start the

installation of the point server applications. 15 When the installation is complete, click Finish. You will be prompted to

restart your computer. Click Yes to restart. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “System Design form” on page 15

258

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Installing Mobile Station Server

14

This section describes how to install Mobile Station Server. Attention Only complete a task in this section if you are instructed to do so by the “Installation checklist: Mobile Station server”.

Related topics “Installation checklist: Mobile Station server” on page 46

259

14 – INSTALLING MOBILE STATION SERVER

Installing Terminal Services Mobile Station Server requires a Microsoft Terminal Services Licensing Server. If your organization already has a Microsoft Terminal Services Licensing Server, you can use this server to assign Client Access Licenses (CALs) to handheld devices. In this situation, do not install the Terminal Services Licensing option. Prerequisites •

Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2003 CDs or DVD.

•

Station has been installed on the computer.

To install Terminal Services on Windows Server 2008 1

Choose Start > Administrative Tools > Server Manager.

2

In the left pane, right-click Roles and choose Add Role. The Add Roles wizard starts.

3

If the Before you begin page appears, click Next.

4

In the list of roles, select Terminal Services check box.

5

If you require a Microsoft Terminal Services Licensing Server, select Terminal Services Licensing.

6

Click Next.

7

Click Next when the warning message appears.

8

Select Full or Relaxed security.

9

If prompted, click Next to accept the default Licensing server database installation path.

10 When prompted, insert the Windows Server 2008 disc into the CD or DVD

drive. Terminal Server is installed. 11 Click Finish to complete the installation. 12 Click Yes to restart the computer. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

To install Terminal Services on Windows Server 2003

260

1

In Windows Control Panel, open Add or Remove Programs.

2

Click Add/Remove Windows Components.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING TERMINAL SERVICES

3

Select Terminal Services.

4

If you do not already have a Microsoft Terminal Services Licensing Server, select Terminal Services Licensing.

5

Click Next.

6

Click Next when the warning message appears.

7

Select Full or Relaxed security.

8

If prompted, click Next to accept the default Licensing server database installation path.

9

When prompted, insert the Windows Server 2003 disc into the CD or DVD drive. Terminal Server is installed.

10 Click Finish to complete the installation. 11 Click Yes to restart the computer. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

261

14 – INSTALLING MOBILE STATION SERVER

Activating Terminal Services Licensing server If you installed the Terminal Services Licensing server, you need to activate it. If you do not have an Internet connection, you must activate the Terminal Services Licensing server by telephone. You do not need to purchase an activation key for the Terminal Services Licensing server. Prerequisites •

Installed a Terminal Services Licensing Server.

•

To activate the Terminal Services Licensing server using the Internet, you must already be connected to the Internet before starting.

To activate the Terminal Services Licensing server using the Internet on Windows Server 2008 1

Choose Start > Administrative Tools > Terminal Services > TS Licensing Manager.

2

Expand the All Servers item.

3

Right-click on the computer’s name item, and choose Activate Server. The Activate Server Wizard starts.

4

Click Next.

5

From the Connection Method list, click Web Browser and click Next. The wizard contacts the Microsoft Activation Server (you must be connected to the internet to use this method)

6

Click the hyperlink to go to the Terminal Server Licensing web site.

7

On the Windows Terminal Services web site, under Select Option, click Activate a license server and click Next.

8

When prompted, enter all the appropriate details and click Next. The license server ID appears.

9

In the Activate Server Wizard, type the license server ID and click Next.

10 To install CALs later, clear the Start Install Licenses Wizard now check box

and click Finish. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

262

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

ACTIVATING TERMINAL SERVICES LICENSING SERVER

To activate the Terminal Services Licensing server by telephone on Windows Server 2008 1

Choose Start > Administrative Tools > Terminal Services > TS Licensing Manager.

2

Expand the All Servers item.

3

Right-click on the computer’s name item, and choose Activate Server. The Activate Server Wizard starts.

4

Click Next.

5

From the Connection Method list, click Telephone and click Next.

6

Select your country in the country list and then click Next. The telephone number to call is displayed on the screen.

7

Call the telephone number displayed. A Microsoft representative will provide you with a license server ID.

8

In the Activate Server Wizard, type the license server ID and click Next.

9

To install CALs later, clear the Start Install Licenses Wizard now check box and click Finish.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

To activate the Terminal Services Licensing server using the internet on Windows Server 2003 1

Choose Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Terminal Services Licensing.

2

Expand the All Servers item.

3

Right-click on the computer’s name item, and choose Activate Server.

4

Confirm that the displayed product ID is correct, and then click Next.

5

Select Internet in the method of activation list. The wizard contacts the Microsoft Activation Server (you must be connected to the internet to use this method)

6

When prompted, enter all the appropriate details. Ensure your email address is correct as you will need to receive an email to this address containing the PIN.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

263

14 – INSTALLING MOBILE STATION SERVER

To activate the Terminal Services Licensing server by telephone 1

Choose Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Terminal Services Licensing.

2

Expand the All Servers item.

3

Right-click on the computer’s name item, and choose Activate Server.

4

Confirm that the displayed product ID is correct and then click Next.

5

Select Telephone in the method of activation list.

6

Select your country in the country list and then click Next. The telephone number to call is displayed on the screen.

7

Call the telephone number displayed. A Microsoft representative will provide you with a license server identification number and will guide you through the rest of the installation procedure.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

264

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

INSTALLING THE CLIENT ACCESS LICENSES

Installing the Client Access Licenses This section describes how to install the Client Access Licenses on the Terminal Services Licensing server. Prerequisites •

Installed and activated a Terminal Services Licensing Server.

•

You have the required Client Access Licenses (CALs) for Terminal Services, which is an authorization key. You received this authorization key when you purchased CALs from Honeywell, or another vendor.

•

To install the Client Access Licenses using the Internet, you must already be connected to the Internet before starting.

To install Microsoft Select Agreement Client Access Licenses using the Internet 1

Choose Start > Administrative Tools > Terminal Services > TS Licensing Manager.

2

Right-click the Terminal Services licensing server and choose Properties.

3

Click the Connection Method tab and from the Connection method list click Web Browser.

4

Click OK.

5

Expand the All Servers item.

6

Right-click on the Terminal Services Licensing server’s name item, and choose Install Licenses.

7

Click Next.

8

Click the link to connect to the Terminal Server Licensing web site.

9

On the Windows Terminal Services web site, under Select Option, click Install Client Access License tokens and click Next.

10 Type the License Server ID. 11 From the License Program list, click the appropriate option. 12 Type the remaining details and click Next. 13 When prompted type the license code or agreement number and specify the

type and number of CALs and click Next. 14 Verify the information you have provided is correct and click Next.

A license key pack ID is generated. 15 Return to the Install licenses wizard and enter the license key pack ID and

click Next.

265

14 – INSTALLING MOBILE STATION SERVER

16 Click Finish.

To install the Client Access Licenses by telephone 1

Choose Start > Administrative Tools > Terminal Services > TS Licensing Manager.

2

Right-click on the Terminal Services Licensing server’s name item, and choose Properties.

3

Click the Connection Method tab.

4

Select Telephone in the Connection method list and then click OK.

5

Expand the All Servers item.

6

Right-click on the Terminal Services Licensing server’s name item, and choose Install Licenses.

7

When prompted for the connection method, click Next.

8

Select your country in the country list and then click Next. The telephone number to call is displayed on the screen.

9

Call the telephone number displayed. A Microsoft representative will provide you with an additional authorization key.

10 Type the authorization key and then click Next. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

266

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING MOBILE STATION SERVER TO ACCESS AN EXISTING TERMINAL SERVICES LICENSING

Configuring Mobile Station server to access an existing Terminal Services Licensing server This section describes how to configure the Mobile Station Server to access an existing Terminal Services Licensing server where the CALs are installed. To access an existing Terminal Services Licensing Server, you need to edit the registry. Caution Incorrectly editing the registry may severely damage your system. Before making changes to the registry, you must back up any valued data on your computer.

Prerequisites •

The name or IP address of the existing Terminal Services Licensing Server.

To access an existing Terminal Services Licensing server 1

On the Mobile Station Server, choose Start > Run.

2

Type regedit.

3

Click OK.

4

Browse to the following key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\ TermService\Parameters

5

Choose Edit > New > String Value.

6

Type DefaultLicenseServer.

7

Double-click the DefaultLicenseServer key you created.

8

Type the name or IP address of the Terminal Services Licensing server in the Value Data text box.

9

Click OK.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

267

14 – INSTALLING MOBILE STATION SERVER

Limiting the number of connections to the Mobile Station server This section describes how to limits the number of users that can access the Mobile Station Server. To limit the number of connections to the Mobile Station Server 1

Choose Start > Administrative Tools > Terminal Services > Terminal Services Configuration.

2

Right-click on the RDP-TCP connection item and choose Properties.

3

Click the Network Adapter tab.

4

Select Maximum connections and set the number of connections to 5.

5

Click OK.

6

Exit the Terminal Services Configuration application.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

268

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CREATING WINDOWS ACCOUNTS FOR MOBILE STATION SERVER USERS

Creating Windows accounts for Mobile Station server users You must create a Windows account on the Mobile Station Server for each user who connects to the Mobile Station Server. To create an account 1

Log on to the Mobile Station Server as a Windows administrator.

2

Click Start, right-click Computer and choose Manage.

3

Expand Configuration and then expand the Local Users and Groups item.

4

Right-click on the Users items and choose New User.

5

Type the User Name, Full Name, Description, and Password of the user.

6

Select Password never expires.

7

Click Create.

8

Repeat steps 4 to 7 for each user.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

269

14 – INSTALLING MOBILE STATION SERVER

Configuring Mobile Access for Station users This section describes how to configure Mobile Access for Station users to start Station when they log on to the Mobile Station Server. Prerequisites •

A .stn file has been configured for each EBI server to access. For instructions on creating a .stn file, see “Configuring Mobile Station” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

To configure the Mobile Access for Station users 1

Log on to the Mobile Station Server as a Windows administrator.

2

Click Start, right-click Computer and choose Manage.

3

Expand Configuration and then expand the Local Users and Groups item.

4

Right-click on a Mobile Station user and choose Properties.

5

Click the Environment tab.

6

Select Start the following program at logon.

7

Type the full path to the station.exe file, enclosed in quotation marks, followed by the full path to the custom .stn file created when configuring Mobile Access for Station, also enclosed in quotation marks. For example: “C:\Program Files\Honeywell\client\station\station.exe” “C:\ Program Files\Honeywell\client\station\mobilestation.stn”

where mobilestation.stn is the custom .stn file that you have configured and is located in the C:\Program Files\Honeywell\client\station folder. 8

Click Apply.

9

Click the Sessions tab.

10 Select 1 minute in the End a disconnected session list. 11 Click Apply and then click Close. 12 Repeat steps 4 to 11 for each Mobile Station Server user. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

270

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Installing a terminal server

15

This section describes how to install a terminal server. Compared with a direct serial connection, connecting a device via a terminal server reduces maximum data throughput by 30-40%. If data throughput is of concern, see “Installing a serial adapter”. If you have problems, see “Terminal server problems”. Note that DHCP is not supported in EBI R410. Prerequisites •

A terminal server qualified for use with EBI.

To install a:

Go to:

Stallion EasyServer II

page 272

Lantronix

page 292

Cisco 2610 Router

page 307

Systech RCS-3282 or RCS-6008

page 325

Related topics “Installing a serial adapter” on page 153 “Terminal server problems” on page 428

271

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Configuring an EasyServer II This section describes how to configure an EasyServer II so that the server can communicate with devices, such as controllers, connected to its serial ports. If you have problems, see “Terminal server problems”. Prerequisites •

A computer to configure the EasyServer II. It must be loaded with Windows HyperTerminal, the configuration application. Note that HyperTerminal is no longer provided with Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008. You should refer to the manufacturer’s documentation to find out how to configure your terminal server without using HyperTerminal.

•

The computer must not be running any application that uses the COM1 port.

•

A serial cable, as shown in the following figure, to connect the computer to the EasyServer II. Figure 5 Computer-to-EasyServer II Connections EasyServer II RJ45

Chassis Ground RxD TxD DCD Signal Ground DTR RTS CTS

3 5 4 1 6 8 2 7

Configuration Computer Female DB9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

DCD / RLSD RxD TxD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS RI

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Make a copy of this checklist before starting, so that you can easily keep track of where you are in the installation process. Task

Go to

Reset the EasyServer II to its factory settings. (Only applicable if you are performing a complete install.)

page 274

Connect a configuration computer to the EasyServer II, so page 275 that you can configure it. Specify the IP address of the EasyServer II. 272

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

page 276

Done

CONFIGURING AN EASYSERVER II

Task

Go to

Configure the EasyServer II.

page 278

Add the IP address the server’s hosts file.

page 288

Connect controllers as required.

page 289

Done

Related topics “Terminal server problems” on page 428

273

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Resetting the EasyServer II If you are performing a complete install of the EasyServer II, you must reset it to restore all settings to their factory defaults and erase the TCP/IP address. To reset the EasyServer II

274

1

Check that it is turned on.

2

Insert a straightened paper clip or similar blunt item into the opening labeled: •

On an 8 port, RESET and press lightly.

•

On a 16 port, ERASE and press lightly.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING AN EASYSERVER II

Connecting the configuration computer to EasyServer II To connect the computer 1

Connect a serial cable between COM1 port of the computer and Port 1 of the EasyServer II.

2

On the computer, start Microsoft Windows HyperTerminal by choosing Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > HyperTerminal.

3

In the Connection Description dialog box, type the Name of the EasyServer II connection, select an icon, and then click OK to see the Connect To dialog box.

4

Complete the Connect To dialog box, setting Connect Using to COM1 or COM2, then click OK.

5

Set the COM1 or COM2 Port values as follows:

Parameter

Value

Baud Rate

9600

Data Bits

8

Parity

None

Stop Bits

1

Flow Control

XON/XOFF

6

Press ENTER several times in the HyperTerminal window until the EasyServer II responds with a prompt. When you see the prompt, you are ready specify the EasyServer II’s IP address. If you have trouble getting a prompt, see “Terminal server problems”.

Related topics “Terminal server problems” on page 428

275

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Specifying the IP address of the EasyServer II You specify the IP address of the EasyServer II using HyperTerminal. Attention If you type an incorrect character while typing a command in HyperTerminal, press CTRL+D to backspace. (The BACKSPACE key does not work as expected when entering commands in HyperTerminal.)

To specify the IP address 1

Check that something similar to the following appears at the HyperTerminal prompt. (This is an example of an EasyServer II 8 port display.) If this does not appear, switch off the EasyServer II, wait 10 seconds, turn it back on and start your connection again (see “Connecting the configuration computer”). Stallion Technologies, EasyServer II ESII-8 Copyright (c) 1996 Stallion Technologies Pty. Ltd., All Rights Reserved. Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1988 Regents of the University of California.

ESII-8 Communications Server V5.1.1

Ethernet: Name:

Uptime:

00-60-1f-00-16-a8 ESII_00601F0016A8

Internet: Number:

0:00:01

0.0.0.0 0

Determining IP address from network... Requesting BOOTP: No valid response. Requesting RARP: No valid response. Server is unable to determine internet address from network. To manually enter the address, press RETURN key a few times now. Otherwise server will retry BOOTP and RARP in two minutes. Server will retry BOOTP and RARP if nothing entered in two minutes.

2

Press ENTER several times (five times is usually enough) until you are prompted to enter the Internet address.

3

To set the IP address: •

276

For an 8 port, type the following command:

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING AN EASYSERVER II

a.b.c.d [subnet mask m.n.o.p]

where: •

a.b.c.d is the IP address

•

m.n.o.p is its subnet mask. Note that the subnet mask will default to

appropriate values if left blank. You are greeted with the prompt: ESII-8 Communications Server is ready.

•

For a 16 port, type the following command:

a.b.c.d

where a.b.c.d is the IP address. You are then prompted for the subnet. [subnet mask m.n.o.p]

where m.n.o.p is its subnet mask. Note that the subnet mask will default to appropriate values if left blank. You are greeted with the prompt similar to this: ESII-8 Communications Server is ready.

4

Press ENTER several times (five times is usually enough) until the EasyServer II responds with the prompt: Enter username:

5

Type a username, which can be anything you like, for example, root.

6

To disconnect from the terminal session, type Logout. You do not have to save the HyperTerminal session.

7

Close HyperTerminal.

Related topics “Connecting the configuration computer to EasyServer II” on page 275

277

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Setting up a Telnet session to configure EasyServer II You configure the EasyServer II via a Telnet session. Unless the Stallion and the computer you are running Telnet from are on the same network, you will not be able to connect to the Stallion. If they are not on the same network, you need to configure the internet gateway on the Stallion using HyperTerminal, with a COM port connection. To set up a Telnet session 1

Choose Start > Run to open the Run dialog box.

2

Type telnet a.b.c.d where a.b.c.d is the IP address of the EasyServer II.

3

Click OK.

4

Press ENTER several times (five times is usually enough) in the Telnet window until the EasyServer II responds with the prompt: Enter username:

5

Type a username, which can be anything you like, for example: root.

6

At the Local n> prompt, type set privileged This changes your security level to system security level, which is required to configure the EasyServer II.

7

At the Privilege password prompt, type system (the system password). Note the double angle brackets “>>”, which indicate privileged mode. (You can change this password using the set server privileged password command.)

8

Configure the EasyServer II by typing the appropriate configuration commands:

9

•

If the EasyServer II is connected to the EBI server via a router/gateway, specify its address

•

Configure the Ethernet Interface

•

Configure the TCP ports

•

Specify the inactivity timeout

•

Configure the TCP keepalive timer

•

Configure each serial port

When you have finished, type logout to end the Telnet session.

Related topics “Specifying a router/gateway address (EasyServer II)” on page 280

278

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING AN EASYSERVER II

“Configuring the Ethernet interface (EasyServer II)” on page 281 “Configuring TCP port numbers (EasyServer II)” on page 282 “Specifying the EasyServer II’s inactivity timeout” on page 283 “Configuring the EasyServer II’s TCP keepalive timer” on page 284 “Configuring a serial port (EasyServer II)” on page 285

279

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Specifying a router/gateway address (EasyServer II) If the EasyServer II is connected to the server via a router/gateway, you must specify its IP address. You must perform this procedure even though the EasyServer II automatically detects routers. (It may appear to function correctly if you do not perform this procedure, but its operation will be unreliable and might cause channels to fail.) To specify the address 1

Type change internet gateway i.j.k.l network any where i.j.k.l is the IP address of the router. If you have a redundant server system in which the servers are in different domains (because they are physically separated), you must issue the command twice, once for each server IP.

To see the current address 1

280

Type show internet gateway If you have a redundant server system in which the servers are in different domains (because they are physically separated), you must issue the command twice, once for each server IP.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING AN EASYSERVER II

Configuring the Ethernet interface (EasyServer II) The Stallion EasyServer II does not auto-detect the type of attached Ethernet cable after restarting, unless the terminal server sends data to the interface. You must identify the Ethernet interface and configure EasyServer II. To configure the Ethernet interface 1

Type change ethernet mode mode_type where:

Part

Description

mode_type

Either: • AUI (the 10Base-2/BNC port) • UTP (the 10Base-T/UTP port)

281

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Configuring TCP port numbers (EasyServer II) The server communicates with the EasyServer II serial ports via TCP/IP, using TCP port numbers, which can be between 2001 and 2032. The EasyServer II uses a Telnet listener, which only accepts connections if the TCP port number is specified. To configure a port 1

Type the following commands: change telnet listener tcp_port ports n enabled change telnet listener tcp_port identification “text_string” change telnet listener tcp_port connections enabled change telnet listener tcp_port raw mode enabled

where: Part

Description

tcp_port

The number of the TCP port, between 2001 and 2032.

n

The number of the serial port.

text_string

Port identification string, such as port_2.

To see which TCP port numbers are mapped to serial ports 1

Type the following command: show telnet listener

Example

These commands set up a Telnet listener on logical port 2003 and map to serial port 3. change change change change

282

telnet telnet telnet telnet

listener listener listener listener

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

2003 2003 2003 2003

ports 3 enabled identification “Port_3” connections enabled raw mode enabled

CONFIGURING AN EASYSERVER II

Specifying the EasyServer II’s inactivity timeout Honeywell strongly recommends that you specify an inactivity timeout for the EasyServer II. If the EasyServer II sees no communication on a particular serial port within the timeout period, it disconnects the connection between that port and the server. To set the inactivity timeout 1

Type change server inactivity timer m where m is the inactivity timeout in minutes (an integer value, typically set to 1)

2

Check that you have set the correct timeout period by typing show server

3

Enable inactivity timeout for all ports by typing: change port all inactivity logout enabled

4

Check that you have enabled inactivity timeout by typing: show port n characteristics

where n is a port number.

283

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Configuring the EasyServer II’s TCP keepalive timer If you have a redundant server system, you must configure the TCP keepalive timer so that the backup server can connect to the EasyServer II if the server acting as primary fails. The keepalive timer ensures that the EasyServer II automatically disconnects and frees a connection to a port if it loses communication with the server, for example, if the server or the network connection fails. If the keepalive time expires, the EasyServer II sends several keepalive packets to the server. (The interval between these keepalive packets is the greater of 2 seconds and the keepalive time/96.) If the server does not respond, the EasyServer II assumes that the connection has been broken and allows the backup server to establish a connection. The following table shows the recommended settings for three sample redundant server configurations. Redundant server configuration

Keepalive time (s) Keepalive packets

Normal failover communicating with an EasyServer II on a high speed LAN

10

8

Fast failover communicating with an EasyServer 5 II on a high speed LAN

3

Normal or fast failover communicating with an EasyServer II on low speed WAN

8

20

To configure keepalive timer

284

1

Type change internet keepalive timer seconds s where s is the keepalive time in seconds (an integer value).

2

Type change internet keepalive count c where c is the number of keepalive packets

3

Check that you have set the correct values by typing show internet

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING AN EASYSERVER II

Configuring a serial port (EasyServer II) You must configure the characteristics (baud rate, parity and so on) of each serial port so that it can communicate with the device to which is attached. Prerequisites •

The port must not have a connection with the server. If it has a connection, disconnect it by typing logout port n where n is the port number.

To view the port’s current settings 1

Type show port n where n is the serial port number.

To configure a port 1

Type the following command: change port [all|n] parameter

where: Part

Description

all|n

The port(s) being configured. Use all if you are changing all ports. Alternatively, specify the port number or range of numbers, for example 1, or 1-5.

parameter

The parameter being configured, as shown in “Port parameters”. You can only specify one parameter at a time, as shown in the following example.

EasyServer II port parameters The following table lists the values for the main parameters. See the Stallion EasyServer II Installation and Reference Guide for information about other port parameters, such as broadcast and lock. Parameter

Values

access

remote (Permits access by remote connection requests, and denies access by local logons.)

autobaud

disabled enabled

285

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Parameter

Values

broadcast

disabled (disallows message reception) enabled

command completion

disabled enabled

flow control

disabled cts xon

lock

disabled enabled

loss notification

disabled enabled

message codes

disabled enabled

parity

none odd even mark space

speed

BaudRate

stop bits

1 2 dynamic

verification

disabled enabled

Example

These commands configure serial port 3. change change change change change change change change change change change

286

port port port port port port port port port port port

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

speed 9600 stop bits 1 parity none flow control disabled access remote autobaud disabled broadcast disabled lock disabled loss notification disabled message codes disable command completion disabled

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING AN EASYSERVER II

change port 3 verification disabled

Related topics “EasyServer II port parameters” on page 285

287

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Adding the EasyServer II IP address to the server’s hosts file You must add the IP address and name of the EasyServer II to the server’s hosts file. To add the IP address 1

Choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt to open a Command Prompt window.

2

At the c:\> prompt, change to the folder for the hosts file: cd /d %windir%\system32\drivers\etc

3

Open the hosts file by typing: notepad hosts

4

Move to the last line and type a.b.c.d terminal_server_name where: •

a.b.c.d is the IP address

•

terminal_server_name is the TCP Host Name. (You must specify this

name in Quick Builder when configuring a controller that is connected to this EasyServer II.) For example, the new line may look like this: 192.168.0.84 esii

5

After editing the server’s hosts file, it is recommended you confirm that the computer can resolve the name that you have added.

To confirm the change 1

Choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt to open a Command Prompt window.

2

At the c:\> prompt, type ping terminal_server_name where terminal_server_name is the TCP Host Name which you added to the hosts file. For example, the new line may look like this: ping esii

288

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING AN EASYSERVER II

Connecting controllers to an EasyServer II This section provides general instructions on connecting controllers to an EasyServer II. Note that you must also read the appropriate Controller References to see if there are any specific restrictions applicable to the controllers you want to connect. Cabling The following figure shows a no-handshaking, RS-232 cable, suitable for connecting most controllers to an EasyServer II. Figure 6 Typical RS-232 Controller-to-EasyServer II Connections

Controller DB9 DB25 3 TxD 2 2 RxD 3 5 Signal Ground 7 6 DSR 6 4 DTR 20 1 DCD 8 7 RTS 4 8 CTS 5

Easy Server II RJ45 Plug TxD 4 RxD 5 Signal Ground 6 RTS 2 CTS 7 DTR 8 DCD 1

Configuring the port in Quick Builder You use Quick Builder to configure each controller that is connected to the EasyServer II. The following properties (Port tab) are specific to an EasyServer II. Property

Description

Port Type

Select Terminal Server.

Terminal Server TCP Host Name The name you defined in the server’s hosts file for the EasyServer II to which the controller is connected. See “Adding the IP address to the server’s hosts file”. If you haven’t added the terminal server’s details to the hosts file, you can type its IP address. Terminal Server TCP Port No

The number of the TCP port to which the controller is connected. For example, if the controller is connected to serial port 2, and that is mapped to TCP port 2003, you would type 2003. See “Configuring TCP port numbers”.

289

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Property

Description

Idle Timeout

Leave at 180 sec.

Related topics “Adding the EasyServer II IP address to the server’s hosts file” on page 288 “Configuring TCP port numbers (EasyServer II)” on page 282

290

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING AN EASYSERVER II

Changing the EasyServer II’s TCP/IP address If you ever reconfigure your network, you have to define the EasyServer II’s new TCP/IP address. To change the TCP/IP address 1

Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the EasyServer II to ensure that there are no current connections.

2

Change the IP address by typing: define internet address a.b.c.d [subnet mask m.n.o.p]

where: •

a.b.c.d is the IP address

•

m.n.o.p is its subnet mask. (The subnet mask will default to appropriate

values if left blank.) 3

Reinitialize the EasyServer II so that the new internet address takes effect by typing: initialize server delay 0

4

Reconnect the Ethernet cable.

5

Check the IP address by typing: show internet

291

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Configuring a Lantronix This section describes how to configure a Lantronix so that the server can communicate with devices, such as controllers, connected to its serial ports. If you have problems, see “Terminal server problems”. Prerequisites •

An existing TCP/IP network. The Lantronix terminal server must be connected to this network through the Ethernet port on the back panel of the Lantronix terminal server.

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Make a copy of this checklist before starting, so that you can easily keep track of where you are in the installation process. Task

Go to

Reset the Lantronix to its factory settings. (Only applicable if you are performing a complete install.)

page 293

Specify the IP address of the Lantronix.

page 294

Specify the gateway address.

page 297

Configure the TCP ports.

page 298

Set the inactivity timeout.

page 299

Set the TCP keep alive timer.

page 300

Configure the serial ports.

page 301

Add the IP address the server’s hosts file.

page 303

Connect controllers as required.

page 304

Related topics “Terminal server problems” on page 428

292

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done

CONFIGURING A LANTRONIX

Resetting the Lantronix If you are performing a complete install of the Lantronix, you must reset it to restore all settings to their factory defaults and erase the TCP/IP address. To reset the Lantronix 1

Check that the Lantronix terminal server is turned off.

2

Press and hold down the Test or Reset button on the front panel, turn on the power while holding-down the button for five seconds.

3

If you have a BOOTP or RARP server on your network, the Lantronix terminal server will attempt to obtain an TCP/IP address and network configuration details. This may take up to 15 seconds.

4

If you do not have a BOOTP, or RARP server on your network, or if you want to assign a permanent IP address to the Lantronix terminal server, follow the instructions in “Specifying the IP address”.

Related topics “Specifying the Lantronix’s IP address” on page 294

293

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Specifying the Lantronix’s IP address You specify the Lantronix’s IP address in a Command Prompt window. There must be more than one IP address, other than the IP address of the current computer, defined in the address resolution protocol (APR) table. Instructions for viewing the APR table are in the following steps. Prerequisites •

A TCP/IP address to assign to the Lantronix terminal server.

•

The MAC address of the Lantronix terminal server. This address is printed on the label attached to the back panel of the Lantronix terminal servers. The MAC address is in the format, 00-80-A3-xx-xx-xx, where xx is number and letter combinations.

To specify the IP address

294

1

Choose Start > Run to display the Run dialog box.

2

Type cmd in the Open box, and then press OK to open a Command Prompt window.

3

To view the APR table, type arp -A. There must be more than one IP address, other than the IP address of the current computer, defined.

4

Type arp -S ip_address mac_address where: •

ip_address is the IP address to assign to the Lantronix terminal server, for example, 192.168.0.10.

•

mac_address is the MAC address of the Lantronix terminal server, in the format 00-80-A3-xx-xx-xx.

5

To test the network connection to the terminal server, type ping ip_address where ip_address is the IP address assigned to the Lantronix terminal server, for example, 192.168.0.10. The IP address is currently assigned temporarily to the Lantronix terminal server. You must permanently assign the IP address.

6

Type telnet ip_address where ip_address is the IP address assigned to the Lantronix terminal server, for example, 192.168.0.10.

7

Type gopher at the Enter Username prompt.

8

Type SET PRIVILEGED.

9

Type password at the Password prompt. This password is not echoed on screen.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A LANTRONIX

10 Type DEFINE IPADDRESS ip_address

where ip_address is the IP address assigned to the Lantronix terminal server, for example, 192.168.0.10. 11 To initialize the server for these changes to take affect, type INITIALIZE SERVER DELAY 0.

12 Set the TCP keepalive timeout.

Related topics “Setting the Lantronix’s TCP keepalive timer” on page 300

295

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Setting up a Telnet session to configure a Lantronix You configure the Lantronix using a Telnet session. To set up a Telnet session

296

1

Choose Start > Run to display the Run dialog box.

2

In the Open box, type telnet ip_address where ip_address is the IP address assigned to the Lantronix terminal server, for example, 192.168.0.10

3

Click OK to start the Telnet session.

4

Type gopher at the Enter Username prompt. You need to change your security level to the system security level so that you can configure the Lantronix.

5

Type SET PRIVILEGED.

6

Type password at the Password prompt. This password is not echoed on screen.

7

When you have finished, type logout to end the Telnet session.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A LANTRONIX

Specifying a gateway address (Lantronix) If the Lantronix is connected to the server through a gateway, you must specify its IP address. To specify the address 1

If required, start a Telnet connection to the Lantronix terminal server. See “Setting up a Telnet session”.

2

Type define server gateway ip_address where ip_address is the IP address assigned to the gateway.

3

If you have a redundant server system in which the servers are in different domains (because they are physically separated), you must type the following as well: define server secondary gateway ip_address

where ip_address is the IP address assigned to the gateway of the other domain. To see the current address 1

Type list server.

Related topics “Setting up a Telnet session to configure a Lantronix” on page 296

297

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Configuring TCP port numbers (Lantronix) The server communicates to devices connected to the Lantronix via TCP/IP using TCP port numbers, which can be any number between 4000 and 4999. The Lantronix terminal server, for services like Telnet, reserves other port numbers. You must also map the TCP port numbers to serial ports. To configure a port 1

If required, start a Telnet connection to the Lantronix terminal server. See “Setting up a Telnet session”.

2

Type: define service "service_name" tcpport tcp_port_number ports n

where: Part

Description

service_name

The port identification string, such as serport3.

tcp_port_number

The TCP port number, between 4000 and 4999.

n

The serial port number.

To check that you have correctly configured the TCP port 1

Example

Type list services service_name characteristics where service_name is the port identification string.

The following command creates a service with a TCP port number of 4003 mapped to serial port 3. define service "serport3" tcpport 4003 ports 3

Related topics “Setting up a Telnet session to configure a Lantronix” on page 296

298

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A LANTRONIX

Setting the Lantronix’s inactivity timeout It is strongly recommended that you specify an inactivity timeout for the Lantronix terminal server. If the Lantronix terminal server sees no communication on a particular serial port within the timeout period, it disconnects the connection between that port and the EBI server. To set the inactivity timeout 1

If required, start a Telnet connection to the Lantronix terminal server. See “Setting up a Telnet session”.

2

Type define server inactivity timer n where n is the inactivity timeout in minutes (an integer value, typically set to 2)

3

To check that you have set the correct timeout period, type show server.

4

To enable the inactivity timeout for all ports, type define port all inactivity logout enabled.

5

To check that you have enabled the inactivity timeout for all ports, type show port n

where n is the port number. Related topics “Setting up a Telnet session to configure a Lantronix” on page 296

299

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Setting the Lantronix’s TCP keepalive timer If you have a redundant server system, you must set the TCP keepalive timer so that the backup server can connect to the Lantronix if the primary server fails. The keepalive timer ensures that the Lantronix automatically disconnects and frees a connection to a ports if it looses communication with the server, for example, if the server or the network connection fails. Attention You cannot set the keepalive timer if there is an active session through the Lantronix.

To set the keepalive timer 1

If required, start a Telnet connection to the Lantronix terminal server. See “Setting up a Telnet session”.

2

Type define server keepalive s where s is the keepalive time in seconds (an integer value, typically set to 10 for a LAN environment, or 20 for a WAN environment).

3

Check that you have set the correct value by typing: list server

Related topics “Setting up a Telnet session to configure a Lantronix” on page 296

300

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A LANTRONIX

Configuring a serial port (Lantronix) You must configure the characteristics (baud rate, parity and so on) of each serial port so that it can communicate with the device to which is attached. Prerequisites •

The port must not have a connection with the server. If it has a connection, disconnect it by typing logout port n where n is the port number.

To view the port’s current settings 1

If required, start a Telnet connection to the Lantronix terminal server. See “Setting up a Telnet session”.

2

Type define port n hardware where n is the serial port number.

To configure a port 1

Type the following command: define port [all|n] parameters

where: Part

Description

all|n

The port(s) being configured. Use all if you are changing all ports. Alternatively, specify the port number or range of numbers, for example 1, or 1-5.

parameters

The parameter(s) being configured, as shown in the table below.

The following table lists the values for the main port parameters. See the Lantronix documentation for more details. Port Parameter

Values

access

#remote

autoband

#disabled

character size

7, *8

flow control

none, CTS, XON, DSR, *disabled, enabled

parity

*none, even, odd, mark, space

speed

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, *9600, 19200, 38400, 56000, 57600, 115200, 230400

301

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Port Parameter

Values

stop

*1, 2

Where: • * is the typical setting. • # is a required setting for remote services, such as controllers.

Example

This command sets up serial port 3 to operate at 9600 baud and no parity. define port 3 autobaud disabled access remote parity none flow disabled speed 9600

This command sets up serial port 4 to operate at 19200 baud and even parity. define port 4 autobaud disabled access remote parity even flow disabled speed 19200

Related topics “Setting up a Telnet session to configure a Lantronix” on page 296

302

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A LANTRONIX

Adding the Lantronix IP address to the server’s hosts file You must add the IP address and name of the Lantronix to the server’s hosts file. To add the IP address 1

Choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt to open a Command Prompt window.

2

Type the following command to change to the folder for the hosts file: cd /d %windir%\system32\drivers\etc

3

Open the hosts file by typing: notepad hosts

4

Move to the last line and type: ip_address terminal_server_name

where: •

ip_address is the IP address assigned.

•

terminal_server_name is the TCP Host Name. (You must specify this

name in Quick Builder when configuring a controller that is connected to this Lantronix.) For example, the new line may look like this: 192.168.0.84 esii

5

After editing the server’s hosts file, it is recommended you confirm that the computer can resolve the name that you have added.

To confirm the change 1

In the Command Prompt window type: ping terminal_server_name

where terminal_server_name is the TCP Host Name that you added to the hosts file. For example: ping esii

303

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Connecting controllers to a Lantronix This section provides general instructions on connecting controllers to a Lantronix. Note that you must also read the appropriate Controller References to see if there are any specific restrictions applicable to the controllers you want to connect. Cabling The following figure shows a no-handshaking, RS-232 cable, suitable for connecting most controllers to an Lantronix. Figure 7 Typical RS-232 Controller-Lantronix Cable

Lantronix Terminal Server RJ45 Port CTS (in) DSR (in) RX+ (in) RXTXTX+ (out) DTR (out) RTS (out)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Controller Female DB9 7 4 3

RTS DTR TXD

5 2 6 8

SG RXD DSR CTS

Configuring the port in Quick Builder You use Quick Builder to configure each controller that is connected to the Lantronix. The following properties (Port tab) are specific to an Lantronix. Property

Description

Port Type

Select Terminal Server.

Terminal Server TCP Host Name The name you defined in the server’s hosts file for the Lantronix to which the controller is connected. See “Adding the IP address to the server’s hosts file”. If you haven’t added the terminal server’s details to the hosts file, you can type its IP address.

304

Terminal Server TCP Port No

The number of the TCP port to which the controller is connected. For example, if the controller is connected to serial port 2, and that is mapped to TCP port 4003, you would type 4003. See “Configuring TCP port numbers”.

Idle Timeout

Leave at 180 sec.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A LANTRONIX

Related topics “Adding the Lantronix IP address to the server’s hosts file” on page 303 “Configuring TCP port numbers (Lantronix)” on page 298

305

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Changing the Lantronix’s TCP/IP address If you ever reconfigure your network, you have to define the Lantronix’s new TCP/IP address. To change the TCP/IP address 1

Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the Lantronix to ensure no current connections.

2

Change the IP address by typing: define server ipaddress ip_address

where ip_address is the IP address. 3

Reconnect the Ethernet cable.

4

Check the IP address by typing: list server

306

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A CISCO 2610 ROUTER

Configuring a Cisco 2610 Router This section describes how to configure a Cisco 2610 Router so that the server can communicate with devices, such as controllers, connected to its serial ports. If you have problems, see “Terminal server problems”. Prerequisites •

A computer to configure the router. It must be loaded with Windows HyperTerminal, the configuration application. Note that HyperTerminal is no longer provided with Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008. You should refer to the manufacturer’s documentation to find out how to configure your terminal server without using HyperTerminal.

•

A 4-port or 8-port asynchronous/synchronous network module.

•

A “Console” cable (connects the router to the computer).

•

An adapter, either RJ-45-to-DB-9 or RJ-45-to-DB-25, depending on the computer’s COM ports.

•

A 10baseT Ethernet cable (to connect the router to an Ethernet hub or switch).

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Make a copy of this checklist before starting, so that you can easily keep track of where you are in the installation process. Step

Go To:

Preliminary setup.

page 308

Configure the router’s Ethernet properties.

page 309

Configure the router’s serial ports.

page 314

Add the IP address to the server’s hosts file.

page 321

Connect controllers as required.

page 322

Done

Related topics “Terminal server problems” on page 428

307

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Preliminary Cisco 2610 Router setup You must install the network module, connect the console cable and connect the router to the server. To set up the router

308

1

Install the module in the empty module slot located at the rear of the router.

2

Connect one end of the console cable to the light-blue port labeled CONSOLE on the rear of the router.

3

Connect the other end of the console cable to the adapter.

4

Connect the adapter to the COM1 port on the computer.

5

Connect the Ethernet cable to the yellow 10baseT port labeled ETHERNET 0/0 on the rear of the router.

6

Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to an Ethernet hub or switch.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A CISCO 2610 ROUTER

Configuring the Cisco 2610 router’s Ethernet properties You use HyperTerminal to configure the router’s Ethernet properties, including its IP address and passwords. Attention If you type an incorrect character while typing a command in HyperTerminal, use CTRL+D to backspace. (The BACKSPACE key does not work as expected when entering commands in HyperTerminal.)

To configure the Ethernet properties 1

Start Microsoft Windows HyperTerminal by choosing Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > HyperTerminal.

2

When prompted for the name of your new connection, type C2610. The Connect To dialog box opens.

3

Set Connect Using to COM1 and click OK. The COM1 Properties dialog box opens.

4

Set the COM1 Port values as follows:

Parameter

Value

Baud Rate (Bits per second)

9600

Data Bits

8

Parity

None

Stop Bits

1

Flow Control

None

5

Check that something similar to the following appears at the HyperTerminal prompt: System Bootstrap, Version 11.3(1)XA, PLATFORM SPECIFIC RELATED SOFTWARE (fc1) Copyright (c) 1998 by cisco Systems, Inc. C2600 platform with 32768 Kbytes of main memory

6

If this doesn’t appear (while still connected through HyperTerminal), switch off the router, wait 10 seconds, and then turn it back on.

7

Follow the online instructions for configuring the router, until you reach the router’s host name.

8

Specify the router’s hostname, for example 2600.

309

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

9

Follow the online instructions to configure the router’s passwords: •

Set the enable secret password to system. The enable secret password protects access to privileged EXEC and configuration modes.

•

Set the virtual terminal password to 2600. The virtual terminal password protects access to the router over a network interface (such as telnet).

10 Continue the setup until the messages stop and a prompt containing the

hostname appears as the prompt, for example: 2600>. 11 Type enable 12 At the Password: prompt, type system

where system is the privileged EXEC password. The prompt changes to 2600#. (The “#” indicates privileged EXEC mode.) You must be in privileged EXEC mode to perform the remaining configuration tasks. 13 Configure the router by typing the appropriate configuration commands:

•

If the router and server are connected to LANs on different subnets, specify the gateway address

•

Specify the router’s IP address

•

Set the TCP keepalive timer

14 When you have finished, press CTRL+Z to exit to privileged EXEC mode. 15 To save the changes, type: copy running-config startup-config

Related topics “Specifying the Cisco 2610 router’s gateway address” on page 311 “Specifying the Cisco 2610 router’s IP address” on page 312 “Setting the Cisco 2610 router’s TCP keepalive timer” on page 313

310

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A CISCO 2610 ROUTER

Specifying the Cisco 2610 router’s gateway address If the router and the server are connected to LANs on different subnets, you must specify the gateway address for the router in its global IP settings. To specify the gateway address 1

Type configure terminal The prompt changes to 2600(config)#

2

Type: no ip routing ip default-gateway a.b.c.d

where a.b.c.d is the IP address of your subnet’s gateway.

311

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Specifying the Cisco 2610 router’s IP address To specify the IP address 1

Type configure terminal The prompt changes to 2600(config)#

2

Type: interface Ethernet 0/0 ip address e.f.g.h w.x.y.z no shutdown

where:

312

•

e.f.g.h is the IP address of the router

•

w.x.y.z is its subnet mask.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A CISCO 2610 ROUTER

Setting the Cisco 2610 router’s TCP keepalive timer If you have a redundant server system, you must configure the TCP keepalive timer so that the backup server can connect to the Cisco 2610 Router if the primary server fails. The keepalive timer ensures that the Cisco 2610 Router automatically disconnects and frees a connection to a port if it looses communication with the server, for example, if the server or the network connection fails. To set the keepalive timer 1

Type configure terminal The prompt changes to 2600(config)#

2

Type: interface Ethernet 0/0 keepalive n

where n is the keepalive time in seconds (an integer value, typically set to 10).

313

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Configuring serial ports (Cisco 2610 router) You configure the serial ports by logging into the router via Telnet and entering privileged EXEC mode. To log on to Telnet and configure the serial ports 1

Choose Start > Run to open the Run dialog box.

2

Type telnet a.b.c.d where a.b.c.d is the IP address of the router.

3

Click OK.

4

Wait until the “User Access Verification” message and the Password: prompt appears.

5

Type virtual terminal password, for example 2600

6

Type enable

7

At the Password: prompt, type system where system is the privileged EXEC password.

8

Configure each serial port by typing the appropriate configuration commands:

9

•

Set up the port

•

Set the keepalive timer

•

Set the communications characteristics

•

Set the inactivity timer

When you have finished, press CTRL+Z to exit to privileged EXEC mode.

10 To save the changes, type: copy running-config startup-config

Related topics “Setting up a serial port (Cisco 2610 router)” on page 315 “Setting a serial port’s TCP keepalive timer (Cisco 2610 router)” on page 316 “Configuring the communications characteristics (Cisco 2610 router)” on page 317 “Setting a serial port’s inactivity timer (Cisco 2610 router)” on page 319

314

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A CISCO 2610 ROUTER

Setting up a serial port (Cisco 2610 router) The serial interface ports are those of the asynchronous/synchronous network module (with either 4 or 8 ports). For example, the port numbers for an 8-port module are: •

Port 0 = interface serial 1/0

•

Port 1 = interface serial 1/1

•

Port 2 = interface serial 1/2

•

Port 3 = interface serial 1/3

•

Port 4 = interface serial 1/4

•

Port 5 = interface serial 1/5

•

Port 6 = interface serial 1/6

•

Port 7 = interface serial 1/7

To set up a serial interface 1

Type: configure terminal interface serial 1/x physical-layer async no ip address no ip mroute-cache async default routing async mode interactive no shutdown no fair-queue

where x is the number of the serial port.

315

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Setting a serial port’s TCP keepalive timer (Cisco 2610 router) To set the keepalive timer 1

Type: configure terminal interface serial 1/x keepalive n

where:

316

•

x is the number of the serial port,

•

n is the keepalive time in seconds (an integer typically set to 10).

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A CISCO 2610 ROUTER

Configuring the communications characteristics (Cisco 2610 router) You must configure the characteristics (baud rate, parity and so on) of each serial port so that it can communicate with the device to which is attached. You must also configure each serial port as a TTY line so that it has the same functionality as a serial line on a terminal server. You do this by assigning the appropriate TTY line number and TCP port number for each serial port, as shown in the following table. Serial Port

TTY Line Number

TCP Port Number

Port 0

33

4033

Port 1

34

4034

Port 2

35

4035

Port 3

36

4036

Port 4

37

4037

Port 5

38

4038

Port 6

39

4039

Port 7

40

4040

Attention If the installed network module or 2600 series router is different from the configuration described here, see the Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide.

To configure characteristics of a serial port 1

Type: configure terminal line tty n terminal-type vt210 no autobaud speed baud_rate parity parity_setting transport input telnet transport output telnet transport preferred telnet databits x flowcontrol flowcontrol_setting stopbits num_stop_bits

where: Variable

Description

n

The TTY number associated with the serial port 317

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Variable

Description

baud_rate

The baud rate, for example 9600

parity_setting

The parity setting, for example NONE

x

The number of data bits, for example 8

flowcontrol_setting

The flow control setting, for example NONE

num_stop_bits

The number of stop bits, for example 1

To check a serial port’s settings 1

318

Type show line n where n is the TTY line number.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A CISCO 2610 ROUTER

Setting a serial port’s inactivity timer (Cisco 2610 router) Honeywell strongly recommends that you specify an inactivity timeout for each serial port. If there is no communication on a port within the timeout period, the router disconnects the connection between that port and the server. To set the inactivity timer 1

Type: line tty n session-timeout x

where: •

n is the line number (for example 33)

•

x is the inactivity time in minutes (for example 1).

319

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Setup example for typical controller’s serial port 3 (Cisco 2610 router) These commands set up serial port 3 for a typical controller. Example

320

configure terminal line tty 36 session-timeout 1 terminal-type vt210 no autobaud speed 9600 parity none transport input telnet transport output telnet transport preferred telnet databits 8 flowcontrol none stopbits 1

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A CISCO 2610 ROUTER

Adding the Cisco 2610 router IP address to the server’s hosts file You must add the IP address and name of the router to the server’s hosts file. To add the IP address 1

Choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt to open a Command Prompt window.

2

At the c:\> prompt, change to the folder for the hosts file: cd /d %windir%\system32\drivers\etc

3

Open the host file by typing: notepad hosts

4

Move to the last line and type: a.b.c.d terminal_server_name

where: •

a.b.c.d is the IP address

•

terminal_server_name is the TCP Host Name. (You must specify this

name in Quick Builder when configuring a controller that is connected to the this router.) For example, the new line may look like this: 192.168.0.84 c2610

5

After editing the server’s hosts file, it is recommended you confirm that the computer can resolve the name that you have added.

To confirm the change 1

Choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt to open a Command Prompt window.

2

At the c:\> prompt, type: ping terminal_server_name

where terminal_server_name is the TCP Host Name which you added to the hosts file. For example, the new line may look like this: ping c2610

321

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Connecting controllers to a Cisco 2610 router This section provides general instructions on connecting controllers to a Cisco router. Note that you must also read the appropriate Controller References to see if there are any specific restrictions applicable to the controllers you want to connect. Cabling The following figure shows a no-handshaking, RS-232 cable, suitable for connecting most controllers to a Cisco router. Figure 8 Typical Controller-Router Cable

Cisco DB25 TxD RxD Signal Ground RTS CTS DTR DCD

Controller DB9 2 3 7 4 5 20 8

3 2 5 6 4 1

DB25

TxD RxD Signal Ground DSR DTR DCD

2 3 7 6 20 8

Configuring the port in Quick Builder You use Quick Builder to configure each controller that is connected to the router. The following properties in the Port tab are specific to a Cisco router. Property

Description

Port Type

Select Terminal Server.

Terminal Server TCP Host Name The name you defined in the server’s hosts file for the router to which the controller is connected. See “Adding the IP address to the server’s hosts file”. If you haven’t added the router’s details to the hosts file, you can type its IP address.

322

Terminal Server TCP Port No

The number of the TCP port to which the controller is connected. For example, if the controller is connected to serial port 2, and that is mapped to TCP port 4035, you would type 4035. See “Configuring the communications characteristics”.

Idle Timeout

Leave at 180 sec.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A CISCO 2610 ROUTER

Related topics “Adding the Cisco 2610 router IP address to the server’s hosts file” on page 321 “Configuring the communications characteristics (Cisco 2610 router)” on page 317

323

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Advanced Cisco 2610 router commands These commands allow you to change the router’s IP address, passwords, and so on. For more information, see the Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide. In order to use these commands 1

Log on to the router via Telnet and enter privileged EXEC mode. (See “Configuring the router’s Ethernet properties”.)

2

Type configure terminal, and then type one or more commands, as required.

3

When you have finished, press CTRL+Z to exit to the privileged EXEC mode.

4

Save the change by typing: copy running-config startup-config

To change the router’s host name hostname name

where name is the new host name. To change the Privileged EXEC m secret password enable secret password

where password is the new password. To change the virtual terminal password line vty 0 password password

where password is the new password. To view the router’s configuration show configuration

This does not show the privileged EXEC password. Related topics “Configuring the Cisco 2610 router’s Ethernet properties” on page 309

324

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A SYSTECH

Configuring a Systech This section describes how to configure a Systech RCS-3282 or RCS-6008 so that the server can communicate with devices, such as controllers, connected to its serial ports. The TCP port number assigned for each port cannot be changed. For the RCS-3282, the port numbers are: -

Port 1 = 8001 (Raw TCP)

- Port 2 = 8002 (Raw TCP) For the RCS-3282, the port numbers are: -

Port 1 = 8001

-

Port 2 = 8002

-

Port 3 = 8003

-

Port 4 = 8004

-

Port 5 = 8005

-

Port 6 = 8006

-

Port 7 = 8007

-

Port 8 = 8008

If you have problems, see “Terminal server problems”. Prerequisites •

A computer to configure the Systech, which is loaded with Internet Explorer.

•

The computer must not be running any application that uses the COM1 port.

Tasks Complete the tasks in the following order. Task

Go to

Specify the Systech’s IP address.

page 327

Log on to the Systech via Internet Explorer.

page 328

Change the TCP/IP settings.

page 329

Done

If the Systech is connected to the EBI server via a router, page 267 configure the route from the Systech to the EBI server. Configure the TCP keepalive timer.

page 331

Configure the Systech’s serial ports.

page 332

325

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Task

Go to

Connect controllers as required.

page 336

Related topics “Terminal server problems” on page 428

326

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done

CONFIGURING A SYSTECH

Specifying the Systech’s IP address You specify the Systech’s IP address using the NativeCOM software. Attention Do not assign virtual COM ports COM3 and COM4; this feature of the terminal server must not be used. The EBI terminal server driver must be used instead.

Prerequisites •

NativeCOM software is installed.

To specify the IP address 1

Click Start > Programs > NativeCOM > NativeCOM Configuration Utility.

2

From the Port Server group click Add.

3

Click Add Unlisted Port Server.

4

Click Assign IP Address.

5

Type the Ethernet Address and the New IP Address of your Systech Terminal Server and click Assign IP Address. After assigning an IP address, the Add Port Server dialog box will appear.

6

In the Step 1 - Select a port server area, select the terminal server.

7

In the Step 2 - Configure the port template area, type a name for the serial ports and click Driver Settings.

8

In the Driver Settings dialog box, make sure only Write Errors on Failed Network Connection is selected, then click OK.

9

In the Step 3 - Select COM ports area, leave the defaults.

10 Click OK and then click Close.

327

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Logging into the Systech terminal server using Internet Explorer Once your terminal server's IP address is configured, it is recommended to log on to the terminal server using Internet Explorer. To log on using Internet Explorer 1

Start Internet Explorer.

2

In the address bar type: //a.b.c.d where a.b.c.d is the IP address of your Systech terminal Server. For example: //220.0.0.1.

Results The main configuration menu is displayed.

328

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A SYSTECH

Changing the Systech’s TCP/IP address If you ever reconfigure your network, you have to define the Systech’s new TCP/ IP address. To change the TCP/IP address 1

Click the IP Address link.

2

Type the IP address and IP Netmask addresses.

3

Click Apply Changes.

4

Click Save Changes.

5

You need to reboot the terminal server for the new settings to take effect. Do this by cycling the power.

329

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Configuring the router/gateway address (Systech) If your terminal server is connected to the EBI server via a router, you need to configure the route from the terminal server to the EBI server. For the terminal server to be able to be reached by all computers on a different subnet, use that subnets router or gateway address, as the destination address in the terminal server. To configure the gateway

Example

1

Click the Routing/Gateways link.

2

Type the Destination address. This is the address of your EBI Server.

3

Type the Gateway address. This is the address of the router that the terminal server communicates with.

4

From the Flags options, select net. “Net” indicates that the destination IP address is a computer on the specified network.

5

In Metric, specify the number of jumps to reach the destination address.

6

From the Gateway type options, select address. Address indicates that the Gateway is an address.

7

Click Add Entry.

8

Click Save Changes.

9

You need to reboot the terminal server for the new settings to take effect. Do this by cycling the power.

Your server is connected and has IP address 192.168.0.3 and the Systech Terminal Server is connected and has IP address 220.0.0.1. The settings would be:

330

Parameter

Value

Destination

192.168.0.3

Gateway

220.0.0.240

Flags

net

Metric

1

Gateway Type

address

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A SYSTECH

Configuring the Systech’s TCP keepalive timer It is highly recommended that you configure the TCP keepalive timer. This will ensure that a TCP connection will quickly be released if one side of the connection is terminated abnormally. The TCP keepalive timer is essential in redundant systems where it is vital that the backup server can connect to the terminal server if the server acting as primary fails. To configure the TCP Keepalive timer 1

Click the TCP Keep Alive link.

2

Set the tcp_keepidle to 10. This sets the keepalive timer to 10 seconds.

3

Set the tcp_keepcnt to 8. This sets the number of TCP keepalive packets.

4

Click Apply Changes.

5

Click Save Changes.

331

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Configuring serial ports (Systech) To configure the serial ports 1

Click the Port Parameters link.

2

Select either Port 1 or Port 2.

3

Use the following table to set the ports characteristics. Table 1 Terminal Server Serial Port Settings

Command

Option

Typical Settings

Baud Rate

300 to 115200

9600

Inactivity Timeout

0 (default)

60

Character size

5

8

6 7 8 Stop Bits

1

1

2 Parity

None

None

Even Odd Mark Space Interface Type

RS-232

RS-232

RS-422 RS-485 Flow Control

Input Software Flow Control

No to all

Output Software Flow Control RTS/CTS Hardware Flow Control DTR/DSR Hardware Flow Control Need DCD to open port

Ignore

Ignore

Required Reverse-Telnet (RTN)

Enabled Disabled

332

4

After you have made the changes, click Apply Changes.

5

Click Save Changes.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Enabled

CONFIGURING A SYSTECH

Adding the Systech’s IP address to the server’s hosts file You must add the IP address and name of the Systech to the server’s hosts file. To add the IP address 1

Choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt to open a Command Prompt window.

2

At the c:\> prompt, change to the folder for the hosts file: cd /d %windir%\system32\drivers\etc

3

Open the hosts file by typing: notepad hosts

4

Move to the last line and type: a.b.c.d terminal_server_name

where: •

a.b.c.d is the IP address

•

terminal_server_name is the TCP Host Name. (You must specify this

name in Quick Builder when configuring a controller that is connected to the this EasyServer II.) For example, the new line may look like this: 220.0.0.1 systech

5

After editing the server’s hosts file, it is recommended you confirm that the computer can resolve the name that you have added.

To confirm the change 1

Choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt to open a Command Prompt window.

2

At the c:\> prompt, type: ping terminal_server_name

where terminal_server_name is the TCP Host Name which you added to the hosts file. For example, the new line may look like this: ping systech

333

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Upgrading the Systech terminal server to current release The Systech terminal server software consists of the following components: •

Firmware—boot-time code

•

Operational Software—run-time code

•

Factory Configuration—the configuration to return to if you corrupt your current configuration

To upgrade the Systech 1

Download the latest files from the Systech web site, http:// www.systech.com.

2

Check if the Systech Port Server Utilities program is installed on the computer. If it isn’t, install it from the Systech CD.

3

Start the Port Server Utilities program.

4

If there is no Port server listed, click Add Unlisted Port Server.

5

In the Existing IP address field, type the IP address of the terminal server and click Add this Port Server.

6

Select the Update/Reboot Unit tab.

7

In BDNL Files to Update, type the path of the file that will update the terminal server.

8

Select Reboot unit (required for new BDNL to take effect).

9

Select the terminal server from the list.

10 Click Update/Reboot Unit.

334

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CONFIGURING A SYSTECH

Configuring the Systech terminal server for use with fast failover In a redundant server system, the backup server must be able to communicate with the field devices as soon as it becomes the primary server. Terminal servers implement the concept of a TCP keepalive timer. The TCP keepalive timer ensures that the terminal server automatically disconnects and frees a connection to one of its ports if communication with the server is lost (if the server fails or the network connection is broken). This enables the backup server to take over communication with the field devices. Once the keepalive time has expired, a keepalive packet is sent from the Systech terminal server to the server. The interval between these keepalive packets is the greater of 2 seconds and the keepalive time/96. If the server does not respond to a configured number of keepalive packets the terminal server assumes that the connection has been broken and it allows the backup server to establish a connection. This means that the Systech terminal server will free up a connection to one of its ports if communication with a server has been lost for the keepalive time + number of keepalive packets * 2 seconds. That is, for a 10-second keepalive time, the connection to one of its ports is freed up after 26 seconds of lost communication with the server (assuming the number of keepalive packets is 8). The following table shows the recommended settings for the keepalive time and the number of keepalive packets for various redundant server configurations. To configure a Systech terminal server for server redundancy fast failover, see “Configuring the Systech’s TCP keepalive timer” and use the values in this table. Table 2 TCP Keepalive Settings for Fast Failover Servers configured for:

Recommended keepalive time (seconds)

Normal failover communicating with terminal servers on a high-speed LAN

Fast failover communicating with terminal servers on a high-speed LAN

Normal or fast failover communicating with terminal servers on low-speed WAN

10

5

20

3

8

Recommended 8 number of keepalive packets

Related topics “Configuring the Systech’s TCP keepalive timer” on page 331

335

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

Connecting controllers to a Systech This section provides general instructions on connecting controllers to a Systech. Note that you must also read the appropriate Controller References to see if there are any specific restrictions applicable to the controllers you want to connect. Cabling The following figures show typical cables, suitable for connecting most controllers to a Systech. Figure 9 Typical No Handshaking connections

SystechTerminal Server DB9

Controller

DB25

DB9

2 3 7 4 5 20 8

TxD 3 RxD 2 5 Signal Ground RTS 7 CTS 8 DTR 4 DCD 1

3 2 5 6 4 1

DB25

TxD RxD Signal Ground DSR DTR DCD

2 3 7 6 20 8

Figure 10 TDC Hiway Bridge Connection

SystechTerminal Server DB9

DB25

TxD 3 RxD 2 5 Signal Ground RTS 7 CTS 8 DTR 4 DCD 1

336

Controller DB9

2 3 7 4 5 20 8

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

3 2 5 6 4 1 7 8

DB25

TxD RxD Signal Ground DSR DTR DCD RTS CTS

2 3 7 6 20 8 4 5

CONFIGURING A SYSTECH

Figure 11 RS-485 2-Wire connection

SystechTerminal Server

Controller

DB9 Female

DCD RxB TxB DTR GND DSR TxA RxA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

-RS-485

+RS-485

Configuring the port in Quick Builder You use Quick Builder to configure each controller that is connected to the Systech. The following properties in the Port tab are specific to a Systech. Property

Description

Port Type

Select Terminal Server.

Terminal Server TCP Host Name The name you defined in the server’s hosts file for the Systech to which the controller is connected. See “Adding the Systech’s IP address to the server’s hosts file”. If you haven’t added the terminal server’s details to the hosts file, you can type its IP address. Terminal Server TCP Port No

The number of the TCP port to which the controller is connected, which is equal to 8000 plus the serial port number. For example, if the controller is connected to serial port 2, you would type 8002.

Idle Timeout

Leave at 180 sec.

Related topics “Adding the Systech’s IP address to the server’s hosts file” on page 333

337

15 – INSTALLING A TERMINAL SERVER

338

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Installing controllers

16

You can install controllers independently of EBI. For example, you could install the communications wiring, and physically connect controllers, before purchasing the server. Controller References The EBI documentation includes a separate reference for each type of controller or interface supported by EBI. (See Interface and Controller References.) Each reference includes detailed information specific to the controller, including: •

Hardware and firmware requirements

•

Communication options

•

Integration and configuration instructions.

If you use Quick Builder to configure a controller, the reference is also supplied as part of Quick Builder’s Help.

339

16 – INSTALLING CONTROLLERS

340

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Planning for an upgrade

17

This section describes planning issues you need to address before you start upgrading EBI. If you are upgrading:

Go to:

EBI on the existing server

page 342

EBI on a new server

page 347

EBI on a DSA system

page 352

Point Servers or other components from the auxiliary DVD such as BNPS, FPS, IPPS.

page 359

341

17 – PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE

Planning for an upgrade to EBI on an existing server Attention Careful planning significantly speeds up upgrade tasks and minimizes upgrade problems.

The following table summarizes issues you need to address before you start upgrading EBI. (The issues are not listed in any particular order, and some may not be applicable to your system.) Depending on the issue, you may need to perform the associated task: •

Before you start the upgrade, for example, back up the EBI database

•

After you have finished upgrading the various components, for example, reapply customizations to Station menus and system displays.

Issue

Comments

Computer hardware

Review the EBI compatibility matrix and check whether the existing computer meets any new hardware requirements. Note: We recommend that you create a complete backup of your hard drive using the Acronis True Image suite. Alternatively, add an additional hard drive so that you can “ghost” your existing hard drive (create a backup copy of it) before you start the upgrade.

Software

Review the EBI compatibility matrix and check whether your existing software meets any new software requirements, such as service packs.

Illegal point names

EBI no longer tolerates point names (point IDs) that contain illegal characters. (For a list of illegal characters, see “Point names” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.) Consequently, if your existing system contains any illegal point names, you need to rename them before the upgrade. For details, see “Renaming points with illegal names (point IDs)” on page 391.

Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin

Read these for any last-minute information that may affect the upgrade. They are on the EBI DVD and the EBI and DVM Technical Support site (http:// ebi.acs.honeywell.com/).

System Design form

Update or fill in a new System Design form (page 15).

342

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE TO EBI ON AN EXISTING SERVER

Issue

Comments

Renaming the server

If you want to change the server’s computer name, change it after the upgrade.

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

For detailed instructions, see “Renaming the Server Computer” in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Backups

Back up the server, including the EBI database and the Windows registry. Create a Windows restore point.

Card Management System

If you have a Card Management System, back up the database.

Access controllers

If you have any access controllers, you must perform a “download all to all controllers” as soon as practicable after you have completed the upgrade. See “Downloading Access Information” in the relevant Access Control Configuration Guide. You must do this before you perform any “download modified” or “download all to selected controller” operations on you upgraded system. Note: Because a download all temporarily disables each controller as it is reconfigured, you should schedule to perform this task at a suitable time.

Point Servers from the auxiliary DVD

If you have any Point Servers or other components that are installed from the auxiliary DVD, you need to plan how you are going to upgrade them. See “Planning for an upgrade to components installed from the auxiliary DVD” on page 359.

PhotoID

If you have PhotoID with the Card Management System, back up the PhotoID folder and its subfolders. This backs up the photos, signatures, and card layouts.

Events

Archive all events. Any events that are not archived will be lost because the event subsystem uses a new format. However, you can restore archived events using the Event Archiving Converter utility.

Quick Builder projects

Create one or more Quick Builder projects that reflect your current system configuration by performing an upload. If you want to use existing hardware definition (hdwbld) files to build printers, you must change the CYRILLIC keyword to LANGUAGE=CYRILLIC.

343

17 – PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE

Issue

Comments

Windows accounts

The EBI-specific Windows user accounts deleted and recreated during the upgrade. Any printers that were added to your existing system using the “old” mngr account need to be re-added using the “new” mngr account.

System displays

Existing system displays are replaced with new ones. If you have made any changes to an existing system display, you must reapply them to the new display after the upgrade. This applies in particular to the System Startup display, which is often customized.

Custom displays

Some objects in custom DSP displays created in pre R320.2 versions of Display Builder may not render correctly. If a display does not render correctly after the upgrade, open it using the current version of Display Builder and then save it.

Station menus

Existing menu files are replaced with new ones. If you have made any changes to the existing menus, you must reapply them to the new menus after the upgrade.

Station-level scripts

If you have any Station-level scripts (scripts attached to Stations rather than to individual displays), you must reattach them after the upgrade.

System acronyms

The existing set of system acronyms are replaced with a new set. If you have made any changes to the existing set, you must reapply them after the upgrade.

Scan periods

The scan periods are reset to their default values. If you use specialized scan periods, you must reapply them after the upgrade.

Localization

Localization settings are lost during the upgrade. You must reapply localization settings after the upgrade.

Hosts file

Back up or print the hosts file, %windir%\ system32\drivers\etc\hosts. This file contains various connection details that you may have to reapply after the upgrade.

344

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE TO EBI ON AN EXISTING SERVER

Issue

Comments

Folders and files

The server folder and sub-folders are deleted during the upgrade. If you have any customized files or user files in any of these folders, you must back up these files before the upgrade and then copy the files to the new folders after the upgrade. Examples include: history archives (in archive), event archives (in evtarch) and user files (in user) custom reports (in reports).

Station configuration file (Station.ini)

Back up station.ini, which is located in %windir%.

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

If you made any changes to the existing file, you need to reapply them to the new file after the upgrade. The following have changed or are new: • The IconPopToTopOnAlarm option has been removed, and is no longer recognized by Station. Its replacement is FlashWindowOnAlarm, which enables Station to flash its title bar and taskbar icon when an alarm is generated. This behavior is disabled by default. • DisConnectTimeout and KeepAliveTimeout settings have been added, and are used to configure fast Station failover. For details, see “Station.ini” in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Station setup file (default.stn)

Back up the default Station setup file, default.stn, which is located in Honeywell\client\station. The new Station setup file is configured as “static Station 1”. If this is not correct, you must make the appropriate changes in Station after the upgrade. For details, see “Connection properties” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

Alarms and messages

Alarms and messages currently in the system are lost during the upgrade. You therefore need to resolve any alarms before starting the upgrade.

Message Pad

The Message Pad contents are lost during the upgrade.

History archive search path After the upgrade, you must specify the history archive search path using the EBI Configuration Panel. For details, see “Configuration Panel” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

345

17 – PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE

Issue

Comments

Custom applications

Custom applications built for your existing system must be re-compiled and re-linked using an appropriate development environment. See the Application Development Guide for details about qualified compilers.

File replication

If your existing system has any customized file replication settings, you must reapply them after the upgrade.

File dumps

Do not use any file dumps of the pre-upgrade database to restore the upgraded database.

DSA system

If you have a DSA system, ensure that it is working without problems before you start the upgrade. In particular ensure that: • All point names within the existing system are unique. • The password for the Windows mngr account is the same on all EBI servers.

File shares and Web shares

If you have manually defined any file or Web shares, you have to remove them before the upgrade and reapply them after the upgrade.

Honeywell Digital Video If you have a Honeywell DVM system, you must Manager (Honeywell DVM) uninstall some Honeywell DVM components before upgrading EBI and then reinstall them after the upgrade. For more details, see “Uninstalling and reinstalling Honeywell DVM components” on page 360.

346

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE TO EBI ON A NEW SERVER

Planning for an upgrade to EBI on a new server Attention Careful planning significantly speeds up upgrade tasks and minimizes upgrade problems.

The following table summarizes issues you need to address before you start upgrading EBI. (The issues are not listed in any particular order, and some may not be applicable to your system.) Depending on the issue, you may need to perform the associated task: •

Before you start the upgrade, for example, back up the EBI database

•

After you have finished upgrading the various components, for example, reapply customizations to Station menus and system displays

Issue

Comments

New server computer

Review the EBI compatibility matrix and check whether your new computer meets the hardware requirements.

Illegal point names

EBI no longer tolerates point names (point IDs) that contain illegal characters. (For a list of illegal characters, see “Point names” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.)

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

Consequently, if your existing system contains any illegal point names, you need to rename them before the upgrade. For details, see “Renaming points with illegal names (point IDs)” on page 391. Known Issues Bulletin and Read these for any last-minute information that may Software Release Bulletin affect the upgrade. They are on the EBI DVD. System Design form

Fill in a new System Design form (page 15).

Renaming the server

If you want to change the server’s computer name, change it after the upgrade. For detailed instructions, see “Renaming the Server Computer” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

Backups

Back up the server, including the EBI database and the Windows registry.

Card Management System If you have a Card Management System, back up the database.

347

17 – PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE

Issue

Comments

Access controllers

If you have any access controllers, you must perform a “download all to all controllers” as soon as practicable after you have completed the upgrade. See “Downloading Access Information” in the relevant Access Control Configuration Guide. You must do this before you perform any “download modified” or “download all to selected controller” operations on you upgraded system. Note: Because a download all temporarily disables each controller as it is reconfigured, you should schedule to perform this task at a suitable time.

Point Servers from the auxiliary DVD

If you have any Point Servers or other components that are installed from the auxiliary, you need to plan how you are going to upgrade them. See “Planning for an upgrade to components installed from the auxiliary DVD” on page 359.

PhotoID

If you have PhotoID with the Card Management System, back up the PhotoID folder and its sub-folders. This backs up the photos, signatures, and card layouts.

Events

Archive all events. (Any events that are not archived will be lost because the event subsystem uses a new format. However, you can restore archived events using the Event Archiving Converter utility.)

Quick Builder projects

Create one or more Quick Builder projects that reflect your current system configuration by performing an upload. If you want to use existing hardware definition (hdwbld) files to build printers, you must change the CYRILLIC keyword to LANGUAGE=CYRILLIC.

System displays

Existing system displays are replaced with new ones. If you have made any changes to an existing system display, you must reapply them to the new display after the upgrade. This applies in particular to the System Startup display, which is often customized.

Custom displays

Some objects in custom DSP displays created in pre R320.2 versions of Display Builder may not render correctly. If a display does not render correctly, open it using the current version of Display Builder and then save it.

Station menus

348

If you have made any changes to the existing menus, you must reapply them after the upgrade.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE TO EBI ON A NEW SERVER

Issue

Comments

Station-level scripts

Station-level scripts (scripts attached to Stations rather than to individual displays) must be reattached after the upgrade.

System acronyms

If you have made any changes to the existing System acronym set, you must reapply them after the upgrade.

Scan periods

If you use specialized scan periods, you must reapply them after the upgrade.

Localization

You must reapply localization settings after the upgrade.

Hosts file

Back up or print the hosts file, %windir%\ system32\drivers\etc\hosts.

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

This file contains various connection details that you may have to reapply after the upgrade. Folders and files

The following folders are deleted during the upgrade. These folders, and their sub-folders, may contain files that you need after the upgrade. Examples include: history archives (in archive), event archives (in evtarch) and user files (in user). Ensure that you back up any custom or user files in these folders before the upgrade. • server\data\cl • server\def • server\help • server\i18n • server\include • server\lib • server\options • server\report for R310 or server\data\ report for R400 • server\run • server\setup • server\xlnet If you need a file, you must copy it to the new folder on the new computer after the upgrade.

349

17 – PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE

Issue

Comments

Station configuration file

The default Station configuration file, station.ini file is located in %windir%. If you have made any changes to the old file, you need to reapply them to the new file after the upgrade. The IconPopToTopOnAlarm option has been removed, and is no longer recognized by Station. Its replacement is FlashWindowOnAlarm, which enables Station to flash its title bar and taskbar icon when an alarm is generated. This behavior is disabled by default. DisConnectTimeout and KeepAliveTimeout

settings have been added, and are used to configure fast Station failover. For details, see “Station.ini” in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Station setup file

The new setup file is configured to as “static Station 1”. If this is not correct, you must make the appropriate changes in Station after the upgrade. “Connection properties” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

RSLinx

The following file must be copied to the same location on the new computer: C:\Program Files\Honeywell\system\bin\ bootpdata.text

Alarms and messages

Alarms and messages currently in the system are lost during the upgrade. You therefore need to resolve any alarms before starting the upgrade.

Message Pad

The Message Pad contents are lost during the upgrade.

Custom applications

Custom applications built for your existing system must be re-compiled and re-linked using an appropriate development environment. See the Application Development Guide for details about qualified compilers.

File replication

If your existing system has any customized file replication settings, you must reapply them after the upgrade.

File dumps

Do not use any file dumps of the pre-upgrade database to restore the upgraded database.

350

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE TO EBI ON A NEW SERVER

Issue

Comments

DSA system

If you have a DSA system, ensure that it is working without problems before you start the upgrade. In particular ensure that:

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

• All point names within the existing system are unique. • The password for the Windows mngr account is the same on all EBI servers. File shares and Web shares If you have manually defined any file or Web shares on your existing server, you have to apply them to the new server after the upgrade. Honeywell Digital Video Manager (Honeywell DVM)

If you have a Honeywell DVM system, you must uninstall some Honeywell DVM components before upgrading EBI and then reinstall them after the upgrade. For more details, see “Uninstalling and reinstalling Honeywell DVM components” on page 360.

351

17 – PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE

Planning for an upgrade to EBI on a DSA system Attention Careful planning significantly speeds up upgrade tasks and minimizes upgrade problems.

The following table summarizes issues you need to address before you start upgrading EBI. (The issues are not listed in any particular order, and some may not be applicable to your system.) Depending on the issue, you may need to perform the associated task: •

Before you start the upgrade, for example, back up the EBI database

•

After you have finished upgrading the various components, for example, reapply customizations to Station menus and system displays.

Ensure that the DSA system is working without problems before you start the upgrade. In particular ensure that: •

All point names within the existing system are unique.

•

The password for the Windows mngr account is the same on all EBI servers.

It is recommended that you perform basic tests on your critical subsystems at each upgrade stage. Client preparation For each client, the following must be taken into account: •

The primary usage of the EBI system.

•

Each client's position with regards to:

•

352

-

CMS/Global Schedules2 (if installed)

-

Local or remote location

-

Security monitoring

-

Card printing

-

Access Level assignment and adjustment.

For each site, check its priority. -

Most important clients should be completed first.

-

Least important should be completed last.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE TO EBI ON A DSA SYSTEM

Issue

Comments

Computer hardware

Review the EBI compatibility matrix and check whether the existing computer meets any new hardware requirements.

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

Note: We recommend that you add new hard drives so that you can “ghost” your existing hard drive (create a backup copy of it) before you start the upgrade. Software

Review the EBI compatibility matrix and check whether your existing software meets any new software requirements, such as service packs.

Illegal point names

EBI no longer tolerates point names (point IDs) that contain illegal characters. (For a list of illegal characters, see “Point names” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.) Consequently, if your existing system contains any illegal point names, you need to rename them after the upgrade. For details, see “Renaming points with illegal names (point IDs)” on page 391.

Known Issues Bulletin and Software Release Bulletin

Read these for any last-minute information that may affect the upgrade. They are on the EBI DVD.

System Design form

Update or fill in a new System Design form (page 15).

Renaming the server

If you want to change the server’s computer name, change it after the upgrade. For detailed instructions, see “Renaming the Server Computer” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

Backups

Back up the server, including the EBI database and the Windows registry.

Card Management System

If you have a Card Management System, back up the database.

Access controllers

If you have any access controllers, you must perform a “download all to all controllers” as soon as practicable after you have completed the upgrade. See “Downloading Access Information” in the relevant Access Control Configuration Guide. You must do this before you perform any “download modified” or “download all to selected controller” operations on you upgraded system. Note: Because a download all temporarily disables each controller as it is reconfigured, you should schedule to perform this task at a suitable time.

353

17 – PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE

Issue

Comments

Point Servers from the auxiliary DVD

If you have any Point Servers or other components that are installed from the auxiliary, you need to plan how you are going to upgrade them. See “Planning for an upgrade to components installed from the auxiliary DVD” on page 359.

PhotoID

If you have PhotoID with the Card Management System, back up the PhotoID folder and its subfolders. This backs up the photos, signatures, and card layouts.

Events

Archive all events. Any events that are not archived will be lost because the event subsystem uses a new format. However, you can restore archived events using the Event Archiving Converter utility.

Quick Builder projects

Create one or more Quick Builder projects that reflect your current system configuration by performing an upload. If you want to use existing hardware definition (hdwbld) files to build printers, you must change the CYRILLIC keyword to LANGUAGE=CYRILLIC.

Windows accounts

The EBI-specific Windows user accounts deleted and recreated during the upgrade. Any printers that were added to your existing system using the “old” mngr account need to be re-added using the “new” mngr account.

System displays

Existing system displays are replaced with new ones. If you have made any changes to an existing system display, you must reapply them to the new display after the upgrade. This applies in particular to the System Startup display, which is often customized.

Custom displays

Some objects in custom DSP displays created in pre R320.2 versions of Display Builder may not render correctly. If a display does not render correctly after the upgrade, open it using the current version of Display Builder and then save it.

Station menus

Existing menu files are replaced with new ones. If you have made any changes to the existing menus, you must reapply them to the new menus after the upgrade.

354

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE TO EBI ON A DSA SYSTEM

Issue

Comments

Station-level scripts

If you have any Station-level scripts (scripts attached to Stations rather than to individual displays), you must reattach them after the upgrade.

System acronyms

The existing set of system acronyms are replaced with a new set.

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

If you have made any changes to the existing set, you must reapply them after the upgrade. Scan periods

The scan periods are reset to their default values. If you use specialized scan periods, you must reapply them after the upgrade.

Localization

Localization settings are lost during the upgrade. You must reapply localization settings after the upgrade.

Hosts file

Back up or print the hosts file, %windir%\ system32\drivers\etc\hosts. This file contains various connection details that you may have to reapply after the upgrade.

355

17 – PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE

Issue

Comments

Folders and files

The following folders are deleted during the upgrade. These folders, and their sub-folders, may contain files that you need after the upgrade. Examples include: history archives (in archive), event archives (in evtarch) and user files (in user). Ensure that you back up any custom or user files in these folders before the upgrade. • server\archive • server\data\cl • server\def • server\data\evtarch • server\help • server\i18n • server\include • server\lib • server\options • server\report for R310 or server\data\ report for R400 • server\run • server\setup • server\user • server\xlnet If you need a file, you must copy it to the new folder after the upgrade.

356

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE TO EBI ON A DSA SYSTEM

Issue

Comments

Station configuration file (Station.ini)

Back up station.ini, which is located in %windir%.

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

If you made any changes to the existing file, you need to reapply them to the new file after the upgrade. The following have changed or are new: • The IconPopToTopOnAlarm option has been removed, and is no longer recognized by Station. Its replacement is FlashWindowOnAlarm, which enables Station to flash its title bar and taskbar icon when an alarm is generated. This behavior is disabled by default. • DisConnectTimeout and KeepAliveTimeout settings have been added, and are used to configure fast Station failover. For details, see “Station.ini” in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Station setup file (default.stn)

Back up the default Station setup file, default.stn, which is located in \client\station. The new Station setup file is configured as “static Station 1”. If this is not correct, you must make the appropriate changes in Station after the upgrade. For details, see “Connection properties” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.

Alarms and messages

Alarms and messages currently in the system are lost during the upgrade. You therefore need to resolve any alarms before starting the upgrade.

Message Pad

The Message Pad contents are lost during the upgrade.

History archive search path After the upgrade, you must specify the history archive search path using the EBI Configuration Panel. For details, see “Configuration Panel” in the Configuration and Administration Guide. Custom applications

Custom applications built for your existing system must be re-compiled and re-linked using an appropriate development environment. See the Application Development Guide for details about qualified compilers.

File replication

If your existing system has any customized file replication settings, you must reapply them after the upgrade.

357

17 – PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE

Issue

Comments

File dumps

Do not use any file dumps of the pre-upgrade database to restore the upgraded database.

File shares and Web shares

If you have manually defined any file or Web shares, you have to remove them before the upgrade and reapply them after the upgrade.

Honeywell Digital Video If you have a Honeywell DVM system, you must Manager (Honeywell DVM) uninstall some Honeywell DVM components before upgrading EBI and then reinstall them after the upgrade. For more details, see “Uninstalling and reinstalling Honeywell DVM components” on page 360.

358

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Done before Done after upgrade? upgrade?

PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE TO COMPONENTS INSTALLED FROM THE AUXILIARY DVD

Planning for an upgrade to components installed from the auxiliary DVD If you are upgrading any components that are installed from the auxiliary DVD, for example, BNPS, FPS, IPPS, as well as EBI, you need to determine the order in which you should perform the various EBI-specific tasks and tasks specific to the components on the auxiliary DVD. This involves combining the appropriate EBI upgrade checklist from this guide with the relevant upgrade instructions in the Software Release Bulletin for the relevant component (which is on the auxiliary DVD).

359

17 – PLANNING FOR AN UPGRADE

Uninstalling and reinstalling Honeywell DVM components If you have a Honeywell DVM system, you must uninstall some components before upgrading EBI and then reinstall them after the upgrade. The major steps are as follows:

360

1

Uninstall the Honeywell DVM client from the Station computers, and the EBI server(s).

2

Uninstall the Honeywell DVM host component from the EBI server(s).

3

Upgrade EBI as described in this guide.

4

Install the Honeywell DVM host component on the EBI server(s).

5

Install the Honeywell DVM client on the Station computers, the EBI server(s). For detailed instructions on how to uninstall and install Honeywell DVM components, see the Honeywell Digital Video Manager Installation and Upgrade Guide.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Upgrade tasks

18

This section describes tasks applicable to upgrading EBI or associated applications from an earlier release. Attention Only complete a task in this section if you are instructed to do so by a checklist. See “Upgrade checklists” on page 49.

361

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Upgrading EBI on an existing server This section describes how to upgrade the EBI components on an existing server running Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003. •

The EBI installation wizard checks whether the correct versions/service packs of Windows and supporting applications, such as Internet Explorer, have been installed. If any required applications/service packs are not installed, you must install them before restarting the EBI installation wizard.

•

The upgrade will affect the server, Station and other EBI applications, so it is recommended that you close all applications before starting this installation.

•

Several applications are installed automatically, including InstallShield Scripting Engine and .NET, if they are not detected on the server.

•

If you have problems, see “EBI server installation problems” on page 422.

There are two types of server upgrade available: •

A Typical upgrade on the EBI server installs all EBI components available with the license. All settings are automatically configured and they may be changed after install using the EBI Configuration Panel. For more information about the Configuration Panel, see “Configuration Panel” in the Configuration and Administration Guide. For more information about a Typical upgrade, see “Typical upgrade of the EBI components on an existing server” on page 362.

•

A Custom upgrade allows you to select from a set of available options for a particular installation. Components, directories and configurable options, such as paper size and fast history rate, can be set as part of a Custom upgrade. For more information about a Custom upgrade, see “Custom upgrade of the EBI components on an existing server” on page 364.

Typical upgrade of the EBI components on an existing server Prerequisites •

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The System Design form (page 19).

To start the upgrade 1

362

Log on to the computer as a Windows administrator.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADING EBI ON AN EXISTING SERVER

2

Disable any real-time virus protection software, such as Norton Anti-Virus. (This software may interfere with DVD detection during the installation procedure.)

3

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically displays. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

4

When the EBI installation wizard appears, click Upgrade. Your system is checked for certain software that is required by the EBI installation wizard. If prompted, install the prerequisite software and if required, reboot the computer. If you have to reboot the computer, when the computer is restarted doubleclick the setup.exe file to return to the wizard. The Upgrade Welcome page appears. If you are upgrading to a new release on the same computer, the following message appears: “EBI Server Rxxx has been detected on your computer …”.

5

Click Next to continue.

6

The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any Critical Issues must be resolved before installation can proceed. Click Next to continue.

7

Type in the System number and the Authorization number, as specified in your EBI license.

8

Click Next to continue.

9

Click Typical Install to install all components available with the license.

10 Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell.

If you want to change the base installation directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next. 11 Type the password for the Windows mngr account in the Password box, as

specified in the System Design form. Click Next to continue. Attention The mngr password must match the mngr password already set for the existing server. 12 Confirm your choices in the Confirmation page by clicking Next. 13 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Upgrade to start

upgrading the EBI server and client applications. 14 When the upgrade is complete, you will be prompted to restart your computer.

Click Yes to restart.

363

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Custom upgrade of the EBI components on an existing server Prerequisites •

The EBI DVD

•

The System Design form

To perform a Custom upgrade of EBI components on the server

364

1

Log on to the computer as Windows administrator.

2

Disable any real-time virus protection applications, such as Norton AntiVirus. (Such an application may interfere with DVD detection during the installation procedure.)

3

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically displays. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

4

When the EBI installation wizard appears, click Upgrade. Your system is checked for certain software that is required by the EBI installation wizard. If prompted, install the prerequisite software and if required, reboot the computer. If you have to reboot the computer, when the computer is restarted doubleclick the setup.exe file to return to the wizard. The Upgrade Welcome page appears. If you are upgrading to a new release on the same computer, the following message appears: “EBI Server Rxxx has been detected on your computer …”.

5

Click Next to continue.

6

The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any Critical Issues must be resolved before installation can proceed. Click Next to continue.

7

Type in the System number and the Authorization number, as specified in your EBI license.

8

Click Next to continue.

9

Select Custom as the type of upgrade installation.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADING EBI ON AN EXISTING SERVER

10 Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell.

If you want to change the base installation directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next. 11 Select the Custom Installation Server options you want to upgrade, and then

click Next. 12 Select the point server types you wish to install (if any) and click Next. 13 Type the password for the Windows mngr account in the Password box, as

specified in the System Design form. Attention The mngr password must match the mngr password already set for the existing server. 14 Click Next to accept the following default archive folders. C:\Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\archive C:\Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\RestoredArchives C:\Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\evtarch.

If you want to change these directories, click the Browse buttons to locate the directories for History Archive, Restore Archive or Events Archive, click OK, and then click Next. 15 Click Next to accept the following default directory for third-party software.

Third-party software includes Microsoft SQL Server and LonWorks software. The default location for Microsoft SQL Server is C:\Program Files\ Microsoft SQL Server. (When you are upgrading on the existing computer, you cannot change the location of Microsoft SQL Server.) The default location for LonWorks software is c:\LonWorks. If you want to change the LonWorks directory, click the Browse buttons to locate the directory for third-party software installation, click OK, and then click Next. 16 If you chose to install MEDE, click Yes in the MEDE Choice page if you

want to allow Microsoft Excel Data Exchange to write to the EBI database. Click Next to continue. 17 If you chose to install Web Toolkit, click Yes in the Web Toolkit Choice page

if you want to allow Web Toolkit to write to the EBI database. Click Next to continue. 18 If the license allows Station UL listing, the Station Choice page appears.

Click Yes if the station is to be used as the primary monitoring or control point for a UL Listed Fire, Security or Smoke Control System.

365

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

19 If you are licensed for the Pharma option: a. Click Yes to allow you to disable Electronic Signatures on individual

locations. Otherwise, click No to have Electronic Signatures on all locations. b. Click Next to continue. 20 The Choose Number of Group Control Stations page appears. Group

Control enables operators to perform a defined set of actions on up to 30 points with a single push button. Type in the number of Stations to be configured for Group Control and click Next. 21 Confirm your choices in the Confirmation page by clicking Next. 22 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Upgrade to start

upgrading the EBI server and client applications. 23 When the upgrade is complete, you will be prompted to restart your computer.

Click Yes to restart. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

366

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADING EBI ON A NEW SERVER

Upgrading EBI on a new server This section describes how to upgrade the EBI server components on a new server computer. Take note of the following considerations: •

The EBI installation wizard checks whether the correct versions/service packs of Windows and supporting applications, such as Internet Explorer, have been installed. If any required applications/service packs are not installed, you must install them before restarting the EBI installation wizard.

•

The computer restarts during the installation process, so it is recommended that you have no other applications running during this installation.

•

Several applications are installed automatically, including InstallShield Scripting Engine and .NET, if they are not detected on the server.

•

If you have problems, see “EBI server installation problems” on page 422.

There are two types of server upgrade available: •

A Typical upgrade on the EBI server upgrades all EBI components available with the license. All settings are automatically configured and they may be changed after install using the EBI Configuration Panel. For more information about the Configuration Panel, see “Configuration Panel” in the Configuration and Administration Guide. For more information about a Typical upgrade, see “Typical upgrade of the EBI components on a new server” on page 367.

•

A Custom upgrade allows you to select from a set of available options for a particular installation. Components, directories and configurable options, such as paper size and fast history rate, can be set as part of a Custom upgrade. For more information about a Custom upgrade, see “Custom upgrade of the EBI components on a new server” on page 369.

Typical upgrade of the EBI components on a new server Prerequisites •

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The System Design form (page 19).

To start the upgrade 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows administrator.

367

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

2

Disable any real-time virus protection software, such as Norton Anti-Virus. (This software may interfere with DVD detection during the installation procedure.)

3

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically displays. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

4

When the EBI installation wizard appears, click Upgrade. Your system is checked for certain software that is required by the EBI installation wizard. If prompted, install the prerequisite software and if required, reboot the computer. If you have to reboot the computer, when the computer is restarted doubleclick the setup.exe file to return to the wizard. The Upgrade Welcome page appears. If you are performing a server upgrade on a new computer with an old database, the following message appears: “The wizard did not detect an existing Honeywell EBI server on your computer. If you wish to perform an upgrade from an old computer and retain the database, please continue”. Alternatively, if you do not want to restore or reuse an old database, click Cancel, restart the EBI installation wizard and select Installation from the The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page. For more information about installing EBI components on a server, see “Installing the EBI components on the server” on page 160.

5

Click Next to continue. The Setup Type page appears.

6

Click Enterprise Buildings Integrator server.

7

The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any Critical Issues must be resolved before installation can proceed. Click Next to continue.

8

Click Next to accept the default backed up database directory that you want to restore, C:\data\. This is the directory that was created when the PrepareDataForUpgrade utility was run. For more information, see “Copying the existing EBI databases to the new computer” on page 383. If you want to change the location of the backed up database directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next.

9

Type in the System number and the Authorization number, as specified in your EBI license.

10 Click Next to continue. 368

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADING EBI ON A NEW SERVER

11 Click Typical Install. 12 Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell.

If you want to change the base installation directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next. 13 If your license includes point servers, select the point servers for which you

are licensed and click Next. 14 Type the password for the Windows mngr account in the Password box, as

specified in the System Design form. Confirm the password by typing it again in the Confirm Password box and then click Next. 15 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Upgrade to start

upgrading the EBI server and client applications. 16 When the upgrade is complete, click Finish. You will be prompted to restart

your computer. Click Yes to restart. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Custom upgrade of the EBI components on a new server Prerequisites •

The EBI DVD

•

The System Design form

To perform a Custom upgrade of EBI components on the server 1

Log on to the computer as Windows administrator.

2

Disable any real-time virus protection applications, such as Norton AntiVirus. (Such an application may interfere with DVD detection during the installation procedure.)

3

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically displays. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

369

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

4

When the EBI installation wizard appears, click Upgrade. Your system is checked for certain software that is required by the EBI installation wizard. If prompted, install the prerequisite software and if required, reboot the computer. If you have to reboot the computer, when the computer is restarted doubleclick the setup.exe file to return to the wizard. The Upgrade Welcome page appears. If you are performing a server upgrade on a new computer with an old database, the following message appears: “The wizard did not detect an existing Honeywell EBI server on your computer. If you wish to perform an upgrade from an old computer and retain the database, please continue”. Click Next to retain the database. Alternatively, if you do not want to restore or reuse an old database, click Cancel, restart the EBI installation wizard and select Installation from the The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page. For more information about installing EBI components on a server, see “Installing the EBI components on the server” on page 160.

5

Click Next to continue.

6

The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any Critical Issues must be resolved before installation can proceed. Click Next to continue.

7

Click Next to accept the default backed up database directory that you want to restore, C:\data\. This is the directory that was created when the PrepareDataForUpgrade utility was run. For more information, see “Copying the existing EBI databases to the new computer” on page 383. If you want to change the location of the backed up database directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next.

8

Type in the System number and the Authorization number, as specified in your EBI license.

9

Click Next to continue.

10 Select Custom as the type of upgrade installation. 11 Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell.

If you want to change the base installation directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next. 12 Select the Custom Installation Server options you want to upgrade, and then

click Next.

370

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADING EBI ON A NEW SERVER

13 Type the password for the Windows mngr account in the Password box, as

specified in the System Design form. 14 Click Next to accept the following default archive folders. C:\Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\archive C:\Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\RestoredArchives C:\Program Files\Honeywell\server\data\evtarch.

If you want to change these directories, click the Browse buttons to locate the directories for History Archive, Restore Archive or Events Archive, click OK, and then click Next. 15 Click Next to accept the following default directory for third-party software.

Third-party software includes Microsoft SQL Server and LonWorks software. The default location for Microsoft SQL Server is C:\Program Files\ Microsoft SQL Server. The default location for LonWorks software is c:\ LonWorks. If you want to change this directory, click the Browse buttons to locate the directory for third-party software installation, click OK, and then click Next. 16 If you chose to install MEDE, click Yes in the MEDE Choice page if you

want to allow Microsoft Excel Data Exchange to write to the EBI database. Click Next to continue. 17 If you chose to install Web Toolkit, click Yes in the Web Toolkit Choice page

if you want to allow Web Toolkit to write to the EBI database. Click Next to continue. 18 If the license allows Station UL listing, the Station Choice page appears.

Click Yes if the station is to be used as the primary monitoring or control point for a UL Listed Fire, Security or Smoke Control System. 19 If you are licensed for the Pharma option: a. Click Yes to allow you to disable Electronic Signatures on individual

locations. Otherwise, click No to have Electronic Signatures on all locations. b. Click Next to continue. 20 The Choose Number of Group Control Stations page appears. Group

Control enables operators to perform a defined set of actions on up to 30 points with a single push button. Type in the number of Stations to be configured for Group Control and click Next. 21 Confirm your choices in the Confirmation page by clicking Next. 22 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Upgrade to start

upgrading the EBI server and client applications. 23 When the upgrade is complete, click Finish. You will be prompted to restart

your computer. Click Yes to restart. 371

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

372

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADING REMOTE POINT SERVERS ON A NEW COMPUTER

Upgrading remote point servers on a new computer Prerequisites •

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The System Design form (page 19).

To start the upgrade 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows administrator.

2

Disable any real-time virus protection software.

3

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically appears. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

4

Click Upgrade. Your system is checked for certain software that is required by the EBI installation wizard. If prompted, install the prerequisite software and if required, reboot the computer. If you have to reboot the computer, when the computer is restarted doubleclick the setup.exe file to return to the wizard. If you are performing an upgrade on a new computer with an old database, the following message appears: “The wizard did not detect an existing Honeywell EBI server on your computer. If you wish to perform an upgrade from an old computer and retain the database, please continue”.

5

Click Next to continue.

6

Click Enterprise Buildings Integrator point server setup type.

7

The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any Critical Issues must be resolved before installation can proceed. Click Next to continue.

8

Specify the location of the database that you backed up. This is the pointservers directory that was created when the PrepareDataForUpgrade utility was run. (The backup is located in the %temp%\pointservers folder on the old point server computer. It should have

373

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

been copied to a location accessible to the new computer, such as a network drive.) To change the location of the backed up database directory, click Browse and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next. 9

Type in the System number and the Authorization number as specified in your EBI license and click Next.

10 Click Typical Install. 11 Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell.

12 Select the check box for the type of point server you are upgrading and click

Next. 13 Type the password for the Windows mngr account in the Password box, as

specified in the System Design form. Confirm the password by typing it again in the Confirm Password box and then click Next. 14 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Upgrade to start

upgrading the point server. 15 When the upgrade is complete, click Finish. You will be prompted to restart

your computer. Click Yes to restart. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

374

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADING REMOTE POINT SERVERS ON AN EXISTING COMPUTER

Upgrading remote point servers on an existing computer Prerequisites •

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The System Design form (page 19).

To start the upgrade 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows administrator.

2

Disable any real-time virus protection software.

3

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically appears. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

4

Click Upgrade. Your system is checked for certain software that is required by the EBI installation wizard. If prompted, install the prerequisite software and if required, reboot the computer. If you have to reboot the computer, when the computer is restarted doubleclick the setup.exe file to return to the wizard. If you are performing an upgrade on the same computer, the following message appears: “EBI has been detected on your computer...”.

5

Click Next to continue.

6

Click Enterprise Buildings Integrator point server setup type.

7

The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any Critical Issues must be resolved before installation can proceed. Click Next to continue.

8

Type in the System number and the Authorization number as specified in your EBI license and click Next.

9

Click Typical Install.

10 Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell.

11 Select the check box for the type of point server you are upgrading and click

Next.

375

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

12 Type the password for the Windows mngr account in the Password box, as

specified in the System Design form. Confirm the password by typing it again in the Confirm Password box and then click Next. 13 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Upgrade to start

upgrading the point server. 14 When the upgrade is complete, click Finish. You will be prompted to restart

your computer. Click Yes to restart. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

376

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADING EBI COMPONENTS ON A CLIENT COMPUTER

Upgrading EBI components on a client computer This section describes how to upgrade EBI client applications, such Station and the displays, on a client computer. If appropriate, you can also upgrade other EBI client applications such as HMIWeb Display Builder and Quick Builder. There are two types of client upgrade available: •

A Typical client upgrade on the EBI client upgrades all EBI components available with the license. For more information about a Typical upgrade, see “Typical upgrade of the EBI components on a client computer” on page 377.

•

A Custom client upgrade allows you to select from a set of available EBI client applications. For more information about a Custom upgrade, see “Custom upgrade of the EBI components on a client computer” on page 378.

Typical upgrade of the EBI components on a client computer Prerequisites •

The EBI R410 DVD.

•

The EBI R410 license.

•

The System Design form (page 19).

To start the upgrade 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows administrator.

2

Disable any real-time virus protection software, such as Norton Anti-Virus. (This software may interfere with DVD detection during the installation procedure.)

3

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically displays. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

4

When the EBI installation wizard appears, click Upgrade. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 page appears.

5

Click Next to continue. The Upgrade Notification page appears. If you are upgrading to a new release on the same computer, the following message appears: “EBI Client R310 has been detected on your computer …”.

6

Click Next. 377

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

7

The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any Critical Issues must be resolved before installation can proceed. Click Next to continue.

8

Click Typical Install to install all components available with the license.

9

Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell.

If you want to change the base installation directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next. 10 Type the password for the Windows mngr account in the Password box, as

specified in the System Design form. Confirm the password by typing it again in the Confirm Password box and then click Next. 11 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Install to start

upgrading the EBI client applications. 12 When the upgrade is complete, click Finish. You will be prompted to restart

your computer. Click Yes to restart. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Custom upgrade of the EBI components on a client computer Prerequisites •

The EBI DVD

•

The System Design form

To perform a Custom upgrade of EBI components on a client computer

378

1

Log on to the computer as Windows administrator.

2

Disable any real-time virus protection applications, such as Norton AntiVirus. (Such an application may interfere with DVD detection during the installation procedure.)

3

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically displays. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.)

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADING EBI COMPONENTS ON A CLIENT COMPUTER

4

Click Upgrade. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 page appears.

5

Click Next to continue. The Upgrade Notification page appears. If you are upgrading to a new release on the same computer, the following message appears: “EBI Client R310 has been detected on your computer …”.

6

Click Next.

7

The System Check Warning page appears. Any possible installation issues are automatically detected, such as missing software, configuration or hardware issues. Any Critical Issues must be resolved before installation can proceed. Click Next to continue.

8

Select Custom as the type of upgrade installation.

9

Click Next to accept the default base installation directory, C:\Program Files\Honeywell. If you want to change the base installation directory, click the Browse button and locate the base installation folder, click OK and then click Next.

10 Select the Custom Installation Client options you want to upgrade, and then

click Next. 11 Type the password for the Windows mngr account in the Password box, as

specified in the System Design form. Confirm the password by typing it again in the Confirm Password box and then click Next. 12 If you chose to install MEDE, click Yes in the MEDE Choice page if you

want to allow Microsoft Excel Data Exchange to write to the EBI database. Click Next to continue. 13 Review the settings you have selected, and then click Install to start

upgrading the EBI client applications. 14 When the upgrade is complete, click Finish. You will be prompted to restart

your computer. Click Yes to restart. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

379

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Setting the EBI services to manual startup You use the PreUpgrade.vbs command-line utility to set the EBI services to manual startup, so that they don’t automatically restart each time you install an upgrade/service pack that requires a restart. (Setting the services to manual substantially reduces the restart time.) The following procedure shows how to set the services to manual. For a detailed description of the utility, see “PreUpgrade.vbs” on page 381. Prerequisites •

The EBI R410 DVD.

To set the services to manual 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows administrator.

2

Insert the EBI R410 DVD into the DVD drive.

3

Choose Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt to open a Command Prompt window.

4

Type cd /d d:\Utilities where d is the DVD drive, to navigate to the Utilities folder on the DVD.

5

Type PreUpgrade.vbs -manual

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “PreUpgrade.vbs” on page 381

380

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

SETTING THE EBI SERVICES TO MANUAL STARTUP

PreUpgrade.vbs The PreUpgrade.vbs command-line utility sets the EBI services to manual or automatic startup. Syntax PreUpgrade.vbs -manual|-auto [-psonly|-serveronly]

Part

Description

-manual|-auto

-manual sets the EBI services to manual startup. -auto sets the EBI services to automatic startup.

-psonly|-serveronly

-psonly restricts the manual/auto setting to point server

services. -serveronly restricts the manual/auto setting to EBI

server services. If no option is specified, all services are set to manual/ auto.

381

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Setting the EBI services to automatic startup You use the PreUpgrade.vbs command-line utility to set the EBI services to automatic startup after you have upgraded the EBI software. The following procedure shows how to set the services to manual. Prerequisites •

The EBI R410 DVD.

To set the services to manual 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows administrator.

2

Insert the EBI R410 DVD into the DVD drive.

3

Choose Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt to open a Command Prompt window.

4

Type cd /d d:\Utilities where d is the DVD drive, to navigate to the Utilities folder on the DVD.

5

Type PreUpgrade.vbs -auto

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “PreUpgrade.vbs” on page 381

382

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

COPYING THE EXISTING EBI DATABASES TO THE NEW COMPUTER

Copying the existing EBI databases to the new computer When moving archived data from an EBI R310 server to a new EBI R400 server, databases must be backed up on the R310 server and placed in a specific directory before copying them over to the R400 server. A utility named PrepareDataForUpgrade is available to assist with this process. Attention Running the PrepareDataForUpgrade utility will disconnect the R310 server from any other DSA servers and will break redundancy synchronization. The PrepareDataForUgrade utility only gathers data needed during migration. It does not gather information such as cardholder images, customized displays or Quick Builder files. Do not create a Program Files\Honeywell folder because the EBI installation wizard does this.

To copy the existing EBI databases to the new computer 1

Copy the file PrepareDataForUpgrade.bat from the \Utilities directory on the EBI R410 DVD to the EBI R310 server.

2

Run the PrepareDataForUpgrade utility.

3

A Warning about disconnecting the server from its DSA network appears. Type y and press ENTER.

4

Copy the \data directory to the new R410 server. The data directory on the R310 server is located in \Honeywell\server.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

To copy the existing remote point server databases to the new computer 1

Copy the file PrepareDataForUpgrade.bat from the \Utilities directory on the EBI R410 DVD to the remote point server.

2

Run the PrepareDataForUpgrade utility.

3

Copy the \%temp%\pointservers directory to the new remote point server computer. Tip

The %temp% represents the Windows default location for storing temporary files. To view the default location on the existing remote point server, right click My Computer and select Properties. Navigate to the Advanced tab and click Environment Variables.

383

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

384

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

DISABLING SQL SERVER REPLICATION

Disabling SQL Server replication Before you can upgrade an EBI server within a DSA system, or a redundant EBI server, you must disable SQL Server replication. To disable SQL Server replication 1

Choose Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt to open a Command Prompt window.

2

Type the following command to stop SQL Server replication: stoprepl all uninstall

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

385

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Migrating HMIWeb displays and shapes If you have any HMIWeb displays and shapes, you must migrate them to the current format. You migrate the displays and shapes using the BulkDisplayMigrator utility (BulkDisplayMigrator.exe), which is in the Program Files\Honeywell\client\HMIWeb Display Builder folder. You can migrate an individual display or shape by opening, saving and closing it in HMIWeb Display Builder. After migrating the displays and shapes, you can no longer open them in the old version of HMIWeb Display Builder. To migrate HMIWeb displays and shapes 1

Double-click BulkDisplayMigrator.exe. A dialog box opens.

2

Specify the folder in which the HMIWeb displays and/or shapes are located.

3

Click Go to migrate the displays and/or shapes.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

386

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

MIGRATING STATION-LEVEL SCRIPTS

Migrating Station-level scripts If you have any Station-level scripts (scripts attached to Station rather than to individual displays) you must either: •

Create a Station Scripting Object (SSO) that has the same functionality as your existing scripts You are encouraged to create SSOs because they are the long-term replacement for Station-level scripts. For details, see “Station Scripting Objects” in the Application Development Guide.

•

Attach them to the new Station.

Attaching scripts to the new Station Station-level scripts for an old Station are stored in a text file whose name and location is specified in the old connection file (*.stn), for example: AppScriptFile=C:\Program Files\Honeywell\client\Station\ scripts.txt

To attach the scripts 1

Copy the file containing the old scripts to the Station folder for the new Station.

2

Choose Station > Connection Properties to open the Connection Properties dialog box.

3

Click the Scripting tab.

4

Click Enable application script and either type the script file’s name (including its path) or click Browse to find and select the file.

5

Click Save to save the change to the connection.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

387

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Migrating Quick Builder projects If you have backed-up your Quick Builder projects, you need to restore and migrate them to the current EBI format. To migrate a Quick Builder project 1

Restore the backed-up Quick Builder projects.

2

Choose Start > All Programs > EBI Client Software > Quick Builder.

3

Double-click More files in the Quick Builder dialog box.

4

Browse to the location of the restored Quick Builder projects, select a Quick Builder project, and then click Open.

5

Click OK to open the project.

6

Click the Servers icon on the left pane and then select the EBI server in the Item List.

7

On the Main tab, set Server Type to Enterprise Buildings Integrator R410.

8

Choose File > Save. Quick Builder migrates the project to the current EBI format.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

388

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

MIGRATING FROM AN AREA-BASED SYSTEM TO A LOCATION-BASED SYSTEM

Migrating from an area-based system to a locationbased system In EBI R400 and later, the area-based structure used in previous release is replaced by the Facility Model. The data migration process involves the conversion of areas to locations. Accordingly, when you migrate your previous configuration data from EBI R310 to EBI R410, any areas configured for your system in previous releases of EBI are converted to locations and added to your Facility Model. Moreover, the migration process converts areas to top-level locations, that is, locations displayed at the top of your Facility Model hierarchy. The name and tagname for these newly converted top-level locations are derived from the area name. For example, if you had area names called A1, A2, and A3 in your preRelease 400 system, the migration process will convert these areas into top-level locations whose name and tagname are A1, A2, and A3 respectively. Similarly, any references to areas that were configured in previous releases of EBI are converted to references for the new top-level locations and added to your EBI Server database. Because the migration process is updated to the EBI Server database, you must follow up by uploading this information to Quick Builder. This action ensures that the information on the EBI Server stays in sync with the Quick Builder Projects database. Because the location information is uploaded to Quick Builder, it is important that channels, controllers, points, and locations have unique names. That is, locations cannot have the same name as a channel, controller, or point. If there are duplicate names, the upload to Quick Builder fails. To avoid an upload failing, prior to upgrading your EBI system, you should check that areas do not have the same name as any channel, controller, or point. If there are duplicates, you must rename your areas before the upgrade. Before uploading changed parameter information, consider the following: •

Whether part or all of a Facility Model is selected to be uploaded, the whole Facility Model and associated point information will be uploaded by default.

Renaming areas You have to rename areas prior to upgrading you system if areas have the same name as any other channel, controller, or point. To rename areas 1

In Station, on the System Configuration Menu display, click Areas. 389

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

2

Locate the area you want to rename.

3

In the Area Code box, type a new name for the area.

Uploading locations after the upgrade Prerequisites •

You have migrated your Quick Builder project

Uploading location information to Quick Builder 1

In Quick Builder, choose Tools > Component Manager. The Modify Project dialog box opens.

2

Ensure that the Facility check box is selected.

3

Click OK.

4

In the tree view highlight the Facility Model root node.

5

Choose Tools > Upload. The Upload dialog box will be shown with Selected Items Only check box preselected for you.

6

Click OK. Facility Model changes that were made in Station are now uploaded to the Quick Builder Projects database.

7

Repeat steps 1 to 6 for each Quick Builder project you have for your EBI system.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

390

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

RENAMING POINTS WITH ILLEGAL NAMES (POINT IDS)

Renaming points with illegal names (point IDs) EBI no longer tolerates illegal point names (point IDs), that is, names which contain illegal characters. (For a list of illegal characters, see “Point Names” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.) Consequently, if your existing system contains any illegal point names, you need to use the fixpointname.exe command-line utility to rename them. It is good practise to rename the points and ensure they are operational before you upgrade. The following procedure checks whether you have any illegal point names and replaces illegal characters with an underscore (_). For example, if the current point name is “main.boiler:2”, it will be changed to “main_boiler_2”. If you want to use another character or for more details about the utility, see “fixpointname.exe” on page 394. Caution If you have scripts that are attached to points that have illegal point names, contact your local Technical Assistance Center for information on extra steps that are required to rename points without losing the scripts.

Prerequisites •

You have created a backup of your points. For example, use bckbld or back up your Quick Builder database.

To check for and rename points with illegal names 1

Log on to the computer as a Windows administrator.

2

Choose Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt to open the Command Prompt window.

3

Type fixpointnames.exe -report InvalidPoints.txt This generates a report, InvalidPoints.txt, in the current folder that lists illegal point names.

391

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

4

If you have any illegal point names: a. Using the Start-stop utility in full mode, change the server state to

Database and Daemons. b. Replace the illegal characters with an underscore by typing at the

command prompt: fixpointnames -replace pointnames.log.txt _

(As the utility changes each name, it writes the details in pointnames.log.txt.) c. Type tagflb

This ensures that the tag file reflects the points in the database. d. Change the server state to System Running. 5

If you collect history on any of the renamed points: a. Locate the history archive files in Honeywell\server\archive folder. b. Ensure that the log file pointnames.log.txt is in the current directory. c. At the command prompt, type the following: fixhistoryarchives pointnames.log.txt

6

In Station, call up the point detail display of a point that is renamed to ensure it is operating correctly.

7

If you have any custom displays that reference these points, for each display: a. Open the display in HMIWeb Display Builder. b. Choose Tools > Rename Points. c. For each illegal point name referenced by the display, type the old point

name in Current point name and the new (legal) name in New point name and click Rename. d. Save the display, and check that it still shows the relevant point

information. 8

Check your system for any other point references that need to be updated to include new point names, such as reports and Microsoft Excel Data Exchange.

9

Back up your Quick Builder project.

10 In Quick Builder, open your project and delete any points with illegal point

names. 11 Remove the deleted points from the Recycle bin. Do not download the deleted

points to the server. 12 Upload all points from the server into Quick Builder. 13 After you have ensured your system is operating without any errors, create a

full system backup.

392

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

RENAMING POINTS WITH ILLEGAL NAMES (POINT IDS)

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “Naming rules for points” on page 260 “fixpointname.exe” on page 394

393

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

fixpointname.exe You use the fixpointname.exe command-line utility to: •

Check whether you have any illegal point names (point IDs), that is, names which contain illegal characters. (For a list of illegal characters, see “Point Names” in the Configuration and Administration Guide.)

•

Rename points that have illegal names

Syntax fixpointname.exe -replace [filename] [character] -report [filename] -rename [filename] -restore [filename]

where: Part

Description

-replace [filename] [character]

Automatically searches the database and replaces invalid characters in point names with the specified character. If no character is specified, the underscore character (_) is used. The list of renamed points is written to the specified file. Each line contain the original point name, then a space followed by the renamed point name.

-report [filename]

Searches for points with invalid characters in their names but does not modify the database. The list of points is written to the specified file. Each line contains one invalid point name.

-rename [filename]

Renames the list of points contained in the specified file. Each line in the file must contain the original point name, followed by a space and then the new point name.

-restore [filename]

Reverses a rename operation. The list of points to restore is obtained from the specified file. Each line must contain the original point name, followed by a space and then the renamed point name.

Remarks •

If you do not specify a filename for an option, the filename is assumed to be pointnames.log.txt.

•

Run tagflb.exe after renaming points to ensure the tag file reflects the points in the database.

Related topics “Naming rules for points” on page 260

394

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

ABOUT DOWNLOADING FIRE POINTS

About downloading fire points There have been changes to the way the operator prompt for a fire point is configured. The operator prompt is used in situations when a fire point is placed in lockout, for example, during routine site maintenance, and then re-enabled. If the point goes into alarm while it is in lockout and is then re-enabled, a fire alarm could be triggered. The prompt is provided to warn the operator that the point is in alarm before it is enabled. In EBI R310, the prompt was automatically configured if the Fire Point check box is selected on the Alarms tab for the point in Quick Builder. In EBI R400, the prompt had to be manually configured. In EBI R410, the prompt is automatically configured, however you must: 1. For each fire point, ensure the Fire Point check box is selected on the Alarm tab in Quick Builder. 2. Download the point from Quick Builder to the server regardless of which version of EBI you are upgrading from.

395

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Changes to CMS user fields If you have customized any CMS user fields in your R310 system, you need to perform some further configuration after the upgrade. User fields UF1 to UF4 in the R310 system are migrated to system fields in the Employee or ExternalRegular table in R410 using the following mappings: •

UF1 is migrated to Identifier

•

UF2 is migrated to Telephone

•

UF3 is migrated to Telephone2

•

UF4 is migrated to AlternateIdentifier

If you have customized these fields in your Release 310 system, you need to modify the field labels after the upgrade to Release 410 is complete. All other user fields in the R310 system are migrated to user fields UF1 to UFX in the EmployeeUserFields or ExternalRegularUserFields table in R410. For example, UF5 is migrated to UF1, UF6 is migrated to UF2, and so on. In R410 CMS displays cannot be edited directly. You can make user fields visible through the Cardholder Database Configuration display. New user fields appear at the bottom of the Details tab when a cardholder is called up. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

396

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPDATING CMS USER FIELD LABELS

Updating CMS user field labels User fields UF1 to UF4 in the R310 system are migrated to system fields in the Employee or ExternalRegular table in R410. If you have customized these fields you need to update the field labels. For example, in your R310 system you may have customized UF1 and had a label called Eye Color. After the upgrade, the label is renamed to Identifier. You need to rename Identifier to Eye Color. To update field labels 1

In Station choose Configure > Cardholder Management > Cardholder Database to call up the Cardholder Database display.

2

Click the tab of the cardholder type you want to update.

3

Select the user field whose label you want to update.

4

In the Label box, type the required label.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

397

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Checking the visibility of user fields on CMS displays In R310, you were able to add user fields to CMS display by directly editing the display. In R410 you cannot directly edit the CMS displays. After the upgrade process, you should check the CMS display to ensure that any user fields you added to displays in R310 are still visible. To check the visibility of user fields on CMS displays 1

In Station, open the CMS display that contains the user fields you added in R310.

2

Make a list of any fields that are not visible.

3

In Station choose Configure > Cardholder Management > Cardholder Database to call up the Cardholder Database display.

4

Click the tab of the cardholder type you want to update.

5

Select the user field whose label you want to update.

6

Select the Visible check box.

7

Repeat steps 4 to 6 for each of the fields you want to make visible.

Results •

The fields you have made visible appear at the bottom of the Details tab when a cardholder is called up.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

398

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

CREATING CARD LAYOUTS TO REPLACE DSP CARD LAYOUTS

Creating card layouts to replace DSP card layouts In EBI R410 DSP card layouts are not supported. If you have existing DSP card layouts, you must create a new HTM layout to replace them. The easiest way to create a new layout is to copy a sample HTM layout supplied with R410 and customize the sample to suit your requirements. The card layout is referenced in the card detail properties of each cardholder. This information is retained during the upgrade however the file extension is changed. For example, if cardholder had a layout called Tenant1.dsp, after the upgrade it is changed to Tenant1.sha. To reduce the upgrade tasks, when you create the new card layout use the existing name with the .sha extension. To create a card layout 1

Open the sample layout in Program Files\Honeywell\server\CMS\ PhotoID\CardLayouts.

2

Choose File > Save As and save the layout with the name that matches your previous layout with the .sha extension.

3

Modify the card layout as required.

4

If you want to include a database field in the layout, the name of the associated object must be in the format _. Where is the name of the database table that the field is coming from and is the name of the field to include. Examples of system fields are Employee_Name or ExternalRegular_Surname. Examples of user fields are EmployeeUserFields_UF15 or VehicleUserFields_UF4.

5

If you want to include a magnetic stripe or barcode, add a field to the layout called either BarCode or MagStripe.

6

Customize the Custom_MagStripeBarCode.js script as appropriate for you technology type. For detailed information about magnetic stripes and barcodes, see the topic Working with magnetic stripes and barcodes in the Access Control Configuration Guide for your specific controller type.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

399

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Migrating HTM card layouts There have been extensive changes to the CMS database in EBI R410. As a result, all databound objects on existing HTM card layouts must be deleted and re-created on the layout. Each databound field on the layout must be in the format _ where is the name of the database table and is the name of the database column where the data exists. As a result you need to create a separate layout for Employees, External Personnel and Vehicles. To migrate an existing HTM card layout 1

Open the card layout file in HMIWeb Display Builder.

2

Remove all of the objects on the card layout that are bound to the R310 CMS database.

3

Add the new objects and bind them to the required database fields using the format _. Where is the name of the database table that the field is coming from and is the name of the field to include. Examples of system fields are Employee_Name or ExternalRegular_Surname. Examples of user fields are EmployeeUserFields_UF15 or VehicleUserFields_UF4.

4

If you want to include a magnetic stripe or barcode, add a field to the layout called either BarCode or MagStripe.

5

Customize the Custom_MagStripeBarCode.js script as appropriate for you technology type. For detailed information about magnetic stripes and barcodes, see the topic Working with magnetic stripes and barcodes in the Access Control Configuration Guide for your specific controller type.

6

Save the layout.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

400

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADE TASKS FOR A LONWORKS POINT SERVER

Upgrade tasks for a LonWorks Point Server Attention Only complete a task in this section if you are instructed to do so by the appropriate checklist. See “Upgrade checklists” on page 49.

401

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Checking the name of the LNS database EBI R410 imposes the following limitations on the name of an LNS database: •

It must not be more than 14 characters long

•

It must not contain spaces or “@” characters

Check that name of your LNS database(s) comply with the naming rules. If it does not comply, you must rename it before upgrading the point server. (Renaming an LNS database involves importing it to a new database, which has a suitable name.) If you are using EXCEL 5000 via LON with the database, you may also need to change your C-Bus configuration (to update the name of the LNS database) after renaming the database. Use the C-Bus Configuration Tool to perform this task. To rename an LNS database 1

Stop the LonWorks point server and any other services that use the LNS database (such as an EXCEL 5000 Direct point server and a Remote Synch server).

2

Start the LonWorks Point Server Configuration tool.

3

Click the LonWorks tab and click Import Database.

4

Browse to the location of your existing LNS database to populate the “Network Database Folder”. This folder usually has the same name as your LNS Database.

5

In Network Name type the new name for your LNS database.

6

Click Import and follow the prompts.

7

When the import is complete, go back to the LonWorks Point Server Plug-in and for Network select your new name for the LNS database.

8

Click Launch to launch the LonWorks Point Server Plug-in and to associate the new name with the point server.

9

Close the LonWorks Point Server Plug-in.

10 Restart the LonWorks Point Server and any other services that use this

database.

402

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADE TASKS FOR A LONWORKS POINT SERVER

Backing up the LonWorks point server data on the existing point server computer You must back up the LonWorks point server data before upgrading the point server. To back up the data 1

Stop the LonWorks point server and any other services that use the LNS database (such as an EXCEL 5000 Direct point server and a Remote Synch server). Tip

You can use the RSS Configuration tool to stop the RSS server and the LNS server service.

2

Copy the LNS database(s) from the existing point server computer by copying all files in the folder that has the same name as each of the LNS database(s) (usually under c:\lm) to a location that is accessible to the new point server computer.

3

Copy any XML templates that you have created or templates that were not supplied by Honeywell from Honeywell\pointservers\lps\templates on the existing point server computer to a location that is accessible to the new point server computer, preferably on the new computer’s hard drive.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

403

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Restoring LonWorks point server data The LNS database(s) from the old computer need to be restored on the new computer. This can be done using the Import function in the LonWorks Configuration Tool. Prerequisites •

The LonWorks Network Interface is installed and configured.

•

The backup tasks have been performed.

•

The LonWorks point server components have been installed.

To restore the LonWorks point server data 1

Start the LonWorks Configuration tool.

2

Enter the name of the EBI server the point server is connected to.

3

Enter the alias EBI uses for the LonWorks point server.

4

Import the LNS database to the new computer: a. Click the LonWorks tab and click Import Database. b. Enter the location of the LNS Network. c. Enter a new Network name or click Browse to select an existing LNS

Network. d. If required, change the database location. e. Click Import. f.

If the LNS Network already exists, you are prompted to confirm to replace it.

g. Repeat steps a to f for each LNS database you are restoring. 5

If you have any non-default templates, copy them from the backup location to the appropriate template folder: •

\Program Files\Honeywell\pointservers\lps\templates\si (if

you

use metric units) •

\Program Files\Honeywell\pointservers\lps\templates\us (if

you

use US units) 6

404

Transfer the LNS license to the new computer using the LNS Server License transfer utility. By transferring the license, any device credits are also transferred to the new computer. If you are merging point servers, there are issues with overwriting credits. For more information about LNS credits when merging point servers, see the topic, LNS licensing, in the section, Planning and Preparation, in the LonWorks Interface Reference.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADE TASKS FOR A LONWORKS POINT SERVER

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

405

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Reapplying customizations to the XML templates If you customized any of the default XML templates supplied with the earlier release of EBI, you may need to reapply your customizations to the new default templates. The customizations you need to reapply are: •

Any point definitions that do not exist in the new default templates

•

Any parameter definitions that do not exist in the new default templates

•

Any parConversion definitions

•

Any enum definitions

If you upgraded the point server on the existing computer, the EBI installation automatically backs up your templates and copies them to either: •

\Program Files\Honeywell\pointservers\lps\templates\si\backup (if

you use metric units) •

\Program Files\Honeywell\pointservers\lps\templates\us\backup (if

you use US units)

406

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADE TASKS FOR EXCEL 5000 DIRECT

Upgrade tasks for EXCEL 5000 Direct Attention Only complete a task in this section if you are instructed to do so by the appropriate checklist. See “Upgrade checklists” on page 49.

407

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Backing up EXCEL 5000 Direct data before upgrading You must back up the EXCEL 5000 Direct data before upgrading the point server. Prerequisites •

Pen and paper to record the existing settings.

To back up EXCEL 5000 Direct data 1

In Windows Control Panel, open C-bus to start the Honeywell C-Bus Configuration tool.

2

If you have EXCEL 5000 Direct Dial-Up, click Modem Configuration to open the Modem Pool Configuration dialog box.

3

Record the setup details for each modem in the modem pool.

4

Exit the Honeywell C-Bus Configuration tool.

5

Copy alarmrecovery.bin to %windir%\system32 on new point server computer. Attention It is important that the alarmrecovery.bin file exists in the location specified before the Upgrade process in initiated.

6

If you have EXCEL 5000 via LON, back up the LNS database by copying all files in the folder that has the same name as the LNS database (usually under c:\lm) to a location that is accessible to the new point server computer.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

408

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

UPGRADE TASKS FOR EXCEL 5000 DIRECT

Restoring EXCEL 5000 Direct data Prerequisites •

The record of existing settings you created when backing up the existing EXCEL 5000 Direct data.

To restore the EXCEL 5000 Direct data 1

Stop the EXCEL 5000 Direct point server on the new computer.

2

In Windows Control Panel, open C-bus to start the Honeywell C-Bus Configuration tool. Tip

3

If you have already restored LonWorks point server data, steps 3 and 4 have been completed, you can go straight to step 5.

If you have EXCEL 5000 via LON, import the LNS Database as follows: a. Click Import. b. Enter the location of the LNS network. c. Enter a new Network name or click Browse to select an existing LNS

network. d. If required, change the database location. e. Click Import. 4

If you have EXCEL 5000 via Lon, click Initialize to initialize the devices.

5

If you have EXCEL 5000 Direct Dial-Up, click Modem Configuration to open the Modem Pool Configuration dialog box.

6

Re-configure each modem, as recorded during the backup procedure. Note that the new computer or operating system may have installed the modems with different names.

7

Start the EXCEL 5000 Direct point server.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

409

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

About Global Schedules migration The original, pre-Outlook style Global Schedules are no longer supported and need to migrated to the new Global Schedules available with the latest release of EBI. To learn about the new concepts related to the new Global Schedules, see the topic “About Global Schedules” in the Configuration and Administration Guide. The original schedules are retained in the controller and continue to operate however you must migrate the old schedules so that you have a “global view” of all of your schedules and so that you can update schedules as required. There is a migration utility that creates new Global Schedules to replace your old schedules. The migration steps are: 1. Migrate the original Global Schedules. The migration utility creates new Global Schedules to replace the original Global Schedules. 2. Validate the new Global Schedules and ensure that your scheduling requirements are addressed by the new schedules. 3. Download the new Global Schedules. (At this point, the controller has both the new schedule and the old schedule.) 4. Delete the old Global Schedules. Before starting the migration of your schedules, consider the timing of the migration, particularly downloading to controllers, so that you do not disrupt the operation of the building during business hours. An automatic daily download occurs at 00:13 every day. You should aim to complete the download before this occurs. Before commencing any download, you should make sure that the controllers are online and operating without any errors to avoid any problems during the download. There are several download options. You should choose the download option that best suits your site. The download options are:

410

•

Download Modified Resources. This option downloads all of the resources in the list of modified resources. (A resource is a new concept in the new Global Schedules, and maps to schedules in the original Global Schedules.)

•

Download Selected Resources. You can choose which resources you want to download. This is useful if you have a large number of resources so you can download resources for particular parts of the building. This option helps to prevent placing a large load on the system if you have a lot of resources.

•

Download Selected Controllers. This option downloads the resources relevant to the controllers that you select. This is only applicable for original Global Schedules you have created for Excel 5000 controllers.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

ABOUT GLOBAL SCHEDULES MIGRATION

Related topics “Migrating Global Schedules” on page 412

411

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Migrating Global Schedules To migrate Global Schedules 1

In the Command Zone in Station type syscfggtsmigration and press ENTER. The Global Schedules Migration display appears.

2

Click Migrate to start the migration. When the migration has finished, the word Completed appears under the Migrate button.

3

Click the migration summary link to view the results of the migration. The Global Schedules Migration Results display appears. The migration results list all the old schedules that have been migrated. Tip

Print the migration results to use when you validate the Global Schedules migration.

4

Click the Back button (on the Station toolbar) to return to the Global Schedules Migration display.

5

Click the Global Schedules link. The Global Schedules display appears.

6

Use the migration results to validate that your original schedules have been migrated to the new Global Schedules.

7

Choose View > System Status. The System Status display appears. Check that your controllers are online and operating correctly. Downloading schedules to a controller that is offline causes errors. If there is a problem with any controller, you should rectify this problem before downloading.

8

In the Command Zone in Station type syscfggtsmigration and press ENTER to return to the Global Schedules Migration display.

9

After you have validated the new schedules and verified that controllers are online, click the Global Schedules Download Summary link.

10 Download the Global Schedules using the download option that best suits

your site requirements:

412

•

Download Modified Resources. Use this option if you have a small number of resources. You can use this option if you have a large number of resources, however, if there are any errors, it may be more difficult to identify which resource or controller produced the error.

•

Download Selected Resources. Use this option if you have a large number of resources and you want to download schedules for particular parts of

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

ABOUT GLOBAL SCHEDULES MIGRATION

the building to minimize impact on the system or the occupants of the building. This option also makes it easier to identify and troubleshoot any errors. •

Download Selected Controllers. Use this option if you want to download schedules for a specific controller. You can only use this option for Excel 5000 controllers.

11 Click OK to confirm the download. 12 When you have downloaded all of your Global Schedules, in the Command

Zone in Station type syscfggtsmigration and press ENTER to return to the Global Schedules Migration display. 13 Click Delete All to delete the old Global Schedules.

The Daily Schedules added to the relevant Excel 500 controllers by the original Global Schedules are removed from the controllers. Any point control schedules added by the Original global schedules are removed. When the deletions are successfully downloaded, the schedule name is removed from the list.

413

18 – UPGRADE TASKS

Updating the server alias The server alias is used to identify servers within a DSA. The alias is used in reports, the System Status display, alarms, and events for servers in a DSA as well as standalone servers. When you install a new server, the alias is the same as the computer name. You can change this alias. If you change the alias, when you upgrade your server to a new computer, the server alias is retained. Depending on your site, this may be suitable. However, this may cause issues if you use a different computer name when you upgrade and you expect the alias to be reset. For example, you have a server with a computer name of Robert_XYZ, and you have set the alias to, BOB. You upgraded the server to a new computer and used the computer name James_ XYZ, the alias remains as BOB. To update the server alias

414

1

In the Command Zone in Station type sysServersLclCfg and press ENTER. The Distributed Server Local Configuration display appears.

2

In the Server Alias box, type the required alias.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Removing EBI

19

This section describes how to remove EBI and its associated applications from the server and client computers. The setup program only removes files that it installed. It does not remove files created after installation, such as Quick Builder projects. After you have removed EBI, it is recommended you check and, if appropriate, manually delete, any files left in the C:\Program Files\Honeywell folder and its subfolders. Caution You must back up all EBI database files on the server before removing EBI because the removal process destroys the server database.

Prerequisites •

You have backed up all database files.

To:

Go to:

Uninstall EBI

page 416

Remove EBI server components

page 417

Remove Microsoft SQL Server from the server.

page 418

Remove EBI client applications

page 419

415

19 – REMOVING EBI

Uninstalling EBI EBI can be uninstalled by using the EBI Installation wizard which opens when the EBI DVD is inserted or when initiated through the Windows Control Panel. To remove all EBI components from the server or client 1

Log on as a Windows administrator.

2

Stop the EBI server.

3

Insert the EBI DVD into the DVD drive. The Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 start page automatically displays. (You can also start the installation wizard from Windows Explorer. Browse to the root folder on the DVD and double-click the setup.exe file.) The InstallShield Wizard starts.

4

Click Next to continue.

5

Click the Uninstall Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 option button and click Next.

6

Click Uninstall to remove the program from your computer.

7

Restart the computer so that the change takes effect.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “Starting and stopping the EBI server” on page 206

416

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

REMOVING THE EBI SERVER COMPONENTS

Removing the EBI server components EBI server components can be removed using the EBI Installation wizard which opens when the EBI DVD is inserted or when initiated through the Windows Control Panel. To remove the EBI server components from the server 1

Log on as a Windows administrator.

2

Stop the EBI server.

3

Choose Start > Control Panel > Uninstall a program.

4

Click Enterprise Buildings Integrator 410 and click Change.

5

Browse to and select the location of the EBI DVD and then click Next. The Welcome dialog box automatically displays.

6

Click Next to continue.

7

Click Remove components and click Next. The System CheckWarning dialog box automatically displays.

8

Verify that no critical issues are listed and click Next to continue.

9

Select the options that you are removing and click Uninstall.

10 Restart the computer so that the change takes effect. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

Related topics “Starting and stopping the EBI server” on page 206

417

19 – REMOVING EBI

Removing Microsoft SQL Server Attention If Microsoft SQL Server is being utilized for non-Honeywell related processes, do not complete this task.

As part of the EBI uninstall process, you must remove Microsoft SQL Server (after removing EBI) because it is not removed automatically when EBI is removed. To remove Microsoft SQL Server from the server 1

Log on as a Windows administrator.

2

Choose Start > Control Panel > Uninstall a program.

3

Click Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and click Change/Remove. The SQL Server Installation Wizard starts and Setup support rules verify your configuration.

4

Click OK to continue.

5

Choose the instance of SQL Server to remove and click Next.

6

Select the features to remove for the instance of SQL server you are removing and click Next. The removal rules verify that the uninstallation will process correctly.

7

Click Next.

8

Review the list of components to be uninstalled.

9

Click Remove.

10 When the uninstallation is complete, click Close. 11 Repeat steps 3 to 10 to remove other SQL Server components. Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

418

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

REMOVING EBI CLIENT APPLICATIONS

Removing EBI client applications This section describes how to remove EBI client applications, such as Station, Display Builder, HMIWeb Display Builder and Quick Builder, from the server or client. To remove a client application 1

Log on as a Windows administrator.

2

Stop the EBI server. See “Starting and stopping the EBI server” on page 206.

3

Choose Start > All Programs > Enterprise Buildings Integrator > Setup.

4

Click Next in the Welcome dialog box.

5

Click Modify.

6

Click Remove selected components from EBI or perform a full uninstall and click Next.

7

Select the component(s) to remove and click Next.

8

Check the options that you are removing and click Uninstall.

9

Restart the computer so that the change takes effect.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

419

19 – REMOVING EBI

420

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Troubleshooting

20

This section provides troubleshooting information.

Category

Go to:

Installing EBI on the server

page 422

Starting EBI on the server

page 423

Windows-related problems

page 424

DNS Performance in a Redundant Server System

page 425

Network interface cards (network adapters)

page 426

Modems

page 427

Terminal servers

page 428

421

20 – TROUBLESHOOTING

EBI server installation problems If you cannot install EBI, check the log file, setup.log, by opening it with Notepad or other text editor. If you are installing EBI onto the ESX or ESXi VMware platform, you cannot use remote desktop to perform the installation. You need to use VNC or Radmin to ensure EBI installs successfully. Check that the drive to which you are installing EBI is not compressed. EBI and Microsoft SQL server cannot be installed onto a compressed hard drive. The first time you attempt to install EBI, the log file is created in the folder specified by the TEMP environment variable. During subsequent installations, the log file is created in Server\Setup. There are several other log files created in TEMP\HoneywellInstallLogDateTime where DateTime is the date and time (in year, month day, hour, minutes, seconds format) that you installed EBI. If you cannot resolve the problem, zip the \HoneywellInstallLogDateTime folder and the setup.log file and forward to your Honeywell representative for help.

422

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

EBI SERVER STARTUP PROBLEMS

EBI server startup problems Cause If network drives are listed in the system variable path, you must remove them and add them to the user variables path. Solution 1. Choose Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance. 2. Click System and then click Advanced system settings. 3. Click the Advanced tab, then click Environment Variables to display the environment settings for the system and user variables. 4. Under System Variables, scroll down the list to Path to see the inclusions and ensure that there are no drives other than local drives (for example, C: or D:) are listed. 5. If there are any network drives: a. Remove them from the list. b. If they are required, add them to the User Variables path.

423

20 – TROUBLESHOOTING

Windows-related problems Cause If you have any TCP/IP problems, use the TCP/IP utilities installed with Microsoft TCP/IP. For information on solving these problems, consult the documentation that came with your operating system. Diagnostic check If you experience Windows-related performance problems, check that: •

The maximum system paging file size is adequate for your memory requirements.

•

The screen display rates are optimum. Try decreasing the video resolution to improve the screen display rates.

•

There is no graphics- or CPU-intensive screen saver. Screen savers often require significant CPU effort, to the detriment of core applications.

•

In the case of the server, Optimize Performance is set to Background Services. (Double-click the System icon in Windows Control Panel, click the Advanced tab and then click Performance Options.)

•

If you are running Windows Server 2003 R2, ensure that it is optimized for network applications.

Solution 1. In Windows Control Panel, open Network and Dial-up Connections. 2. Double-click the network connection and click Properties. 3. Select File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks and click Properties. 4. Select Maximize data throughout for network applications and click OK. 5. Click OK to close the Connection Properties dialog box and click Close to close the Connection Status dialog box. Related topics “Memory and swapfile/pagefile” on page 439

424

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

DNS PERFORMANCE IN A REDUNDANT SERVER SYSTEM

DNS performance in a redundant server system If you have a Domain Name Service (DNS) and you use the server basename, client applications can take up to 30 seconds to resolve the network name to an IP address, if the DNS is slow to respond due to performance or network issues. The first time a spreadsheet is called up or a networked application is run, it might take between one to two minutes to determine the network architecture, find a valid link to the primary server, and return requested data. A hosts file configuration is recommended on client computers, rather than a DNS, because the hosts file allows the name to be resolved in about one to two seconds.

425

20 – TROUBLESHOOTING

Network interface cards (network adapters) The network interface card is installed but isn’t working properly When you install Windows, it generally recognizes the network interface cards. However, if it does not, run the Add Hardware wizard from Windows Control Panel.

426

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

MODEMS

Modems The modem connects but doesn’t stay connected If the phone line has a “call waiting” facility, incoming calls may throw the modem off-line, so disable “call waiting”. If that doesn’t work, check that the flow control set correctly. For 9,600 baud and faster modems, it must be set to hardware flow control. When the modem is used, the system locks up or crashes This problem usually results from an interrupt conflict. Two devices may be trying to use the same interrupt. For example, a conflict exists if the computer has a serial mouse on COM1, which uses IRQ 4, and the modem is on COM3 (which, by default, also uses IRQ 4).

427

20 – TROUBLESHOOTING

Terminal server problems Attention In order to test communications with a terminal server, the EBI server Daemon service, at least, must be started.

Cannot communicate with the terminal server through HyperTerminal Check the following: •

You are using the correct cable between the configuration computer and terminal server, and it is connected.

•

No application other than HyperTerminal is using that COM port.

•

The login via Port 1 of the terminal server has not been disabled.

•

The terminal server is switched on.

•

You have set the COM port settings to the appropriate values for terminal server you are configuring.

•

The Port 1 access setting on the terminal server is local. If login via Port 1 server has been disabled, you may need to reset the terminal server.

Cannot communicate with the terminal server through Telnet Check the following: •

The terminal server is switched on.

•

The terminal server is connected to the LAN and the NET light is flashing.

•

The computer is connected to the LAN.

•

The terminal server’s IP address is correct.

•

The gateway address is correct (if the terminal server is connected through a router).

Terminal server channel fails immediately after enabling the channel Check the following:

428

•

The terminal server is switched on.

•

The controller communicating through the terminal server is switched on.

•

All cables between the controller, terminal server and server are connected.

•

The channel properties are correctly defined for that type of terminal server in Quick Builder.

•

The entries in the hosts file are correct.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

TERMINAL SERVER PROBLEMS

•

The IP address is not being used by any other devices.

•

There is no other channel communicating with the same TCP number.

Terminal server channel fails intermittently Check the following: •

The gateway address is correct (if the terminal server is connected through a router).

•

The channel’s read and write times are correct for your system.

429

20 – TROUBLESHOOTING

430

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

Tuning server performance

21

This section describes how to customize Microsoft Windows to gain the best performance for EBI. To learn about:

Go to:

The basics of server tuning

page 432

Tuning the Windows kernel

page 433

Optimizing the performance of the hard disk

page 434

Optimizing the memory and swapfile/pagefile settings

page 439

Optimizing the performance of the network

page 442

Optimizing the performance of server redundancy

page 448

Optimizing other settings

page 449

Monitoring your system assessing the need for hardware upgrades

page 451

431

21 – TUNING SERVER PERFORMANCE

Introduction This section describes background information to help you understand the performance requirements of EBI systems. Performance Performance describes the speediness of a system to react to series of tasks, and includes the ability to perform those tasks in a reliable manner. There are two aspects of performance: overall system and individual application/component performance. Overall system performance can often be interchanged with reliability. Reliability is most affected by the configuration of drivers and related software that make up the system. Individual application/component performance on the other hand, can often be configured through the use of software settings and hardware components. Together, these affect the overall experience and speediness of the system to perform tasks. Performance needs Reliability and system availability are the primary concern. The main goals are to make sure that the system is available to the user at any point of time, and that the application is responsive and presenting the correct data. The remainder of this section focuses on the computer components of EBI that effect reliability, system availability, and performance.

432

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

TUNING THE WINDOWS KERNEL

Tuning the Windows Kernel This section describes how to tune the Windows kernel, which changes the way in which Windows assigns process priorities. Prerequisites •

To tune the operating system, you must be logged on with administrator privileges.

To tune the Windows kernel on Windows Server 2008 or Windows 7 1

Click Start and right-click Computer and choose Properties.

2

In the left pane, click Advanced system settings.

3

Click the Advanced tab.

4

Click Settings in the Performance group to display the Performance Options dialog box.

5

Click the Advanced tab.

6

In the Processor scheduling group, select Programs.

7

Click OK. The Windows operating system assigns higher priority to user applications, such as Station or Quick Builder, than to background processes.

To tune the Windows kernel on Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP 1

On the Windows desktop, right-click the My Computer icon and choose Properties.

2

Click the Advanced tab.

3

Click Settings in the Performance group to display the Performance Options dialog box.

4

Click the Advanced tab.

5

In the Processor scheduling group, select Programs.

6

In the Memory usage group, select Programs.

7

Click OK. The Windows operating system assigns higher priority to user applications, such as Station or Quick Builder, than to background processes.

433

21 – TUNING SERVER PERFORMANCE

Disk management Disk performance, or the capability of the computer to access and store files on the hard disk, can greatly affect the performance of the computer. Other than hard disk failures, there are two file system (the format of storage on the hard disk) issues that affect the computer: •

File System Errors

•

Fragmentation

Related topics “Fixing File System errors” on page 435 “Defragmenting the file system” on page 437

434

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

DISK MANAGEMENT

Fixing File System errors File system errors can occur during the following events: •

Power outages

•

Improper shutdown

•

Disk hardware malfunction.

Attention To fix file system errors, you need to restart the computer. Ensure you have no other applications running.

To fix file system errors on Windows Server 2008 or Windows 7 1

Choose Start > Computer.

2

Right-click the hard disk and choose Properties.

3

Click the Tools tab.

4

Click Check Now in the Error-checking group to display the Check Disk dialog box.

5

Select the Automatically fix files system errors check box and then click Start.

6

Click Yes to schedule the operation to occur the next time the computer is started.

7

Restart the computer. The computer checks for file system errors during startup.

8

Log on.

9

Review the disk report in the Event Viewer. To display the Event View: a. On the Windows desktop, right-click the My Computer icon and choose

Manage. b. Expand the Event Viewer item and then click the Application item.

If the disk report contains bad sector error, you must restart this procedure and select the Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors option. It is recommended that hard disks that continually report bad sectors be scheduled for replacement, as it usually indicates that the hard disk is experiencing hardware malfunctions. To fix file system errors on Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP 1

On the Windows desktop, double-click the My Computer icon.

2

Right-click the hard disk to check and choose Properties.

3

Click the Tools tab.

435

21 – TUNING SERVER PERFORMANCE

4

Click Check Now in the Error-checking group to display the Check Disk dialog box.

5

Select Automatically fix files system errors and then click Start.

6

Click Yes to schedule the operation to occur the next time the computer is started.

7

Restart the computer. The computer checks for file system errors during startup.

8

Log on.

9

Review the disk report in the Event Viewer. To display the Event View: a. On the Windows desktop, right-click the My Computer icon and choose

Manage. b. Expand the Event Viewer item and then click the Application item.

If the disk report contains bad sector error, you must restart this procedure and select the Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors option. It is recommended that hard disks that continually report bad sectors be scheduled for replacement, as it usually indicates that the hard disk is experiencing hardware malfunctions.

436

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

DISK MANAGEMENT

Defragmenting the file system Although the NT file system (NTFS) attempts to minimize file system fragmentation, it is often the most frequent performance issue during normal computer operations. Fragmentation is when a file or piece of data is written to the hard disk and it is not written contiguously. This causes the computer to perform multiple read and lookups every time the file is accessed. The process of defragmentation optimizes the file system by making each file on the disk occur contiguously. In addition, certain files, such as the operating system or frequently accessed files, are moved to the first sectors on the hard disk. This enables these files to be found and accessed faster. Fragmentation occurs frequently and affects the performance of EBI systems. It is recommended that administrators of the EBI system add this task to the plant maintenance schedule, so that it occurs during shutdowns. The default fragmentation utility included in Windows can be upgraded to the full version. Executive Software’s Diskeeper includes a scheduler and the ability to defragment directories and page files when a computer restarts. Defragmentation tasks effect the control system if they are set to run automatically with the scheduler. Care must be taken when scheduling defragmentation events. To defragment the hard disk on Windows Server 2008 or Windows 7 1

Choose Start > Computer.

2

Right-click the hard disk and choose Properties.

3

Click the Tools tab.

4

Click Defragment now in the Defragmentation group to display the Disk Defragmentor dialog box.

5

Select the hard disk to defragment, and then click Analyze. This analyzes the fragmentation level of the drive. Large areas of red indicate that the hard disk is fragmented. Large areas of blue indicate that the computer is mostly contiguous.

6

Click Defragment on the Analysis Complete dialog box to start defragmenting the hard disk, even if this dialog box recommends that no defragmentation is required. Depending on the level of fragmentation and usage, the task may take some time to complete.

Stop You have completed this task. Return to the checklist that led to this task.

437

21 – TUNING SERVER PERFORMANCE

To defragment the hard disk on Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP

438

1

On the Windows desktop, double-click the My Computer icon.

2

Right-click the hard disk to defragment and choose Properties.

3

Click the Tools tab.

4

Click Defragment now in the Defragmentation group to display the Disk Defragmentor dialog box.

5

Select the hard disk to defragment, and then click Analyze. This analyzes the fragmentation level of the drive. Large areas of red indicate that the hard disk is fragmented. Large areas of blue indicate that the computer is mostly contiguous.

6

Click Defragment on the Analysis Complete dialog box to start defragmenting the hard disk, even if this dialog box recommends that no defragmentation is required. Depending on the level of fragmentation and usage, the task may take some time to complete.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

MEMORY AND SWAPFILE/PAGEFILE

Memory and swapfile/pagefile There are two types of memory that exist in a computer: physical and virtual. Multi-tasking operating systems, such as Windows XP, can take memory space occupied by data in the physical RAM and swap it into a file. This frees up the physical RAM for other processes. If the process requires data that has been swapped into a file, a page fault occurs and the page is swapped back from the file into the physical RAM before the process continues. This type of management is called paging, and the associated swapfile is called the page file. Viewing memory usage In the Windows Task Manager dialog box you can view memory usage. Click the Performance tab to view the Commit Charge (K) group, which displays the total memory available in physical and virtual memory combined (the Limit value), and Physical Memory (K) group, which displays the amount of physical memory available for use. Page file settings Page file settings include a lower and upper limit. The lower limit is typically the amount of physical RAM plus management space. This is almost always 1.5 times the amount of physical RAM. Windows XP, in normal operation, will only use the lower limit size, and therefore only the value of the lower limit (Initial Size) is pre-allocated. If the usage exceeds this limit, the computer will then continue to allocate additional space until the upper limit (Maximum Size) is reached or the computer runs out of hard disk space. If this occurs, it usually means that an application/process is leaking memory. Memory configurations Some paging of memory for systems is normal. Excessive paging impacts computer performance during the swapping and allocation phases. Memory performance can be degraded during some operations as long as they are not prolonged or part of normal computer operations. The goal when calculating memory settings is to produce a balanced computer, that is, a computer with enough physical RAM for normal operations and the ability to page when an abnormal event occurs. Systems who perform paging operations frequently during normal operations will receive performance benefits by adding more physical RAM. At any time memory is added or removed from the computer, the operating system must be adjusted based on the usage described below.

439

21 – TUNING SERVER PERFORMANCE

Calculating pagefile settings To calculate the initial size (MB) for virtual memory, use the following formula: SysType + (Chans * 7) + (Stns * 4)

where: Part

Description

SysType

For EBI with the Building Manager option, this value is 228. For EBI with the Security Manager option or for an integrated EBI server, this value is 356.

Chans

The number of channels connected to the server. Determine the number of channels from your license certificate.

Stns

The number of Stations connected to the server. Determine the number of Stations from your license certificate.

If the minimum virtual memory value calculated using this formula is less than the minimum value recommended by the Windows operating system, use the Windows minimum value. The maximum size is double the initial size.

440

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

MEMORY AND SWAPFILE/PAGEFILE

Adjusting swapfile/pagefile size To adjust the swapfile/pagefile size on Windows Server 2008 or Windows 7 1

Click Start and right-click Computer and choose Properties.

2

In the left pane click Advanced system settings.

3

Click the Advanced tab of the System Properties dialog box.

4

Click Settings in the Performance group.

5

Click the Advanced tab of the Performance Options dialog box.

6

Click Change to display the Virtual Memory dialog box.

7

Select System managed size, and then click Set. Tip

If the System managed size option is “grayed out”, clear the Automatically manage paging file size for all drives check box.

For these changes to take effect, you need to restart the computer. When you click OK to accept previous dialog boxes, you are prompted to restart the computer. To adjust the swapfile/pagefile size on Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP 1

On the Windows desktop, right-click the My Computer icon and choose Properties.

2

Click the Advanced tab of the System Properties dialog box.

3

Click Settings in the Performance group.

4

Click the Advanced tab of the Performance Options dialog box.

5

Click Change to display the Virtual Memory dialog box.

6

Select System managed size, and then click Set. For these changes to take effect, you need to restart the computer. When you click OK to accept previous dialog boxes, you are prompted to restart the computer.

441

21 – TUNING SERVER PERFORMANCE

Networking A network is the communication media between servers, clients, and devices. If this network is not tuned properly, the following problems may occur:

442

•

Poor client application performance.

•

Intermittent or complete device communication failure.

•

Loss of redundancy between servers.

•

Intermittent or complete loss of communication between clients and servers.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

NETWORKING

Network optimization In the Windows operating system there are several settings to optimize the network. It is recommended that these settings be combined with an overall plan to monitor and adjust to the traffic on the network. Consult your networking equipment vendor for tools and management applications that work best with your hardware. Operating system tuning (page 433) affects the ability of the computer to respond to network traffic. If you have not applied these settings, you must perform them now. The order in which the systems access the network is also important. Known as the Binding Order, it is recommended they be adjusted so that each computer accesses the network in the same order. If your computer has more than 1 network card, you must verify that the bindings for each computer are in the correct order.

443

21 – TUNING SERVER PERFORMANCE

Management of traffic If your control system uses an Ethernet network for the Control network, you can achieve network performance benefits by restricting the type of traffic over this network. Windows operating systems, by default, use all network cards defined in a computer for communication with other systems as long as the networks are common between the initiator and target.

444

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

NETWORKING

Adjusting bindings and disabling protocols on standard networks To adjust bindings or disable protocols on standard networks on Windows Server 2008 1

Choose Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center.

2

Click Manage Network Connections.

3

Press ALT to show the menu and choose Advanced > Advanced Settings to display the Advanced Settings dialog box.

4

In the Connections list, the order of items must be: •

Primary Supervisory Network.

•

Backup Supervisory Network, if you have redundant networks.

• Supervisory Control Network, if you are doing control over Ethernet. Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to the right of the Connections list to correctly order these items. 5

If the system has a Supervisory Control Network: a. Click the Supervisory Control Network item in the Connections list. b. Clear the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks check box in

the Bindings list. 6

Click OK.

To adjust bindings or disable protocols on standard networks on Windows 7 1

Choose Start > Control Panel.

2

Under Network and Internet, click View network status and tasks.

3

In the left pane click Change adapter settings.

4

Press ALT to show the menu and choose Advanced > Advanced Settings to display the Advanced Settings dialog box.

5

In the Connections list, the order of items must be: •

Primary Supervisory Network.

•

Backup Supervisory Network, if you have redundant networks.

• Supervisory Control Network, if you are doing control over Ethernet. Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to the right of the Connections list to correctly order these items.

445

21 – TUNING SERVER PERFORMANCE

6

If the system has a Supervisory Control Network: a. Click the Supervisory Control Network item in the Connections list. b. Clear the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks check box in

the Bindings list. 7

Click OK.

To adjust bindings or disable protocols on standard networks on Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP 1

On the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and choose Properties.

2

Choose Advanced > Advanced Settings to display the Advanced Settings dialog box.

3

In the Connections list, the order of items must be: •

Primary Supervisory Network.

•

Backup Supervisory Network, if you have redundant networks.

• Supervisory Control Network, if you are doing control over Ethernet. Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to the right of the Connections list to correctly order these items. 4

If the system has a Supervisory Control Network: a. Click the Supervisory Control Network item in the Connections list. b. Clear the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks check box in

the Bindings list. 5

446

Click OK.

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

NETWORKING

Benefits from other Network Services Optimizing the use of Network Browsing services can reduce the number of broadcasts a computer performs while communicating and maintaining itself on the network. Reducing the number of broadcasts a computer performs limits traffic on the network, and hence increase network performance. Systems utilizing a Workgroup model must rename the computers Workgroup Name to a name other than default. When integrating other systems and networks, you must create independent workgroups by naming all of the systems that communicate together with the same workgroup name, but different from other workgroup names. Utilizing other services to provide directory and resolution information can also optimize networking while minimizing management tasks, for example, Active Directory, WINS, DNS, Domains, and so on. However, this can make some functions of the Control System dependent on these services for operation. In order to integrate these types of services into the computer, extreme care and planning needs to occur. Please refer to Advanced Online Documentation and the Network Planning Guide for further details.

447

21 – TUNING SERVER PERFORMANCE

Server redundancy This allows the system to continue operating even when a computer fails which was hosting the EBI Server. All systems in the configuration will shift to the backup server if the primary server has failed. Fast failover Some processes need to be more tolerant to total system failure. This option includes more stringent monitoring of the two servers and a faster switch-over time.

448

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

OTHER SETTINGS

Other settings The following settings and factors affect the performance of the system: •

Video settings

•

System usage

•

Topology-related settings, such as the physical location of systems and service integration.

Video settings There are no great performance gains to be made through adjustments made to video settings. The system applications and displays have been optimized for a resolution of 1280 by 1024 with a minimum of 65K colors (High Color 16 bit). Using any other setting than this will produce anomalies in some displays. In order to receive the best performance from the computer perspective, Honeywell suggests that the video card use the AGP bus and contain at least 32 MB of VRAM. This frees up the computer bus and gives the video processor a more direct line to the CPU and memory resources.

System usage The system usage itself will have an impact on the performance of the system. Most memory and CPU recommendations are based on what Honeywell considers “average” use of the system. Although highly interpretative, depending on how the system is used and/or configured may require your computers to use more memory, higher speed or multiple CPUs, larger disks, faster networking, and so on. These type of adjustments can only occur over time as you gain experience with your usage of the system. Here are some features in the system, which will affect the performance of the Supervisory Systems: •

•

Number of Stations -

The display update rate.

-

Shared versus local displays.

-

Chart visualization.

-

The number of parameters viewed (across all Stations) and their frequency of change.

Frequency of report generation.

449

21 – TUNING SERVER PERFORMANCE

•

Frequency of performed maintenance, for example, defragmentation level of the disk.

•

Number of servers in a DSA system, and the number of parameters shared.

•

History collection.

•

Event archiving.

•

Server synchronization with file backup.

As your system is adjusted over time, it is recommended you evaluate how your systems are performing and make adjustments accordingly. Related topics “Monitoring the system and assessing the need for hardware upgrades” on page 451

Topology-related settings The types of configurations discussed in this section are not factored in to the published performance specifications for the system. Adjustments would have to be made accordingly. Physical location of systems The location and distance between each node becomes a factor in the performance. EBI Servers are designed to be within the same network. If “hops” are introduced, then timing parameters need to be adjusted due to the increased time to perform such things as synchronization. As tasks take longer to complete, they affect the other running tasks on the system. Station performance will also be affected if it is running remotely. Monitor the Server Performance using the instructions in outlined in “Monitoring the system and assessing the need for hardware upgrades” on page 451. Service integration Adding services, such as Active Directory, to the EBI Server have an impact on the servers CPU and memory usage. This must be taken into consideration when planning the hardware purchase for your server. Related topics “Monitoring the system and assessing the need for hardware upgrades” on page 451

450

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

MONITORING THE SYSTEM AND ASSESSING THE NEED FOR HARDWARE UPGRADES

Monitoring the system and assessing the need for hardware upgrades Most monitoring of the system is done during the operational phase of the system. Frequently, during the configuration phase, some components of the system are “maximized” to reduce the amount of time to perform the task.

451

21 – TUNING SERVER PERFORMANCE

Configuring the Performance Monitor To configure the Performance Monitor 1

In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools.

2

Double-click Performance.

3

Click the Add button on the toolbar (the button with a + icon) to display the Add Counters dialog box.

4

Add the following counters. To add a counter: a. Select the performance object in the Performance Object list. b. Select the counter in the Select counters from list. c. If required, select the instance in the Select instance from list. d. Click Add.

452

Ref number

Performance object

Counter

Instance

1

Paging File

% Usage

\??\C:\pagefile.sys

2

System

Processor Queue Length

3

System

Context Switches/Sec

4

Processor

% Processor Time

_Total

5

Processor

% Interrupt Time

_Total

6

Server Work Queues

Queue Length

0

7

Server Work Queues

Bytes Transferred/Sec

0

8

TCP

Segments/Sec

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions

MONITORING THE SYSTEM AND ASSESSING THE NEED FOR HARDWARE UPGRADES

Interpreting the Performance Counter values Paging File Usage Evaluating the Paging File Usage counter will tell you whether or not your computer has enough physical RAM. The counter itself tells you how often the computer is using the Paging File. Average values approaching 40% or higher are a strong indication that the computer is running without enough memory. Recommendation: Add more Physical RAM. Processor Speed and Quantity In order to evaluate whether or not your computer has adequate processing power, you must look a several counters: •

System/Processor Queue Length

•

System/Context Switches/Sec

•

Processor/% Processor Time

•

Processor/% Interrupt Time

•

Server Work Queues/Queue Length

(Reference Numbers 2-6) The Processor Queue Length indicates how many threads are waiting for CPU time. Evaluating the Average will give you an idea of how well the system is supporting the configuration. Generally, numbers averaging from 2 to 15 indicate the system could receive a benefit by moving to a faster CPU. Numbers averaging above 15 indicate the system could receive a benefit by moving to a Multiple CPU system. (Microsoft states that systems with average queue lengths above 2 indicate processor congestion.) Evaluating the Context Switches/Sec will give you an idea of how busy the system is. The counter measures the number of times a thread voluntarily relinquishes the processor, is preempted by a higher priority ready thread, or switches between user-mode and privileged (kernel) mode to use an Executive or subsystem service. The Percent Processor Time indicates the utilization of the processor measured in a percentage. Average percentages higher than 50% usually indicate that the system could benefit from an upgrade to a faster processor or multiple CPU system. The Percent Interrupt Time indicates how often the system is handling hardware related tasks and indicates where CPU congestion might exist. Evaluating this counter may assist you in customizing your system configuration and usage to gain the best performance.

453

21 – TUNING SERVER PERFORMANCE

The Server Work Queue Length indicates the workload the server is performing. A sustained queue length greater than four might indicate processor congestion. It is recommended that you evaluate all these counters before considering an upgrade for the CPU. Faster speed processors will not always solve CPU performance problems. Some systems will require the use of multiple CPUs. If you are unsure of the CPU requirements of your system, it is recommended you purchase a system capable of supporting multiple CPUs. This leaves you the option of going to higher speed CPUs as well as the ability to add a second. Networking Network utilization is best-measured using third party tools to evaluate the network hardware itself. However, you can gain knowledge by how a particular server node is performing by looking at the following counters: •

Server Work Queues/Bytes Transferred/Sec

•

TCP/Segments/Sec

With these counters, you can also evaluate the network using the pre-installed network diagnostic tools provided with the network drivers. Two exist depending on platform and configuration: •

3Com Diagnostic Tool: For use with 3Com Cards on the following platforms: GX200, GX240, and Precision 340. To access, choose Start > Programs > 3Com NIC Utilities > 3Com NIC Doctor.

•

Intel Pro Set: For use with Intel Pro Cards on the following platforms: GX240 and Precision 340 with FTE, and all PowerEdge Servers. To access, double-click the Intel ProSet icon in Windows Control Panel.

EBI clients utilize two types of methods to communicate with the Server. To adequately evaluate the performance of this mechanism, it requires viewing both counters at the server to determine how busy the network/server is performing these tasks. The Bytes Transferred/Sec shows how busy the server is servicing network clients. This is the rate at which the server is sending and receiving bytes with the clients. The TCP/Segments/Sec shows the amount of TCP traffic sent or received by the Server.

454

www.honeywell.com/buildingsolutions